MSIG Volume IV - Sewage Treatment Plant

Table of Contents
Page
Section 1
Introduction and General Planning Requirements
Purpose of This Volume

Who Should Use This Volume
Related Reference Material
General Planning and Design Approval Requirements
Guidelines for Design Calculations
Guidelines for Drawings
3
3
3
4
5
7
Table 1.1
Recommended Population Equivalent
Figure 1.2 Typical Process and Installation Diagram
10
Figure 1.4 Typical Mass Balance Diagram
12
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Figure 1.1 Typical Hydraulic Profile
Figure 1.3 Typical Process Flow Diagram
Figure 1.5 Typical Electrical Single Line Diagram

Section 2
2.1
Design Overview
2.2
2.3
11
12
Treatment Plant Classification
15
2.1.2 Classification by Treatment Plant Capacity
16
2.2.1 General Selection Considerations
16

2.1.1 Classification by Biological Treatment

Processes

Treatment System Selection / Design

2.2.2 Design Stages
2.2.3 Detailed Design Criteria

Safety and Health Principles
2.3.1 General Safety
2.3.2 Structural Safety
2.3.3 Equipment and Electrical Safety
15
16
20
20
23
23
24
25
Table 2.1
Classification by Treatment Plant Capacity
Section 3
Sewage Characteristics and Effluent Discharge Requirements
3.1
3.2
16
Introduction
29
3.2.1 Purpose of Effluent Standards
29
EQA Effluent Standards
3.2.2 Interpretation of EQA Effluent Standards
29
29
3.3
3.4
Design Requirements to Achieve EQA Effluent Standards
30
3.3.2 Design Values
30
3.3.1 Purpose of Design Requirements

Sewage Pollutants Removal
31
3.4.3 Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD)
32
3.4.2 Total Suspended Solid (TSS)
3.4.4 Oil and Grease (O&G)
3.5
3.4.5 Nitrogenous Compound

3.4.6 Phosphorus Compound
Sludge Characteristics and Treatment Requirements
Table 3.1
Design Influent Values
Section 4
Requirements for Physical Design
Table 3.2
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
ii
31
3.4.1 Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD5)
30
Design Effluent Values
32
32
33
33
34
30
31
Introduction
37
4.2.1 Buffer Zones
37
Treatment Plant Siting

4.2.2 Siting Criteria
4.2.3 Environmental Impact Assessment

4.2.4 Hazard and Operability Studies
Treatment Plant Sizing
4.3.1 Modular Units
4.3.2 Standby Units
4.3.3 Back-up Capacity

4.3.4 Design Flow
Land Area Requirements
4.4.1 Class 1 and 2 Plants
4.4.2 Mechanised Class 3 to 4 Plants
4.4.3 Aerated Lagoons and Stabilisation Ponds

4.4.4 Imperfect Sites
4.4.5 Reduced Land Areas for STPs
37
39
39
40
40
40
40
41
42
42
42
42
43
43
43
4.5
Mechanical and Electrical Requirements
53
4.5.2 Vibration
54
4.5.1 Mechanical Installation
4.5.3 Noise
4.5.4 Safety Around Equipment
4.5.5 Motors, Controllers and Motor Starters

4.5.6 Power Supply Systems
4.5.7 Back-up Generator
4.5.8 Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies

4.5.9 Control Cabinets
4.5.10 Control Requirements
4.5.11 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
Systems (SCADA)
53
54
55
55
57
58
59
60
62
64
4.5.12 Early Warning System (EWS)
65
4.5.14 Cables and Cabling Installation
67
4.6
Table 4.1
Table 4.3
Table 4.2
Table 4.4
Table 4.5
Table 4.6
4.5.13 Instrumentation
4.5.15 Earthing and Lightning Protection

4.5.16 General Purpose Power
4.5.17 Manuals, Drawings and Labelling

4.5.18 Hazardous Areas
Material Requirements for STP Structures and Installations

4.6.1 Concrete and Reinforcement
4.6.2 Steel
4.6.3 Fibre Reinforced Plastic (FRP)

4.6.4 Aluminium
4.6.5 HDPE (High Density Polyethylene)

Modulation Requirements
Land Area Requirements for Class 1

Land Area Requirement for Class 2
Land Area Requirements for
Land Area Requirements for
Required Land Area for Stabilisation Pond and Aerated

Lagoons
65
68
69
69
70
70
70
72
74
76
77
40
44
45
45
46
47
iii

Figure 4.1

STP Land Area Requirements for Planning Layout Approval 49

for New Development
Guidelines For Buffer Zone
Figure 4.2
Figure 4.4
Figure 4.3
Figure 4.5
Section 5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5

5.6

5.7

5.8

iv
STP Land Area Requirements for Structure Plans
50
Plan View of Buffer Zone Requirements
52
Clear Working Space
Requirements for Individual Treatment Processes
51
57
Introduction
81
5.2.1 Purpose of Primary Screens
84
Design of Primary Screens

5.2.2 Inlet Chamber
5.2.3 Design Requirements for Primary Screens

5.2.4 General Requirements
Design of Pump Stations
5.3.1 Purpose of Pump Stations

5.3.2 Design Requirements
84
84
85
86
91
91
91
95
Design of Secondary Screens
100
100
5.4.1 Purpose of Secondary Screens

Design of Grit and Grease Chambers
5.5.1 Purposes of Grit and Grease Chambers

5.5.3 Design Criteria
Design of Balancing Tanks
5.6.1 Purposes of Balancing Tanks
Design of Primary Sedimentation Stage
5.7.1 Purposes
Design of Biological Treatment Stage
5.8.1 Introduction
5.8.2 Conventional Activated Sludge System (CAS)
5.8.3 Extended Aeration System (EA)
5.8.4 Rotating Biological Contactors (RBC)
5.8.5 Trickling Filter
100
101
101
102
103
105
105
105
106
106
106
108
108
109
111
114
116

5.8.6 Sequencing Batch Reactors (SBR) System
117

5.8.7 Design Requirements for Hybrid Systems
120

5.8.8 Design for Nutrient Removal for Sensitive
120

Receiving Water

5.9
Design of Secondary Clarifiers
122

5.9.1 Purpose
122

122

5.9.3 Multiple Hoppers
123

5.10
Disinfection
125

126

5.11
Design of Flow Measurement Devices
130

5.11.1 Purpose of Flow Measuring Devices
135

5.11.2 Design Requirements for Flow Devices
135

5.12
Sludge Holding, Treatment and Disposal
136

5.12.1 Introduction
136

5.12.2 Sludge Strategy in General
137

5.12.3 Provision of Sludge Holding, Treatment and Disposal 138

5.12.4 Design Criteria
139

5.13
Tertiary Treatment
144

5.13.1 Introduction
144

5.13.2 Design Requirement
144

Table 5.1

Table 5.2

Table 5.3

Table 5.4

Table 5.5

Table 5.6

Table 5.7

Table 5.8

Table 5.9

Table 5.10

Table 5.11

Table 5.12

Table 5.13

Table 5.14
Requirement for Inlet Chamber

Provision of Primary Screens
Design Parameters for Primary Screens
Recommended Design Parameters for Inlet Pump Stations
Provision Requirement of Secondary Screens
Design Parameters for Secondary Screens
Provision Requirement of Grit and Grease Removal System
Design Parameters for Grit Chambers
Design Parameters for Grease Chambers
Design Parameters for Balancing Tanks
Design Parameters for Primary Sedimentation
Design Parameters for Conventional Activated Sludge
System
Design Parameters for Extended Aeration
Design Parameters for RBC Plants
84
85
86
99
100
101
103
103
104
106
108
110
111
112
v
Table 5.15
Table 5.16

Table 5.17

Table 5.18
Table 5.20
Table 5.19
Table 5.21
Table 5.22
Table 5.23
Table 5.24
Table 5.25
Table 5.26
Table 5.27
Figure 5.1
Figure 5.2
Figure 5.3

Figure 5.4

Figure 5.5

Figure 5.6

Figure 5.7
Figure 5.9
Figure 5.8
Design Parameters for Trickling Filter
117
Design Requirement for Biological Nutrient Removal

System
120
Requirements for Disinfection Facility
126
Design Requirements for SBR System
Design Parameters for Secondary Clarifiers
124
Design Guides for Disinfection with Ultra-Violet (UV)
130
Design Guide for Disinfection with Hypochlorite

Design Guide for Intermittent Disinfection
Design Parameters for Flow Devices
Sludge Generation Rates
Design Parameters for Sludge Thickening
Design Parameters for Aerobic and Anaerobic Digestion

Recommended Design Parameters for Sludge Treatment
Typical Treatment Process Flow Chart
Typical Elements and Process Flow Diagram of a Sewage

Treatment Plant
Typical Drawing of Double Penstock
Quantities of Screenings Collected From Primary Screens

Typical drawing of screen chamber based on depth.
(<5m for different PE)
133
134
135
136
139
140
141
82
83
85
88
89
Typical drawing of screen chamber based on depth.

90
Typical Dimensions of Dry-well Submersible Pump Station
94
Typical Dimensions of Wet-well Submersible Pump Station
93
Typical details of wet-well pump station
97
Figure 5.10 Typical details of dry-well pump station
98
Figure 5.11 Fine Bubble Diffuser Air Extended Aeration System
113
Figure 5.13 Deep Shaft Activated Sludge System
116
Figure 5.12 Oxidation Ditch Activated Sludge System
Figure 5.14 Rotating Biological Contactor (RBC) Systems

Figure 5.15 Typical Process Flow Diagram for Biological Nutrient

Removal System

Figure 5.16 Schematic illustration of ultraviolet disinfection system

with stilling plate for flow conditioning and elongated

weir for level control
vi
119
114
119
121
126

Figure 5.17 Profile schematic of lamp modules relative to inlet and

outlet structure

Figure 5.19 Chemical-feed system schematic
127
146
Figure 5.20 Sludge Treatment and Disposal Strategy
Section 6
Figure 5.21 Typical Roof Details for Covered Sludge Drying Bed
6.1
6.3
6.2
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.10
6.12
6.14
6.9
6.11
6.13
6.15
6.16
6.17
6.18
6.19
6.20
6.21
6.22
6.23
6.24

Table 6.1

Table 6.2

Table 6.3
Requirements for Ancillary Facilities
127
143
Introduction
149
Mess Facilities and Ablutions
150
Water Supply and Wash Water

Roads and Access
Drainage
Fencing and Security
Beautification Zone and Landscape
Stores and Workshops

Spares
Yard Lighting
Sampling Facilities
Auto Restart Facilities

Safety Facilities
Doors
Fire Hydrant
Power Supply
Internal Sanitation (Toilet)

Lifting Requirement
Ventilation
Process Water
Aesthetic
Close Turfing
Standard Roofing and related requirement
Painting
149
152
153
154
159
159
159
161
162
162
163
163
163
164
164
164
165
168
168
168
168
169
Minimum Number of Recommended Water Stand

150
Pipe and Location
Spare Part
161
Numbers of Unit and Location of Compound Lighting
161
vii
Table 6.4
Common ventilation rates
167
Figure 6.1
Standard Details for Stand Pipe
151
Table 6.5
Figure 6.2
Figure 6.3
Figure 6.4
Figure 6.5
Figure 6.6
Figure 6.7
Figure 6.8
Figure 6.9
Painting System Index Colour Standards

Typical for Administration and Mess Facilities Building
Typical Details of Road Pavement
Typical Road Section of Site Road
Typical Drawing of Brickwall Fencing and Gate

Brickwall Fencing
Precast Fencing
Masonry Fencing
Typical Details of Compound Lighting
Figure 6.10 Typical Detail of Guard Rail
Figure 6.11 Typical Detail of Lifting Davit
Figure 6.12 Typical Detail of A-Frame Lifting Facilities

Section 7
7.1
170
152
152
152
155
156
157
158
162
171
172
172
Special Requirements
Temporary Treatment Plants
175

7.1.2 Category 1: Temporary Treatment Plant for

Upgrading of Facilities
175
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.1.1 Definition
7.1.3 Category 2: Temporary Plants for New Housing

Development
176
7.2.1 Introduction
172
Treatment Plants Located Within Buildings
179
7.2.2 Specific Guidelines and Requirements
180
Fully Enclosed Treatment Plant

7.3.1 Definition
7.3.3 Specific Requirements
Covered and Buried Treatment Plants

7.4.1 Definition
7.4.2 General

7.4.3 Specific Requirements for Covered or Buried

Plants under 5,000 PE or Less
viii
175
181
185
185
186
194
194
194
194
7.5
Guidelines for Homestead Developments

7.5.1 Single Developments up to 30 Units or 150

PE in Total
197
197
7.5.2 Single Developments Over 30 Units in Total

with Average Housing Density Greater Than

Five Units per Hectare
197

7.5.3 Single Developments Over 30 Units in Total with

Average Housing Density Less Than Five Units

per Hectare
197
Non-Compliance with Standards
198

7.6.2 Types of Incidents that Can Cause Treatment

Plant Failure
198
198
7.6
7.7
7.8
Section 8
8.1
8.3
8.2
8.4
7.6.1 Introduction
Energy Saving
Recycle and Reuse

Package Sewage Treatment Plant
201
201
Definition
205
Design Requirement
206
Land Area Requirement

Components of Package Sewage Treatment Plant

8.4.1 Layout, Piping and Arrangement of Prefabricated

Biological Treatment System
205
206
206
8.4.2 Prefabricated Tanks
206
Appurtenances
208

8.5
8.6
8.4.3 Process Treatment Units/Components

8.5.1 Piping system
8.5.2 Pumping System

8.5.3 Diffuser
8.5.4 Flow Distribution Chamber
8.5.5 Manhole Cover/Inspection Chamber Cover

8.5.6 Anchor System Loading
8.5.7 Landscaping
8.5.8 Odour Treatment
8.5.9 Ancillary Facilities

Marking and Labelling
207
208
209
210
210
210
211
211
211
212
212
ix

Table 8.1

Minimum Design Life Span of Package Sewage

Treatment Plant Components
206
Technical Requirements of Pumping System
209

Table 8.2

Table 8.3
Table 8.4
Recommended Number of Tanks and Effective Volume

Consideration for Various Unit Processes
207
Technical Requirements of Manhole Cover
210
Appendices
Appendix A Table
Table A1
Table A2

Table A3

Table A4
Table A6
Table A5
Table A7
Table A8
Contaminants of Concern in Sewage Treatment
216
Major Biological Treatment Processes Used for Sewage

Treatment
218
Typical Composition of Untreated Domestic Sewage
217
Interim National River Water Quality Standards for Malaysia 220

River Clarification
221
Permissible limits for potentially toxic elements in soil
223
The Occupational Safety and Health Act 514, 1994 - Brief

Summary of Contents
Options for disposal of Sludge and reuse of bio-solids
Appendix B References
222
224
Malaysian Standards
227
European Standard
229
British Standard
ASTM Standard
AS Standard
Other Reference Materials
Other Guidelines in This Set
Appendix C Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System (SCADA)
228
231
232
232
232
C-1
Introduction: Overview
237
C-3
General Requirements
238
C-2
C-4
C-5
C-6
C-7
C-8
C-9
C-10
C-11
C-12
C-13
Purpose
Architecture
SCADA Requirement
Operator Interface
Database
Alarm/Event Management
Historian
Graphical Trending
Report Format
Security
Scripting
238
238
239
240
241
241
243
243
244
244
245
xi
C-14
Interfaces
245
C-16
Web Server
245
C-15
Distributed Server Architecture
245
C-17
Digital Video Monitoring
246
C-19
Application Report
247
C-18
C-20
C-21
C-22
Integrated Maintenance Management

Application Programming Interface
User Documentation
Specifications and Sizing
246
247
248
248
Appendix D Duty and Standby Requirements

Table D.1

Duty and Standby Requirements for Activated Sludge

Systems (Utilising Diffused Aeration)
268

Table D.3

Duty and Standby Requirements for Rotating Biological

Contactor Systems
270

Table D.2

Table D.4
Duty and Standby Requirements for Activated Sludge

Systems (Utilising Mechanical Surface Aerator)
269
Duty and Standby Requirements for Trickling Filter Systems 271
Appendix E Glossary of Abbreviations

xii
Glossary of Abbreviations
275
Section 1
Introduction and General
Planning Requirements
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
1.1
Purpose of This Volume

This volume sets out the requirements of the National Water Services
Commission (SPAN) (referred to as the Commission in this document)
for the planning, design and construction of sewage treatment plants.
This volume contains the following:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
An overview of considerations and criteria for sewage treatment

plant design.
Effluent discharge standards requirements and the capacity of
different sewage treatment processes to meet these standards.
Requirements for the siting and sizing of sewage treatment
plants.
Requirements for each stage of sewage treatment.
Minimum requirements for facilities ancillary to a sewage treatment

plant.
Other special requirements for temporary treatment plants, treatment
plants within buildings, homestead developments and exemptions
for non-compliance with standards.
Requirements of sludge treatment process and disposal.
The owner must comply with the requirements set out in this volume
when submitting an application for approval to the Commissioner.
This volume does not cover any aspect other than Sewage Treatment
Plant requirements. All internal plumbing approvals need to be approved
by Local Authorities.
1.2
Who Should Use This Volume

This Volume is primarily for owners, developers, consulting engineers
and Public Authorities whose developments include sewage treatment
plants.
1.3
Related Reference Material

This Volume does not cover all aspects of design and construction of
sewage treatment plants. Where information is not covered in this volume,
the designer shall follow the requirements given in MS 1228.
However, the information in this Volume shall take precedence over
MS1228 where similar aspects are covered in these documents or where
there is conflicting information between the two documents.
Sewage Treatment Plants
Volume 4
The procedures for certification of sewerage services are given in the

Malaysia, Volume 2 Sewerage Works Procedures.
All Standards references adopted during this revision exercise are compiled
and given in Appendix B.
1.4
General Planning and Design Approval Requirements

The application procedures for sewage treatment plants approval shall
follow the requirements given in MSIG Volume 2. In general, the
application for approval of a treatment plant shall include:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
Sufficient land area for the sewage treatment plants plus additional
area to allow for extensions to the plant, where necessary.
Land of suitable configuration shall be provided.
Sufficient buffer zones.
The location of a sewage treatment plant in relation to a particular

catchment area. The plant unit processes shall be located at an
elevation which is not subject to flooding/wave action, or shall
otherwise be adequately protected against all flooding/wave
action.
Sufficient topographic features shall be included to indicate its
location in relation to streams and the point of discharge of the
treated effluent.
Schematic flow diagrams showing utility systems serving the
plant processes and the flow through various plant units.
Pipeworks, including any arrangements for bypass from individual

units. The direction of flow and the content in the pipes shall
also be clearly and permanently painted onto all exposed piping
works.
Hydraulic profiles showing the flow of sewage, supernatant liquor,
and sludge.
Location, dimensions and elevations of all existing and proposed

plant facilities.
Capacity of the effluent receiving drain/water course shall be able

to cater for additional discharge flow from the treatment plant.
Consideration for odour and noise mitigation and control through

good facility design, effective operation, containment, collection
and treatment.
Point of discharge of treated effluent (effluent outfall) and elevations
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
m)
n)
o)
p)
q)
r)
s)
t)
u)
v)
w)
Type, size, features, and operating capacity of all pumps, blowers,

motors and other mechanical devices together with manufacturer
catalogues.
Minimum, average and maximum hydraulic flows, velocities and
top water level in profiles.
Accessibility, landscaping and fencing.
Flow measurement facilities.
Materials, dimensions and specifications.
Ground conditions including levels, type, groundwater level and

safe bearing pressure of foundation.
Details of foundation and other structural design. Slope protection

works are required, where applicable.
All other components of the sewage treatment plant.
A technical report, which covers the whole life cost evaluation

of the plant.
Process and instrumentation diagram.
Mass balance calculation
x)
Clean and legible detailed drawings in standard format
z)
Where required, an EA or EIA report is needed to identify,

predict, evaluate and communicate information concerning the
adverse and beneficial impacts of the proposed treatment plant.
y)
aa)
1.5
of high and low water levels of the receiving watercourse to

which the plant effluent is to be discharged.
Operation and Maintenance needs of the plant to be addressed

at the early planning stage.
HAZOP requirement is necessary to identify the safety and

operability deficiencies in the design and operation of the treatment
plant.
Guidelines for Design Calculations

Design calculation for all unit processes shall be in sequence starting
from inlet works to biological treatments and sludge treatments as
shown in Figure 5.1. The calculation shall include:
a)
b)
c)
Sizing of each unit processes and all mechanical equipment

involved.
Mass balance for overall system and each unit process.
Influent values.
Volume 4
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Design influent and effluent values in compliance with Section

3.3.2.
Treatment plant shall be designed based on design flow.
Hydraulic profile across the treatment units to be indicated onto
to the drawings.
Each unit process must comply with the design parameters set
in Section 5.
Calculation of PE to be based on Table 1.1.
Table 1.1 Recommended Population Equivalent

Type of Premises/ Establishment
Population Equivalent
(Recommended))
Residential
5 per house
Commercial:
3 per 100 m2 gross area
Includes offices, shopping complex,

entertainment/ recreational centres,
restaurants, cafeteria, theatres
Schools/ Educational Institutions:
- Day schools/ Institutions
0.2 per student
- Partial residential
0.2 per non-residential student
- Fully residential
1 per student
1 per residential student
Hospitals
4 per bed
Hotels with dining and laundry facilities
4 per room
Factories, excluding process water
0.3 per staff
Market (wet type)
3 per stall
Market (dry type)
1 per stall
Petrol kiosks/Service stations
15 per toilet
Bus terminal
4 per bus bay
Taxi terminal
4 per taxi bay
(Ref: Malaysian Standard 1228)
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Table 1.1 - Recommended Population Equivalent (Cont)

Type of Premises/ Establishment
(Recommended)
Mosque/ Church/ Temple
0.2 per person
Swimming pool/ Sports complex
0.5 per person
Stadium
0.2 per person
Public toilet
15 per toilet
Airport
0.2 per passenger

0.3 per employee
Laundry
10 per machine
Prison
Golf course
(Ref: Malaysian Standard 1228)
1.6
1 per person
20 per hole
Guidelines for Drawings

All drawings shall be of standard format and orientation. The drawings
required include:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Overall development plan showing the whole sewerage system

and plant location.
Site layout plan showing the arrangement of the plant, buffer
zone, internal set backs and all neighbouring developments.
Site layout plans showing all the process units, main pipe runs,
electrical conduit corridors, site services (water, drains, lighting,
other services), roads and paving, landscaping, buildings, fencing
and finished level contours (or spot levels). The set out and
overall dimensions of the plant shall also be shown.
Site elevations of the plant with at least one section through

the plant in each direction. These sections shall extend at least
30 m from the plant boundary and include an indication of the
surrounding development (in block form only).
Process and instrumentation diagram (P&ID) showing all tanks,
pipes, channels, valves, mechanical equipment, instrumentation
and control loops. The P&ID can also act as a summary of
the design. It provides key details of each piece of equipment,
tank, piping, valves and instruments.
Volume 4
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Hydraulic profile showing all hydraulic pathways through the

plant including bypasses. Information to be shown includes
pipe sizes, invert levels, flow velocities, tank coping level, top
water level and freeboard. Top water level and velocities at
minimum flow, average flow and peak flow under design load
must be clearly indicated.
Schematic flow diagrams and mass balances showing flow through
all process units in the plant.
General arrangement drawings of each unit process. These

drawings shall be in sufficient details to clearly describe the shape,
size and function of each unit. The drawings shall show the
structure of the unit, piping, valves and fittings, instrumentation,
mechanical and electrical equipment, buildings, handrails, stairs,
ladders, step irons, site services such as water and lighting,
adjoining paving, roadworks, fencing, drainage, etc. Drawings
of all items should show the elevations, plan view and sectional
view (horizontally and vertically), where applicable.
Details are required of any object that would affect the operation
or maintenance of the plant that is not covered by a standard
drawing.
Required to use standard symbols and legend formats for all
drawings.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Volume 4
Volume 4
0.2m
0.4m
0.6m
0.8m
1.0m
1.2m
1.4m
1.6m
1.8m
2.0m
F.G.L.
-0.6M
PRIMARY PUMPING VALVE
SCREEN STATION CHAMBER
-0.4m
-0.2m
FGL
F.F.L.
PRIMARY PUMPING VALVE

SCREEN STATION CHAMBER
I.L.
F.G.L.
SECONDARY SCREEN
SECONDARY SCREEN
F.G.L.
CL
I.L.
AERATION TANK
AERATION TANK
TWL
CL
I.L.
TWL
TWL
F.G.L.
CLARIFIER DISTRIBUTION
CHAMBER
CLARIFIER DISTRIBUTION
CHAMBER
F.G.L.
HYDRAULIC PROFILE
I.L.
CLARIFIERS
CLARIFIERS
TWL
TWL
TWL
TWL
F.G.L.
NOTES :
OUTFALL MEASUREMENT
FLUME
HIGHEST FLOOD WATER LEVEL

NORMAL WATER LEVEL
NORMAL WATER LEVEL
FLOOD LEVEL IN RECEIVING

WATERCOURSE
OF ACTUAL PLANT DESIGN AND ACTUAL SITE SURVEY.
2. ACTUAL LEVELS SHALL BE DETERMINE FROM HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS
1. THE LEVELS SHOWN ARE FOR INDICATIVE PURPOSES ONLY.
CHLORINE CONTACT
TANK
OUTFALL MEASUREMENT
FLUME
CHLORINE CONTACT
TANK
F.G.L.


Page 7
Figure 1.2 Typical Process and Instrumentation Diagram
10
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Volume 4
Volume 4
Pump
Pump
Raw Sewage
Raw Sewage
Screen
PUMPING STATION (EXISTING)
RAW SEWAGE
SS =
BOD =
Q=
RAW SEWAGE M
SS =
BOD =
Q=
RAW SEWAGE
SS =
BOD =
Q=
Screen
Filtrate =
SCREEN CHAMBER
Filtrate =
=
=
Q
BOD
Skimmer
Water =
Oil Discharge Tank
=
=
=
Q
BOD
SS
Floor Drain Pit
Transfer Pump
GREASE CHAMBER
Oil & Grease Pump
Grit Pump
Grit Classifier
Vortex
Oil Holding Tank
SS
BOD =
GRIT CHAMBER
Mixer
Pump
Balancing
BALANCING TANK
=
=
=
Q
BOD
SS
=
=
Q
BOD
SS
MLSS =
Aerator
Supernatant Decanter
REACTOR
SEQUENCING BATCH
=
=
=
Q
BOD
SS
HOLDING TANK
SLUDGE
Pump
Waste Sludge
TANK
MEASURING
SS
BOD
BLOWER


11

Introduction
Introductionand
andGeneral
GeneralPlanning
Planning Requirements
Requirements
Figure 1.4 Typical Mass Balance Diagram

Figure
Balance Diagram
Diagram
Figure 1.4
1.4 Typical
Typical Mass Balance
INFLOW
INFLOWPARTICULARS
PARTICULARS
QQ = =
BOD
BOD= =
10%
10%SS
SStotobe
beremoved
removed
SS= =
SS
PHYSICALTREATMENT
TREATMENT
PHYSICAL
PRIMARYSCREEN
SCREEN
1)1)PRIMARY
SECONDARYSCREEN
SCREEN
2)2)SECONDARY
QiQi= =
BOD= =
BOD
SS= =
SS
Qi ++ Qr
Qr ++ Qw
Qw
QQ == Qi
BOD ==
BOD
SS ==
SS
Qe
Qe ==
BOD
BOD ==
SS
SS ==
SECONDARY
SECONDARY CLARIFIER
CLARIFIER
AERATIONTANK
TANK
AERATION
MLSS= =
MLSS
OUTLET
OUTLET
OVERFLOW
OVERFLOW SS
SS CONC
CONC==
BOD
BOD ==
Qr
Qr++Qw
Qw==
BOD =
BOD =
SS =
SS =
Qr, Xr
Qr,
Xr
Qr = X Qi =
Qr = X
BOD
= Qi =
BOD
=
SS =
SS =
AEROBIC DIGESTED
AEROBIC DIGESTED
SLUDGE HOLDING TANK
SLUDGE HOLDING TANK
Qw =
Qw ==
BOD
BOD
SS ==
SS ==
1%DS
1%DS =
SLUDGE THICKENER
SLUDGE THICKENER
Qw =
BOD
Qw ==
SS ==
BOD
4%DS
SS =
4%DS =
Qw OVERFLOW =
Qw OVERFLOW =
Sludge to be pumped to Sand Drying Bed

For
Dewatering
to 25% to
Dry
SolidDrying Bed
Sludge
to be pumped
Sand
For Dewatering to 25% Dry Solid
Figure 1.5 Typical Electrical Single Line Diagram

Figure 1.5 - Typical Electrical Single Line Diagram
Figure 1.5 - Typical Electrical Single Line Diagram
SPARE
SPARE
TO COMPOUND LIGHTING (2 nos)

TO COMPOUND LIGHTING (2 nos)
TO 13A SOCKET OUTLET

TO 13A SOCKET OUTLET
24T
24T
20A
20A
0 -3 0 A
0 -5 0 0 V
0 -3 0 A
3 0 A T P + N 1 0SK/s
AwM C C B
4 0 /0 .3 A 4 p R C C B
10A
0 -5 0 0 V
10A
S /s w
S /s w
4 0 /0 .3 A 4 p R C C B
20A
3x5A
TO 36W FLOUERECENT LIGHT

TO 36W FLOUERECENT LIGHT
B
6A
R SY/s wB
20A
RAW SEWAGE
SUBMERSIBLE
RAW SEWAGE
SUBMERSIBLE
PUMP PUMP
NO.2 (2.4kW)
Using
4c x 2.5mm
ARM Cable
NO.2 (2.4kW)
Using 4c
x 2.5mm
ARM Cable
TO CONTROL
CIRCUIT
TO CONTROL
CIRCUIT
2 x sq.
1.5mm
Using 2 Using
x 1.5mm
PVCsq. PVC
R
3x5A
0 -4 0 A
S /s w 0 -5 0 0 V
S /s w
PSR P HA SE S EQ UENC E
R E L A Y0 -4 0 A
S /s w
4 0 /0 .3 A 4 p R C C B
PSR P HA SE S EQ UENC E
R E LA Y
40A TP N 10KA M C C B
4 0 /0 .3 A 4 p R C C B
3x5A
D IS T R IB U T IO N B O X F O R
L IG H T IN G A N D P O W E R
D IS T R IB U T IO N B O X F O R
L IG H T IN G A N D P O W E R
6A
0 -5 0 0 V
TOR
TOR
w
YS /sB
TPN20A TPN20A
TOR
MCB
MCB
DOL
DOL
A
A
20A SPN20A SPN

MCB
MCB
TPN20A TPN20A
TOR
MCB
MCB
DOL
DOL
A
A
SPN6A SPN6A
MCB
MCB
13A Socket
Outlet Outlet
13A Socket
Using 2Using
x 2.5mm
sq. PVCsq. PVC
2 x 2.5mm
To Control Circuit
To Control Circuit
E. STOP
x 1.5mm sq. PVC
E. STOP Using 2Using
2 x 1.5mm sq. PVC
EQ Pump no. 2 (0.6kW)

Using 4c x 2.5mm ARM Cable
R
3x5A
PSR
6A SPN
SPN
MCB 6APSR
MCB

TOR
16A TPN
TOR
TPN
MCB 16A
DOL
MCB
DOL
Air blower motor no.2 (3.7kW)

TOR
TOR
20A TPN
TOR
MCB 20A
TPN
DOL
MCB
DOL
20A TPN
TOR
MCB 20A
DOL
TPN
MCB
DOL
TOR
16A TPN
TOR
TPN
MCB 16A
DOL
MCB
DOL

Airx blower
no.1 (3.7kW)
Using 4c
2.5mmmotor
ARM Cable
M O T O R S E .Q P U M P S A N D S S T P U M P
RAW SEWAGE
SUBMERSIBRE
PUMP PUMP
RAW SEWAGE
SUBMERSIBRE
NO.1 (2.4kW)
Using
4c x 2.5mm
ARM Cable
NO.1 (2.4kW)
Using 4c
x 2.5mm
ARM Cable
S IN G L E L IN E L A Y O U T D IA G R A M F O R
R A W S E W A G E S U B M E R S IB L E P U M P
R A W S E W A G E S U B M E R S IB L E P U M P
S IN G L E L IN E L A Y O U T D IA G R A M F O R A IR B L O W E R
M O T O R S E .Q P U M P S A N D S S T P U M P
S IN G L E L IN E L A Y O U T D IA G R A M F O R A IR B L O W E R
4 0 /0 .1 A
2P R CCB
S P +N 30K A
1 04 0K/0
A .1
MAC C B
2P R CCB
U S IN G 4 C x 1 6 m m P V C /S W A P V C A R M . C A B L E
U S IN G 4 C x 1 0 m m P V C /S W A /P V C A R M . C A B L E
U S IN G 2 C x 6 m
E m P V C /S W A /P V C A R M . C A B L E
S P +N 30K A
40A TP N 10KA M C C B
30A TP +N 10KA M C C B
10 KA M CCB
40A TP+N
30A TP +N
30A SP+N
U S IN G 4 C x 1 6 m m P V C /S W A P V C A R M . C AMBCL C
EB
U S IN G 4 C x 1 0 m m P V C /S W A /P V C A R M . CMACBCLB
E
U S IN G 2 C x 6 m m P V C /S W A /P V C A R M .MCCAC
BB
LE
R
40A TP+N
MCCB
6A
3 x 6 0 /5 A
3 x 6 0 /5 A
0 -50 0V
R
6A
PSR
V .s .s w
Y B
30A TP +N
MCCB
30A SP+N
MCCB
0 -6 0 A
V .s .s w
0 -50 0V
V .s
wS E S E Q U E N C E
P .s
HA
R E L A Y 0 -6 0 A
.sC
wB
6 3 /0 .3 A 4 pV .s
RC
PSR PHASE SEQUENCE
6 0 A T P + N 2R5EKLAA Y
(4 P O L E ) M C C B
6 3 /0 .3 A 4 p R C C B
6 0 A T P + N 2 5 K A (4 P O L E ) M C C B
415 V S U P P LY
3 PHASE
T N B M E T E R IN G
PANEL
M U L T IC O R E A R M O U R E D
C ABLE TO
T N B R E Q U IM E N T
415 V S U P P LY
3 PHASE
M A IN S W IT C H B O A R D
M A IN S W IT C H B O A R D
T N B M E T E R IN G
PANEL
M U L T IC O R E A R M O U R E D
OR O M
IN C O M IN G S C
U APBPLLEYT F
T N B R E Q U IM E N T
M A IN D B 4 1 5 V
IN C O M IN G S U P P L Y F R O M
M A IN D B 4 1 5 V
12
10
10
Volume 4
Volume 4
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Malaysian
Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Industry Guidelines
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Section 2
Design Overview
Design Overview
14
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Design Overview
2.1
2.1.1
Treatment Plant Classification

Classification by Biological Treatment Processes
The microorganisms in sewage treatment can be grown in a form of
fixed film, suspension or a combination of both. Hence, biological
treatment processes for sewage treatment works can be classified under
one of the following headings:
a)
Attached Growth Processes
c)
Combined Processes (Hybrid)
b)
2.1.1.1
Suspended Growth Processes
Attached Growth Processes

In an attached growth process, the active microorganisms grow and
attach on the mobile or immobile medium (rock or plastic) that is in
contact with sewage. The surface area of the biomass is used as the
practical measure of the total organism activity. Types of attached
growth processes include:
a)
Trickling Filter (TF)
c)
Submerged Biological Contactor (SBC)
b)
d)
e)
2.1.1.2
Rotating Biological Contactor (RBC)

Fluidised Bed
Packed Bed Reactor
Suspended Growth Processes

In a suspended growth process, active microorganisms remain in
suspension in the sewage and their concentration is usually related to
mixed liquor suspended solid (MLSS) or mixed liquor volatile suspended
solid (MLVSS). This system was developed as a result of studies
that showed that if sewage is aerated over a long period of time, the
organics in the sewage are removed by the active microorganisms grow
during the process.
Types of suspended growth processes include:
a)
Waste Stabilisation Pond System
c)
Conventional Activated Sludge (CAS)
b)
Aerated Lagoon
Volume 4
15
Design Overview
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
2.1.1.3
Extended Aeration (EA)

Oxidation Ditch (OD)
Deep Shaft (DS)
Sequencing Batch Reactor (SBR)
Any other treatment processes which comply with the design
principles of one of the above processes.
Hybrid Processes - Attached Growth with Suspended

Growth
Recent developments in sewage treatment technology include the
combination of various attached growth and suspended growth processes
to obtain the best performance and most economical treatment of
sewage.
One of the advantages of Hybrid Process is the process combines the
stability and resistance to shock loads of an attached growth process
and the capability to produce high-quality effluent of an suspended
growth system.
Hybrid processes can be used to upgrade existing attached growth and
suspended growth process, in particularly plants with high suspended
solids in the final effluent due to poor solids settlement in the final
clarifier.
2.1.2
Classification by Treatment Plant Capacity

Sewage treatment plants are also classified in accordance to the design
capacity in terms of population equivalent (PE). Table 2.2 tabulates 4
clarifications to be adopted.
Table 2.1 - Classification by Treatment Plant Capacity
Classification
PE
Class 1
Class 2
Class 3
Class 4
1000
1001 5000
5001 20000
> 20000
2.2
Treatment System Selection / Design
2.2.1
General Selection Considerations

The following factors must be considered when selecting a sewage
treatment process:
16
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Design Overview
Process
The applicability of a process is evaluated on the basis of past

experience, data from full-scale plants and pilot data from
treatment plant studies. If new or unusual conditions are
encountered, pilot-plant studies are necessary.
Flow Range
The selected process should be matched to the expected flow

range.
Flow Variation
Most unit operation and processes work best with a constant

flow rate, although some variation can be tolerated. If the flow
variation is too great, flow equalisation may be necessary.
Influent Sewage
The characteristics of the influent will affect the types of

processes to be used and the requirements for their proper
operation.
Inhibiting
Constituents
Identify the constituents present that may be inhibitory, and the

conditions they are in.
Climatic
Constraints
Temperature affects the rate of reaction of most treatment

processes.
Reaction Kinetics
and Reactor
Selection
Reactor sizing is based on the governing reaction kinetics. Data

for kinetic expressions are usually derived from experience,
literature and results of pilot-plant studies.
Performance
Performance is usually measured in terms of effluent quality,

which must be consistent with the given effluent discharge
requirements.
Treatment Residuals The types and amounts of solid, liquid and gaseous residuals
produced must be known or estimated.
Sludge Handling
Constraints
In many cases, a treatment method should be selected only

after the sludge processing and handling options have been
explored.
Environmental
Constraints
Nutrient requirements must be considered for biological

treatment processes. Environmental factors, such as the
prevailing winds and wind directions, may restrict the use of
certain processes, especially where odours may be produced.
Volume 4
17
Design Overview
Chemical
Requirements
Classify chemicals and amounts that must be committed for

a long period of time for the successful operation of the unit
operation or process.
Energy
Requirements
The energy requirements, as well as probable future energy

costs, must be known if cost-effective treatment systems are to
be designed.
Other Resource
Requirements
Identify additional resources that must be committed to the

successful implementation of the proposed treatment system
using the unit operation or process in question.
Reliability
Consider the long-term record of the reliability of the unit

operation or process under consideration.
Complexity
Evaluate the complexity of the process to operate under

routine conditions and under emergency conditions
such as shock loadings, as well as the level of training
the operator must have to operate the process.
Ancillary Processes
Identify the required support process and the effect on the

effluent quality, especially when they become inoperative.
Compatibility
The unit operation or process shall be used successfully with

existing facilities, plant expansion and modifications.
Odour and Noise
Odour and noise pollution should be minimised to the lowest

possible level.
Aesthetics
The selected treatment process should aesthetically suit the

development site.
Safety and
Operability
The chosen treatment process shall be designed with utmost care

to facilitate safe operations at all times as well as to incorporate
safety features for the protection of operators. See Section 2.3.
18
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Design Overview
Land Requirements
A more compact plant component may perform equally well to a

component taking up more land and thus would be preferential,
provided there was no significant component cost differences.
Ease of Operation
and Maintenance
This will dictate whether plant has to be continuously or

intermittently operated and whether skilled or relatively
unskilled personnel would be required to carry out the operations
and maintenance works.
Modulation
Modulation refers to the ability of process units to be expanded

in tandem with flow increases. Modulation minimises the time
that the plant sits idle before utilisation and lowers initial capital
outlay.
Standardisation
This brings about economics on design effort, material

procurement, quality checks, spares and maintenance costs.
Adaptability
Adaptability refers to the ability to readily upgrade or uprate

the performance of a treatment plant with relatively minor extra
works.
Sludge Management This is an important aspect that needs careful evaluation.

Treatment systems that minimise waste sludge production,
and which produce a relatively stable sludge should be given
preference. See Section 5.12
Overall Cost
This will include considerations of capital, operation and

maintenance costs. Spare parts costs related to maintenance
can be hidden costs that also need consideration, particularly
where there may be long time delays obtaining parts or specialist
inputs are required.
Volume 4
19
Design Overview
2.2.2
Design Stages
The design of a sewage treatment plant comprises the following

stages:
Process Design
In this stage, a suitable sequence of processes are selected

to meet stipulated final effluent requirements for the plant
concerned.
Functional Design
In this stage, calculation of capacities required are conducted

for all major units, channels, pumps and pipework and also
definition of control requirements. These include designs for
hydraulic, organic and solid loadings.
Detailed Design
In this stage, structural design of units and channels, detailing

of pipelines, fittings and control valves, and selection of
mechanical, electrical and control equipment are conducted.
2.2.3
Detailed Design Criteria

For the following characteristics and requirements of a treatment plant,
the designer needs to consider a number of detailed design criteria:
a)
Biochemical characteristics
c)
Hydraulic characteristics
b)
d)
e)
f)
2.2.3.1
Physical characteristics
Mechanical & engineering requirements

Structural requirements
Constructional characteristics
Biochemical Characteristics
These involve the consideration of the following parameters:
a)
Chemical characteristics of sewage
c)
Optimal substrate concentration
b)
d)
e)
f)
g)
20
Good activity between microorganisms and waste materials

Operational stability (half-life and activity decay profile)
Availability of suitable nutrients
Maintenance of favourable environment
Effect of filamentous growth & sludge bulking
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Design Overview
h)
Effect of dissolved oxygen
j)
Minimum and maximum residence times
i)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
p)
q)
2.2.3.2
Productivity in lifetime usage

By-product formation
pH and temperature sensitivity

Storage stability
Reactor effluent quality-composition, colour, odour, etc.

Sludge production and frequency of desludging
Effective material balance analysis
Development of biochemical kinetic coefficient through pilot

plants
Physical Characteristics
These involve the examination of:
a)
Particle shape and size distribution
c)
Swelling behaviour
b)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
2.2.3.3
Dry and wet bulk density

Compressibility
Cohesion and particle attrition

Settlement
Floc formation
Settling velocity and sedimentation
Hydraulic Characteristics
a)
Hydraulic velocities in all unit processes
c)
Axial dispersion and channelling
b)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Mode of flow, upflow versus downflow
Pressure drop and head loss through plant
Residence time distribution and retention time

Stratification
Length to width ratio
Minimum velocity for onset of fluidisation
Volume 4
21
Design Overview
i)
j)
2.2.3.4
Weir loadings
Overflow rate
Construction Characteristics
a)
Ground conditions and soil characteristics
c)
Type of plant depending on density and type of community to

be served
b)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
2.2.3.5
b)
c)
d)
e)
Delivery and construction time
Recommended maintenance requirements

Start-up time and procedure
Noise levels
Technical capability to construct, operate and maintain the

system
Wall, slab, beams, columns and structure for sewage treatment

plant shall be in reinforced concrete.
Wall shall have minimum thickness of 225 mm.
Special foundation shall be provided where necessary.

Proper jointing to prevent breakage and leakage.
Water retaining and slope protection where applicable.
Mechanical & Electrical Requirements

a)
b)
c)
d)
22
Distance to nearest habitation
Structural Requirements
a)
2.2.3.6
Land availability
The design shall simplify the equipment required, control system,

maintenance and operational procedures, while fulfilling the
intended performance and standard of service.
Equipment selected shall be from manufacturers (and models)
approved by the Commission.
Equipment, cable and cabling design and installation shall follow

IEE and TNB requirements.
Foundations shall be structurally designed and anchored to

withstand all loads imposed by the equipment. Reinforced
concrete foundations are preferred.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Design Overview
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
2.3
Joints shall be provided in all piping to allow removal of

equipment, meters, valves and other special items without causing
dismantling of the pipeline.
Equipment shall be equipped with safety protection (i.e. emergency

stop button, warning signage & etc.). See Section 4.5.
Pipeworks shall be neatly arranged and properly supported.
Appropriate type of control system provided for the treatment

plant. See Section 4.5.
Construction materials to be protected against corrosion due to

high humidity.
Earthing and protection against lightning.
System manuals, plant function diagrams, electrical system,

electrical circuit and instrument loop diagrams shall be provided
before the plant is pre-commissioned.
Detailed and shop drawing for equipment, instrumentation and
cable & cabling shall be provided.
Safety and Health Principles

Throughout the design, construction, commissioning, operation and
maintenance stages of a project, the following safety principles shall
apply:
2.3.1
General Safety
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Malaysian Safety and Health legislations, standards and procedures

under Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) 1994, Factories
and Machinery Act 1967 and etc. shall be followed.
Workforce, contractors, visitors and the public shall be safeguarded
against hazards, risk of serious injury and disease.
Adequate training shall be made available for the use of all
related equipment.
Appropriate training for end users to be identified and stipulated

in construction and procurement documents.
Appropriate responsibilities to be assigned throughout each stage
of a project.
Safety consciousness to be promoted by effective internal

communication, signs and media.
Safety performance shall be easily audited during operation and
maintenance.
Volume 4
23
Design Overview
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
2.3.2
Risk assessment to be undertaken at design of projects and

selection stage of procurement.
Safety information and operating documents to be provided by
suppliers.
Emergency contact list, showing telephone numbers of key

personnel and emergency services during office hours and out
of office hours, to be circulated to all parties involved in a
project.
Plant (certain sized) should be provided with Emergency Response

Plan (ERP)
All treatment plants, installation and construction sites, shall be
provided with perimeter fencing adequate to protect the public
from entry. All fencing shall be securely fixed and inspected.
All treatment plants, installations and construction sites shall
have adequate warning signs at or near the perimeter.
Access to construction sites shall be controlled to prevent

unauthorised access.
Structural Safety
a)
Safe access to all working areas to be provided.
c)
Any confined space requiring routine person entry, which contains

sewage, sludge or other foul water, to be ventilated.
b)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
24
All accidents or potential serious incidents to be reported and

investigated.
Routine requirement to enter confined spaces to be eliminated,

where practicable.
Concrete slabs over wet wells, tanks and chambers shall have
double steel reinforcing.
Lifting eyes and bolts for slabs to be stainless steel or any other
durable and non-corrosive material.
Protection against falling (i.e. handrail, kick plate and toe plate)
to be provided.
Within plants and installations, all wells, sumps, channels,

chambers, tanks, etc. containing any liquid shall be covered,
walled or railed.
Major hazards to be identified and posted on site.
Protection and counter measures against spillage of dangerous

chemicals to be provided.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Design Overview
j)
k)
l)
Permanent staircase shall be provided at inlet sumps, inlet wells,

inlet chambers and dry-wells. Steps and riser shall follow UBBL
Standard.
Adequate lifting facility shall be provided for heavy equipment,
which requires maintenance work.
Blower room shall not share common wall and foundation with
the control and genset room
2.3.3 Equipment and Electrical Safety

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Electrical equipment and controls to be protected from unauthorised

access.
Individual electrical drives to be capable of being isolated and
locked off.
Electrical motors should be rated as continuous run.
Junction boxes for submersible pumps and float controls shall

be above floor level outside the wet-well.
All electrical equipment in sumps, wet-wells, inlet channels, inlet
chambers, sited below coping level to be explosion proof.
Lighting, appropriate to the needs of the end user, to be provided
in working areas.
Registration of electrical / motorised equipment with Department

of Safety and Health (DOSH).
Emergency stop button / isolator shall be provided for each

equipment.
Power driven machinery to be guarded.
All equipment to be regularly checked and prominently marked

accordingly
Volume 4
25
Section 3
Sewage Characteristics and
Effluent Discharge
Requirements
28
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
3.1
Introduction
The Environmental Quality Act (EQA) 1974 specifies two standards
for effluent discharge: Standard A for discharge upstream of any raw
water intake, and Standard B for discharge downstream of any raw
water intake.
The current Third Schedule of the Environmental Quality Act 1974,
under the Environmental Quality (Sewage and Industrial Effluents)
Regulations, 1979, regulations 8 (1), 8 (2) and 8 (3) has been revisited
and the Department of Environment has proposed 8th Schedule for the
Act which stipulate effluent discharge limits for parameters specific
to domestic wastewater. The effluent discharge limits in 8th Schedule
are summarised in Table 3.2. All sewage treatment plants design shall
take into consideration of the 8th Schedule and shall comply with the
proposed limits.
3.2
EQA Effluent Standards
3.2.1
Purpose of Effluent Standards

Effluent standards are used to regulate the disposal of effluent from
STP to any receiving waters. The regulation of such discharges will
protect receiving waters and their associated aquatic ecosystems, and
will also protect public health from the harmful effects of untreated
sewage.
The need for these standards has been influenced by the fact that sewage
discharges contribute a significant amount of the biodegradable organic
matters, suspended solids and ammoniacal nitrogen to the nations
waterways.
3.2.2
Interpretation of EQA Effluent Standards

The EQA effluent standards have the following characteristics:
a)
They represent maximum or absolute values which may not be

normally exceeded. For this reason, EQA effluent standards are
also referred to as absolute standards
b)
Measurement of effluent quality is to be taken using a single

grab sample rather than a time averaged composite sample
c)
Generally, effluent standards do not allow the flexibility for

them to be compromised through dilution and the assimilative
capacity of receiving water.
Volume 4
29
3.3
Design Requirements to Achieve EQA Effluent

Standards
3.3.1
Purpose of Design Requirements

The purpose of design requirements is to ensure that the effluent standards
can be met under the normal operations of a sewage treatment plant. The
quality of effluent from a STP is expected to vary due to the natural
variability in the flows and loads into the plant. Therefore, the design
effluent parameter shall be less than the required effluent standards to
ensure that, when the plant is under normal operation, any grab sample
of effluent will comply with the consent EQA effluent standards.
3.3.2
Design Values
Typical composition of untreated domestic sewage is given in Table
A.2, while Table 3.1 tabulates the design influent values to be adopted
in the design of a treatment plant.
Table 3.1 - Design Influent Values
Value (g/
capita.day)
Value (mg/l)
Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD5)
56
250
Suspended Solids (SS)
68
300
Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD)
113
500
Total Nitrogen (TN)
11
50
Ammoniacal nitrogen (AMN)
30
Total Phosphorus (TP)
10
Oil and Grease (O&G)
11
50
Parameter
These design values allow for transient reductions in treatment efficiency,

due to periodic plant maintenance and unforeseen high impulse of
hydraulic and organic loadings on sewage treatment process units. All
STP shall be designed to produce final effluents with BOD5, SS, COD,
O&G and AMN values less than or equal to the design effluent values.
This is to ensure a high degree of consistent compliance with the
required effluent standards. The effluent E.Coli compliance is subject
to the sensitivity of the receiving watercourse and of the Commissions
directive.
30
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Table 3.2 - Design Effluent Values

Effluent Discharge to Rivers / Stream
Parameter
Standard A
Absolute Design
BOD5
SS
COD
AMN
Nitrate
Nitrogen
Total
Phosphorus
O&G
Standard B
Absolute Design
Effluent Discharge to
Stagnant Water Bodies*
Standard A
Standard B
Absolute Design Absolute Design
20
50
120
10
10
20
60
5
50
100
200
20
20
40
100
10
20
50
120
5
10
20
60
2
50
100
200
5
20
40
100
2
20
10
50
20
10
10
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
10
10
10
Notes:
NA = Not Applicable
All values in mg/l unless otherwise stated.
* Stagnant Water Bodies refer to enclosed water bodies such as lakes, ponds and
slow moving watercourses where dead zone occur.
In cases where treatment plant discharge capacity is higher than the

receiving river flow rates, the final effluent quality has to be designed
to ensure minimal environmental impact.
3.4
Sewage Pollutants Removal
3.4.1
Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD5)

BOD5 is used to measure the biodegradable organic fraction in raw sewage.

Based on standard BOD5 measurement, the oxygen demand measured
is usually influenced by the following three (3) phenomena:
a)
b)
c)
Oxygen demand by breakdown of soluble carbonaceous matter
Oxygen demand by breakdown of suspended particulate carbonaceous

matter
Oxygen demand by oxidation of ammonia to nitrate by nitrifying
bacteria present in the effluent sample
After undergoing biological treatment in the secondary reactor, residual

soluble carbonaceous BOD 5 matter present in the effluent reduces
in concentration to below 15 mg/l. Subsequently, nitrifying bacteria
populations tend to grow rapidly feeding on ammonia which is present
Volume 4
31
in the partially treated sewage. Nitrification may not be complete at

levels of 5 mg/l of residual soluble carbonaceous biodegradable matter.
It depends on whether sufficient oxygen is available for the oxidation
of ammonia to nitrate. Hence, all BOD 5 measurements shall adopt
nitrification inhibition step to ensure that the carbonaceous oxygen
demand is reflected accurately in the overall BOD5 measurement.
3.4.2
Total Suspended Solid (TSS)

Sewage contains solid materials that can settle at the bottom and also
give impact on the benthic life. They can also appear in suspension
solids form that can increase turbidity and affect the light availability
for aquatic life. The amount of solids in sewage is usually measured as
total suspended solids or TSS. The desired solid removal in sewage
treatment plants should not exceed the absolute TSS discharge limit of
50mg/l and 100mg/l for Standard A and Standard B, respectively.
To ensure effluent consistently complies with Department of Environments
Effluent Limits, provisions must be made to allow for future incorporation
of a flocculator in the clarifier. This will enhance clarification performance.
Chemical (polymer) can also be added in flocculation clarifiers to
further enhance solids settlement in the clarifiers. Otherwise, a dual
media filtration system following conventional secondary clarifiers can
also be used to ensure that TSS concentration of 20 mg/l to 40mg/l is
consistently achieved.
3.4.3
Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD)

COD content reflects the chemically oxidized organic matter. Hence,
it includes refractory fractions of organic matter as well as reduced
inorganic constituents present in the wastewater. The COD measurement
offers quick estimate of carbonaceous material compared to conventional
BOD measurement. Additionally, high COD reflects inert reduced
inorganic elements and also unbiodegradable organic that comes from
industrial contamination. Based on the bi-substrate hypothesis, COD
fractions comprising of readily biodegradable, slowly biodegradable
and unbiodegradable estimates are adopted in advanced modeling for
STP design. Such advanced modeling takes into consideration the
treatment process requirements of different COD fractions as it varies
in susceptibility to microbial respiration and degradation.
3.4.4
Oil and Grease (O&G)

O&G that is detected in domestic sewage refers to the fraction of organic
matter that is soluble in organic solvents such as hexane.
32
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
The composition comprise primarily of wax, edible oils and fatty

matter of animal or vegetable origins. O&G (mixture of tri, di and
mono-glycerides) in its liquid form results in floatable scum formation
in treatment systems whilst its solid form causes the clogging of
systems.
O&G is separated from raw sewage by provision of grease chambers (be
it manual or mechanized scum skimmer removal) at primary treatment
stage. Removal at the primary stage is essential to prevent interference
of oil particles on biological reactions in the secondary treatment. It
also prevents undesirable organic load of extremely slow biodegradable
constituents into aerobic systems. Such first line oil and grease removal
protects against contamination in the treatment plant as well as in the
receiving water.
3.4.5
Nitrogenous Compound
Removal of nitrogenous compounds needs to be considered in STP design.
These compounds found in various forms (ammonia or ammoniacal
nitrogen, nitrate nitrogen and nitrite nitrogen) could be detrimental to
natural water bodies and potable consumption. Total organic nitrogenous
compounds in raw sewage typically comprise of nitrogen in the form
of proteins, amino acids and urea along with ammoniacal nitrogen.
Ammoniacal nitrogen results from the decomposition of organic nitrogen
particularly from hydrolysis of urea. Total Kjedhal Nitrogen (TKN)
analysis determines the organic nitrogen and the ammoniacal nitrogen
fractions.

3.4.6

There are two main biological processes for removing nitrogenous

compounds, namely the assimilation of ammonia nitrogen into the
microbial biomass and the nitrification-denitrification process. The
latter involves two conversion steps. Firstly, nitrification followed
by denitrification by microbial heterotrophs that convert nitrates into
nitrogen gas. Nitrification comprises two-step oxidation of ammonia
nitrogen into nitrate by nitrifying bacteria. All treatment systems shall
provide full nitrification and denitrification in the secondary biological
reactors with sufficient air supply to facilitate nitrification. This will
ensure that effluent discharge complies with the required discharge
limits.
Phosphorus Compound
The constituents of total phosphorus compounds in raw sewage are
organically bound phosphorus and inorganic phosphorus (orthophosphates
and polyphosphates).
Volume 4
33
Some fractions of the essential phosphorus nutrients from the influent

will be assimilated for microbial growth during secondary biological
treatment. However, excessive phosphorus nutrient will occur when above
the assimilated with stagnant receiving water bodies (e.g. ponds), which
will result in nutrient enrichment and produce harmful algae blooms.
Hence, the design for sewage treatment plant effluent that discharges
into stagnant water bodies should take into considerations the impact
of excess phosphorus contamination.
3.5
Sludge Characteristics and Treatment Requirements

Sludge treatment and management are as important as the sewage
treatment to minimise impacts to the environment. Sludge produced
from treatment process is usually in liquid form, which typically
contains 0.25 to 4.0% of solids, depending on the type of treatment
process being used. It also contains grease, fats, organic and inorganic
chemicals. High concentrations of certain components will determine
the type of sludge treatment process to be used.
Sludge shall be thickened, stabilized, conditioned and dewatered before
it is finally disposed off in accordance to requirement stipulated by
Department of Environment. The dried sludge must attain a minimum
of 20% dry solid content before off-site disposal. Close attention is
required when planning and designing sludge treatment processes to
ensure bio-solid to be disposed do not contain any harmful substance
that will affect the environment. Additionally, stabilization process should
be designed to reduce any potential presence of microbial pathogens.
Options of ultimate disposal include landfill and land application.
34
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Section 4
36
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
4.1
Introduction
The induced physical, chemical and biological reactions that occur in a
sewage treatment plant (STP) lead to waste emissions in the following
forms:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
gases and vapours, some of which contain obnoxious compounds,

including bacteria and viruses.
noise.
odour.
vibration.
unwanted solid matter.
undesirable by-product liquors containing highly concentrated
pollutants.
heat.
As such, a sewage treatment plant can degrade the amenity of its

surroundings, especially in residential areas.
Careful consideration of siting is required to minimise nuisance to the
public. Sufficient land needs to be set aside during the planning stage
to take into account regional treatment plant development and the
proper sewerage planning for housing, commercial and institutional
developments.
This section sets out the important factors and considerations associated
with the identification of proper sites to locate sewage treatment plants.
Typical workflows in the site for sewage treatment plants are illustrated
in Figures 4.1 and 4.2. It also addresses the selection of appropriate
treatment concepts and sufficient land area requirements for treatment
plants in relation to the effluent standards.
4.2
Treatment Plant Siting
4.2.1
Buffer Zones
Suitable buffer distances should separate a sewage treatment plant from
its surrounding areas. Buffer Guidelines for the Siting and Zoning of
Industries as recommended by the Department of Environment (DOE)
should be referred to during the planning of suitable location for
treatment plants. The buffer distances recommended in the guidelines
depend on the category of industry being considered.
Volume 4
37
The provision of buffer zones is essentially an environmental requirement

controlled by the relevant planning authority. The agreement of the Local
Planning Department on buffer zone and plant siting should be sought
at an early stage in the Town and Country planning procedures.
The buffer zone requirements for treatment plants to be observed under
this Guideline are as follows. Refer to Figures 4.3 and 4.4 in this
section for further clarification.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Minimum distance of 30 m from the fence of the treatment plant

to the nearest habitable building property line within residential
and commercial development.
to the nearest property line within industrial development.

to the nearest habitable building property line if the proposed
treatment plant is fully enclosed. A fully enclosed plant is defined
in section 7.3.1.
A minimum distance of 10 m from the fence of the treatment
plant to the nearest habitable building property line if the
proposed treatment plant is covered or buried. However, this
reduction in buffer requirement does not apply if the nearby
habitable buildings are of high rise type. A covered or buried
plant is defined in section 7.4.1.
Plants with PE less than 150 but are provided with proper odour
and noise mitigation measure may have a 10 m reduced buffer
at the discretion of the Commission.
The buffer zone can be used for any purpose except permanent habitable
buildings. For example, the buffer zone maybe used as a drainage
reserve, road or highway reserve, transmission reserve, utility reserve
or public park.
In the case where buffer area is to be regularly used by the residents
such as car park and playgrounds, proper precautions during design
stage must be taken to minimise nuisance such as odour, noise and
unpleasant sight to the surrounding environmental. Adequate and proper
screening, odour containment and treatment facilities must be provided
at the sewage treatment plant to address these issues.
38
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
4.2.2
Siting Criteria
The following criteria shall be observed when siting treatment plants.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Plants shall be located as far as possible from habitable building

to minimise nuisance to the surrounding.
Plants shall be located at the lowest point of a sewerage catchment

basin so that sewage can gravitate into the plant.
Plants shall be located near to a suitable watercourse that is able
to receive and assimilate treated effluent from the plant without
reducing beneficial uses of the water course downstream.
Plants shall be located on an area that is relatively flat or with
relatively mild slope across the site that would be useful in
promoting efficient hydraulics.
The shape of the land area selected shall be such as to minimise

the extent of unusable area within the lot.
Plants shall not be located in an area that will result in long
term operational problems or rapid deterioration of the assets.
Plants shall have proper access road leading to it.
Plants shall be sited away from the followings:
i)
ii)
iii)
Existing cemeteries and gazetted reserves for cemetery.

Religious centres.
Eating places.
i)
Plants shall be located such that sewers are easily connected/

conveyed to the proposed site.
j)
If temporary treatment plants are to be provided, they shall be

located as near as possible to public trunk sewers.
k)
For safety reasons, plants shall be located away from children

playgrounds.
Emergency bypass shall be provided either at the last manhole or wetwell. The bypass shall discharge to the nearest drain which shall have
sufficient capacity to cater for the discharge during rainfall.
4.2.3
Environmental Impact Assessment

An environmental appraisal or environmental impact assessment (EIA)
study shall follow Environmental Quality (Prescribed Activities)
(Environmental Impact Assessment) Order, 1987 under Section 34A
of the Environmental Quality Act, 1974 (the EIA Order, 1987 and the
Volume 4
39
EQA, 1974 respectively). The type and scope of the study will depend
on the classification of the plant and the environmental sensitivity of
the locality being considered. EIA shall be conducted in compliance
with Volume 2 of the MSIG.
4.2.4
Hazard and Operability Studies

Hazards and Operability (HAZOP) study shall be conducted in compliance
with Volume 2 of the MSIG. The type and scope of the study will
depend on the classification of the plant.
4.3
Treatment Plant Sizing
4.3.1
Modular Units
Stage development of a STP is governed to a large extend by the timeframe
of the overall development plan of the catchments and the size, shape
and soil condition of the land reserved for the STP. Modular units will
be constructed to cater for the stage development. In determining the
appropriate number of modules and corresponding timing for a staged
development, it is crucial for the designer to estimate the flow capacity
build-up over the entire development phases. The modules must have
sufficient capacity to treat the sewage to meet the efficient discharge
standard, without compromising the economical viability of operation
and maintenance. Too many modules and unit processes will definitely
increase equipment maintenance. On the other hand, inadequate modules
will result in an inefficient treatment performance due to insufficient
capacity and flexibility during the early stage.
Table 4.1 Modularisation Requirements
STP Classifications
No. of Modules
No. of Trains
Class 1 (<1,000PE)
N/a
Class 3 (5,001PE
20,000PE)
Min. 2, Max. 3
Class 2 (1,001PE 5000PE)
Class 4 (>20,000PE)
Min. 4, Max. 10
Max 2
Max 2 for each

Module
Max 2 for each
Module
Table 4.1 indicates the modularisation requirements in accordance to

sewage treatment plant classes to attain an efficient modularisation of
sewage treatment plant development. Each module shall be of equal size
40
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
and of similar treatment process. If the proposed process is different from

the original system, special approval is required from the Commission.
Certain unit processes are subject to the modularisation requirements
in Table 4.1 while other unit processes are designed for the ultimate
phase during the first stage of the development. An example of this
is the headworks of a STP designed for the ultimate phase while the
secondary processes are added progressively as the future phases come
on-line.
Modular treatment plants that are designed with two (2) or more parallel
streams must be provided with pipeworks and valves to isolate each
stream of unit process during maintenance and major shut down without
interfering normal operation of the remaining stream.
4.3.2
Standby Units
To avoid significant down time in sewage treatment and overloading
of the process units, standby units shall be provided for the following
processes:
a)
Inlet Works/Pumps
c)
Grit Chambers
b)
d)
e)
f)
Screen Facilities
Biological Treatment
Secondary Clarifiers
Sludge Facilities
The common standby mechanical equipments are as follows:a)
Pumps (raw sewage, effluent, sludge, etc)
c)
Blowers
b)
d)
Mechanical screens
Any other mechanical equipment
Detailed requirements of standby units shall follow the requirements

in Section 5.
4.3.3
Back-up Capacity
The back-up capacity provided shall be such that when one unit process
is taken out of operation, the remaining units shall not be overloaded
beyond 50% of their rated capacities.
Volume 4
41
4.3.4
Design Flow
It is recommended that unit processes that are designed on average flow

basis are sized to allow for infiltration in accordance with MS 1228.
Conveyance networks shall be sized to cater for peak flows, except for
those networks located downstream of an equalisation tank. All unit
processes shall be designed based on the maximum ultimate design
flow.
4.4
Land Area Requirements
The recommended land area requirements for various sewage treatment

plants capacities are derived from relevant treatment process concepts
and also taken into consideration other design criteria.
The land area requirements and buffer allowance for temporary sewage
treatment plants maybe reduced at the discretion of the Commission on
a case by case basis.
4.4.1
Class 1 and 2 Plants
The recommended land area requirements for Class 1 and 2 plants (up
to 5000 PE) are given in Table 4.2 and Table 4.3 respectively. The net
area does not include the 30 m buffer zone surrounding the plant, but
does include appropriate set backs and access paths within the plant. The
area requirements given are sufficient to achieve an effluent conforming
to Standard A discharge requirements. It is important that allowance
is made for sufficient buffers in planning approvals, to avoid future
complaints in relation to the siting of the plant.
4.4.2
Mechanised Class 3 to 4 Plants
For Class 3 and 4 plants with mechanised systems, the recommended

land area requirements are given in Table 4.4 and 4.5. These systems
are to be used in normal developed and urbanised areas. The net area
does not include the 30 m buffer zone surrounding the plant, but does
include appropriate set backs and access paths within the plant. The area
requirements given are sufficient to achieve an effluent conforming to
Standard A discharge requirements. It is important that allowance is made
for sufficient buffers in planning approvals, to avoid future complaints
in relation to the siting of the plant.
42
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
4.4.3
Aerated Lagoons and Stabilisation Ponds
For aerated lagoon and stabilisation pond treatment systems, the

recommended land area is as shown in Table 4.6. Sufficient buffer areas
shall be allowed for surrounding the plant as per paragraph 4.2.1.
4.4.4
Imperfect Sites
The recommended land area requirements represent an ideal case, where

it is possible to locate the STP within a rectangular land area that is
relatively flat. In practice, the allocated land may be irregular in shape,
sited in low lying or undulating to steep valley terrain. For such cases,
suitable adjustments to the land area requirement have to be made.
Thus, the shape and elevations of the land allocated for the STP development
must be determined during planning stage so that the configuration of
the STP can be planned properly in order to allocate adequate land for
the purpose. This also enables estimates for additional land required. It
may also be required to cut or fill operations to level the land.
4.4.5
Reduced Land Areas for STPs
The area requirements, as stipulated in Table 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5 and 4.6,
must be adhered to as strictly as possible. The required areas in these
tables include appropriate setbacks and access paths within the plant.
However the areas have not include any buffer zone surrounding each
plant as indicated in Section 4.2.1.
In developments where land is really a constraint the Commission may

consider for a reduced land area requirement. The project proponent will
have to demonstrate clearly the need for a reduced land area before an
approval can be granted. For this case, detailed design calculations of
all unit processes, together with the proposed layout, shall be submitted
at the planning stage for consideration of approval by the Commission.
Otherwise, the land area required under these guidelines must be
followed.
Volume 4
43
Table 4.2 Land Area Requirements for Class 1
Population
Equivalent
Land Area
Requirement *
(acre)
(m2)
100
210
0.052
150
285
0.070
200
360
0.089
250
430
0.106
300
485
0.120
350
545
0.135
400
600
0.148
450
655
0.162
500
700
0.173
550
745
0.184
600
790
0.195
650
835
0.206
700
870
0.215
750
905
0.224
800
940
0.232
850
980
0.242
900
1010
0.250
950
040
0.257
1000
1070
0.264
Note: * The required area only includes appropriate setbacks and access paths
within the plant but not the buffer zone surrounding each plant as indicated in
Section 4.2.1.
44
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Table 4.3 Land Area Requirement for Class 2

Population
Equivalent
1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
3000
4000
5000
Land Area
Requirement *
(m2)
1115
1160
1200
1240
1275
1310
1340
1370
1395
1420
2226
2671
3076
(acre)
0.276
0.287
0.297
0.306
0.315
0.324
0.331
0.339
0.345
0.351
0.55
0.66
0.76
Table 4.4 Land Area Requirements for

Mechanised Class 3 Plants
Population
Equivalent
Land Area
Requirement *
(ha)
(acre)
5001
0.31
0.76
6000
0.40
0.99
7000
0.49
1.21
8000
0.59
1.46
9000
0.69
1.71
10 000
0.78
1.93
15 000
1.00
2.47
20 000
1.19
2.95
Section 4.2.1.
Volume 4
45
Table 4.5 Land Area Requirements for

Mechanised Class 4 Plants
Population
Equivalent
20 001
25 000
30 000
35 000
40 000
45 000
50 000
55 000
60 000
65 000
70 000
75 000
80 000
85 000
90 000
95 000
100 000
110 000
120 000
130 000
140 000
150 000
160 000
170 000
180 000
190 000
200 000
250 000
300 000
450 000
Land Area Requirement *

(ha)
(acre)
1.19
1.37
1.53
1.81
1.97
2.12
2.23
2.37
2.52
2.67
2.93
3.27
3.49
3.69
3.89
4.07
4.25
4.57
4.87
5.14
5.39
5.63
5.84
6.05
6.25
6.43
6.60
7.36
7.98
9.36
2.95
3.38
3.79
4.48
4.88
5.25
5.52
5.84
6.22
6.61
7.23
8.07
8.61
9.12
9.61
10.06
10.49
11.29
12.02
12.70
13.32
13.90
14.44
14.95
15.43
15.89
16.32
18.20
19.73
23.14
Section 4.2.1.
46
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Table 4.6 Required Land Area for

Stabilisation Pond and Aerated Lagoons
Population
Equivalent
Standard A*
Standard B*
(ha)
(acre)
(ha)
(acre)
2000
0.48
1.18
0.45
1.10
4000
0.89
2.20
0.71
1.75
3000
5000
10 000
15 000
20 000
25 000
30 000
35 000
40 000
45 000
50 000
55 000
0.69
1.09
2.03
2.92
3.78
4.62
2.68
5.01
7.2
9.3
11.4
5.45
13.5
7.05
17.4
6.26
7.85
8.63
9.40
60 000
10.16
70 000
11.68
65 000
1.69
10.92
15.5
19.4
21.3
23.2
0.59
0.82
1.31
1.72
2.09
2.42
2.74
3.04
3.32
3.59
3.86
2.04
3.24
4.25
5.16
5.99
6.77
7.50
8.2
8.9
9.5
4.11
10.2
4.60
11.4
25.1
4.36
28.9
4.83
27.0
1.45
10.8
11.9
75 000
12.42
30.7
5.06
12.5
85 000
13.91
34.4
5.50
13.6
80 000
90 000
95 000
100 000
13.17
14.64
15.37
16.10
110 000
17.54
130 000
20.38
120 000
18.97
32.5
36.2
30.0
39.8
43.3
46.9
50.4
Volume 4
5.28
5.72
5.93
6.13
6.54
6.93
7.31
13.1
14.1
14.6
15.2
16.2
17.1
18.1
47
Table 4.6 Required Land Area for Stabilisation Pond and

Aerated Lagoons (Continued)
Population
Equivalent
140 000
150 000
160 000
170 000
180 000
190 000
200 000
Standard A*
Standard B*
(ha)
(acre)
(ha)
(acre)
21.79
53.8
7.69
19.0
24.57
60.7
8.40
20.8
27.32
67.5
23.18
25.95
28.68
30.04
57.3
8.05
19.9
64.1
8.75
21.6
70.9
9.43
23.3
74.2
9.09
9.76
22.5
24.1
Note: * The required area only includes appropriate setbacks and access paths within the
plant but not the buffer zone surrounding each plant as indicated in Section 4.2.1.
48
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Figure 4.1 STP Land Area Requirements for Planning Layout

Approval for New Development
Start
Determine catchment
served
Determine ultimate PE
Identified effluent
requirement
Apply sitting criteria
Is development
> 2000 PE?
Is development
in urban area?
Use land area from

Table 4.2
(Class 1 plants)
Use land area from

Table 4.3,4 and 5
(Class 2 to 4 plants)
Use land area from

Table 4.6
(pond systems)
End
Volume 4
49
Figure 4.2 STP Land Area Requirements for Structure Plans

Figure 4.2 STP Land Area Requi
rements for Structure Plans
Start
Local plan
Plan
formulation
Formulation
Perform the next two

steps concurrently
Determine natural
drainage catchments
Determine suitable
receiving waters
Calculate ultimate
catchment PE
Identify effluent
standards
Look up land area
requirements in
Tables 4.2, 4.3, 4.4 or 4.5
Table 4.2:
Up to 1000
1,000PE
PE
Table 4.3, 4 and 5:

Greater than1000
than1,000PE
PE
for urban areas
Table 4.5: For remote

area siting of STP
Apply siting criteria
Select and zone

suitable site
Consider multi-use of
buffer areas
Reserve land for STP
End
50
Volume 4
42
V ol ume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
M al aysi an S ewerage
I ndustry G ui del i nes

Figure 4.3 Guidelines For Buffer Zone

Figure 4.3 Guidelines For Buffer Zone
Plants Situated In Residential / Commercial Areas
Treatment Plant Site
Buffer Zone 30m Min.
Residential /
Commercial Plot
5m Min.
Access And
Screening
Property
Boundary
STW Fence
Open Treatment
Plant
Beautification
Zone
Residential /
Commercial Plot
5m Min.
Access and
Screening
Enclosed Plant
Property
Boundary
STW Fence
Residential / Commercial Plot
5m Min.
Access And
Screening
Property
Boundry
STW Fence
Buried / Covered
Plant
Residential / High Rise
5m Min.
Access and
Screening
Enclosed Plant
Property
Boundary
STW Fence
Plants Situated In Industrial Areas

Industrial Plot
5m Min.
Access And
Screening
Open Treatment
Plant
Factory Fence
STW Fence
Note : The buffer area can be used for roads, drains, utility reserve, agricultural or other similar
purposes.
Volume 4
Volume 4
51
43
52
Volume 4
44
Volume 4
30m Surround For Residential and Commercial

Development
20m Surround For Industrial Development
10m Surround For Fully - Enclosed Plants
10 m
20 m
30 m
STP LAND AREA

REQUIREMENT
The land shall be relatively flat and of a regular shape. Any unusable
area within the plot shall be minimised.
Note: Buffer areas can be used for roads, drains, utility reserve, public
parks, agricultural or similiar purposes other than permanent
habitable buildings.
10 m
20 m
30 m

Figure
PlanView
View of
of Buffer
Figure
4.44.4- Plan
BufferZone
ZoneRequirements
Requirements
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
4.5

Some general guidelines on the design and installation of mechanical
and electrical equipment are outlined below.
4.5.1
Mechanical Installation
I)
Design Considerations
The designer shall consider incorporating the following criteria:

a)
b)
c)
The design shall simplify the equipment required, control system,

maintenance and operational procedures, while fulfilling the
intended performance and standard of service.
The brand and models of major drive equipment (e.g.: pumps,

blowers, aerators, clarifier scrappers, etc.) shall be those approved
by the Commission.
The types and makes of equipment provided throughout the

facility shall be standardised, whenever possible.
d) Only new and genuine equipment shall be provided.

e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
II)
a)
b)
c)
Equipment sizing and selection shall minimise energy and other

consumables costs.
The minimum economic life of equipment.
Material selection shall be in accordance with the Commission

specifications or/and other relevant international standards.
Components shall be robust and suitable for use. Where thin metal
sheeting is used, it shall be stiffened to minimise distortion.
Water storage tanks shall not be placed on the roof top of any
control room; all water supply system shall be homed with
separate entrance.
Installation
The base frame of rotational equipment or any equipment that may
induce vibration shall be provided with anti-vibration mount.
All moving parts shall be designed and installed in a manner
that is inherently safe to operate.
Foundations shall be adequately designed to include all dynamic

load and anchored to withstand all loads imposed by the equipment.
Reinforced concrete foundations are preferred.
Volume 4
53
d)
Equipment shall be accurately located, levelled and secured

by holding down bolts. Non-shrink grout shall then be used to
complete the foundation. In some cases, a resilient connection
to the foundation is required, in which case, the manufacturers
instructions shall be followed.
e) Holding down bolts shall be of stainless steel and shall be of a

minimum grade 316 if in contact with sewage.
f)
g)
h)
Puddle collar is required for all pipe passing through all

walls.
Appropriate joints shall be provided in all pipeworks to facilitate

the removal of equipment, meters, valves and other special items
without dismantling the entire pipeline.
Valves shall be provided for isolation purpose.
i) Outdoor and dry installation pump shall be provided with

housing.
j)
k)
4.5.2
The designer must ensure that the unit processes are arranged
in such a way to prevent/reduce criss-crossing of piping works,
unnecessary bends, choking of interconnected pipe and excessive
hydraulic losses through the system.
The platform level of mechanical equipment and controllers of

any process unit shall be located above design flood level.
Vibration
All revolving parts shall be properly balanced both statically and
dynamically so that in running up to, at full normal operating speeds,
and at any loads up to the maximum there shall be no undue vibration
anywhere in the machine or transmitted to the adjacent structure. The
criteria adopted for vibration severity shall be the RMS value of the
vibration velocity in millimeters per second.
The bare frame of rotational equipment or any equipment that may induce
vibration shall be provided with anti-vibration mount. Where rotational
equipment or equipment which may induce vibration is connected to
piping, then vibration isolator shall be provided.
4.5.3
Noise
Noise levels from machinery shall comply with the Factories and
Machinery (Noise Exposure) Regulations 1989 and Occupational Health
and Safety Act. Noise control measures and appropriate safety protection
for operators must be provided where necessary.
54
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Noise control measures shall be implemented to control the generated

noise level to below 65 dB at a distance of 2 m from the boundary
of the housed noise source at all times. Additionally, the general
noise levels generated shall be measured 10 m from any point of the
plant site within the nearest public space and/or occupied space to an
acceptable level stipulated by the appropriate regulators. Silencers and
acoustic enclosures shall be provided as required to achieve the above
noise level reduction.
Enclosures used to achieve these noise reductions shall permit ready access
to the equipment for routine maintenance. Adequate air ventilation shall
be provided to allow cooling of the enclosure to prevent overheating
of the equipment/motors.
Noise level measurement shall be made with a sound level meter which
complies with BS EN 60651 and which is fitted with an A weighting
network. The sound pressure level shall be measured in dB (A).
Noise level for all electronically operated electrical device such as soft
starters, variable speed drives and others shall be conform to IEC, EN.
Thus it shall fulfil all EMC Immunity requirements complying with
EN500082-1, EN50082-2, EN50082-3.
4.5.4
Safety Around Equipment

All designs and equipment shall be made and installed with safety in
mind. Nothing in this Design Guidelines shall remove the designers
obligation to incorporate equipment or designs that would increase the
safety of the plant.
The installation layout and equipment design shall not allow any item
of equipment to be so positioned that danger could arise to operating
personnel and equipment during normal operation and maintenance.
Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of switch board,
control panel, cables, switch gears, lighting, small power, rotational
equipment, other electrical equipment and accessories.
All facilities shall be designed to comply with the Occupational Safety
and Health Act 514, 1994; properly designed treatment plants will
enable the operator to safely handle the treatment plant throughout
its design life. The plant shall also be designed to comply with other
related Acts such as IEE, Akta Bekalan Elektrik 1990 (Akta 448) and
Peraturan-Peraturan Elektrik 1994.
Safety level for all electronically operated electrical device such as soft
starters, variable speed drive and others shall conform to IEC, EN, UL,
NFC and VDE. Thus it shall fulfill EN 50178, EN 60204-1, EN 60950
(2000, 3rd edition), IEC 61800-5.
Where appropriate, IEE and Akta 448 (1990) and Peraturan Elektrik
1994 must be complied within all electrical installation.
Volume 4
55
The following shall be provided:

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
All moving parts shall be protected by suitable guards. Where

inspection is required, an open mesh with frame and suitably
supported maybe used. The maximum aperture of the mesh shall
be 6 mm.
All guards shall be readily removable and replaceable to they

correct orientation only. However the guard shall be designed
with features to prevent accidental dislocation from its original
position. The fasteners when dropped during dismantling, must
be easily retrievable and should not damage any equipment or
endanger personnel, else fixed fasteners shall be used.
An emergency stop button, preferably of mushroom head type
shall be located adjacent to all equipment. More than one
emergency stop button shall be used, if access around the item
is restricted.
Long items, such as conveyor belts, shall have an emergency

lanyard applied to each accessible length of conveyor.
Surfaces which are greater than 50C shall be guarded.
Permanent warning signs shall be posted at visible location at

all dangerous areas and shall clearly indicate the nature of risk
at that area. This includes warning signage at digesters area,
high tension room, low voltage room, generator room and other
hazardous areas.
Clear working space as recommended in Figure 4.5 shall be
provided.
Automatic CO2 discharge triggered by heat and smoke sensors
shall be installed in high voltage switch room, transformer room,
low voltage switch room and generator room.
i) High tension room shall have signage to clearly indicate the

purpose of the room and also safety signage to prevent unauthorised
entry.
56
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Figure 4.5 - Clear Working Space

1 m or 1.5 W or
whichever greater
Wall
Equipment
Wall
1 m or 1.5 W or
whichever greater
Equipment
L
4.5.5
1 m or 1.5 W or
whichever
greater
Motors, Controllers and Motor Starters

I)
a)
b)
c)
Motors
Provide readily replaceable anti-condensation heaters for motors
that do not require frequent operation.
At least three thermistors to be provided for motors which are
>50 kW.
Electrical motors should be rated as continuous run.
d)
Motors > 22kW shall be protected with soft starter or variable

speed drive.
e)
Where water hammer prevails, frequency inverter shall be

provided.
f)
II)
a)
b)
The appropriate cooling system based on the requirements of

the equipment shall be provided.
Controllers
Start push buttons to be green and recessed
Stop push buttons to be red and recessed
Volume 4
57
c)
Emergency stop push button to be red and mushroom head

type
d) ON signal lamps to be green

e) OFF signal lamps to be red
f)
III)
Trip signal lamps to be amber
Motor Starters
a) Up to 3.7 kW Direct-On-Line starters

b)
Above 3.7 and up to 7.5 kW Star/Delta starters
d)
More than 22 kW Soft starter
c)
e)
Above 7.5 and up to 22 kW Auto-transformer starters

Above 50 kW Variable speed drive is preferred
Soft starting of motors above 30kW or greater in size is necessary to

minimise power disturbances (e.g. power surge) and process disturbances
(e.g. water hammer). Variable speed drive shall be considered at
application where variable capacity maybe need to enhance the process
flexibility, for example, aeration device and blowers.
4.5.6
Power Supply Systems

Power supply to sewage treatment plants shall be as follows:
Category
Supply Requirements
Sewage Treatment
Plant
Single incomer with properly design control All Class 1, 2 and 3

overflow system during power failure (all STPs
electrical control system shall be located above
design flood level)
B1) Single incomer with diesel generators for

back-up supply.
STP Class 4
B2) Single incomer with control overflow system

and genset contribution fee.
a)
58
Where a SCADA system is provided and essential parameters are

to be monitored during power supply interruptions, a DC supply
or a UPS (uninterrupted power supply) must be provided.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
b)
Batteries/UPS shall have the capacity to operate the SCADA

system for a minimum 6 hrs during power failure to safe last
event, to monitor the essential parameters and to enable early
warning system.
c) No direct tapping of power is allowed from distribution board

(DB). Proper protection shall be provided for any direct connection
from switchboard. Earth leakage current breaker (ELCB) shall
be provided for DB.
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
4.5.7
The power system distribution shall be designed to achieve a

minimum power factor of 0.9. For phase development, the plant
and power system distribution shall be designed for maximum
load and installed in appropriate modular unit to ensure that
the minimum power factor is achievable at all phases of
operation.
Equipment shall be protected by either moulded case circuit

breaker (MCCB) or miniature circuit breaker (MCB) based on
its suitability. Electrical design calculations shall be provided to
justify each selection.
Every control circuit shall be protected with separate MCB.
TNB meter panels shall be installed close to the site entrance or

adjacent to but physically separated from the main switchboard.
Suitable flexible steel conduit with approved adaptors shall be
supplied and fitted between the main switchboard.
All metering panel shall be located flush with the fence and
door opening from outside to enable TNB inspector to read the
kWh and kVAhr reading.
Provide earthing connected with Current Transformer (CT) for
Large Power Consumer (LPC) (i.e. consumption with more than
100A or 10kW).
To provide earthing connected to ELCB/RCCB/ELR or Over

Current & Earth Fault relay to protect overcurrent and surge
current to all wiring connected to TNB metering panel for Large
Power Customer (LPC) or Ordinary Power Customer (OPC). Test
for earthing system shall be below or equal 1 Ohm.
Back-up Generator
a)
b)
If diesel generators are to be provided they shall be used for

essential loads only (these include influent pumping in pump
station, feeding pumps in balancing tank, decanter for SBR;
minimum 30% aeration requirement; emergency services system,
essential lighting and ventilation system.
Where generators are installed, they must be accompanied with
the necessary supporting systems, including automatic cut-in
Volume 4
59
c)
d)
e)
4.5.8
in the event of mains failure, fuel storage and transfer; and if

installed indoors, including ventilation, fire detection/protection
and working alarms.
In the event of power interruption/failure; when diesel generators are

used, the SCADA shall be powered by UPS or DC battery.
For plants 100 000 PE, the capacity of the back-up generator
may vary provided detail calculation must be provided to justify
that sewage can be kept in aerobic condition for a maximum
duration of 6 hours
Gen-set shall be sized to the incoming TNB voltage requirement.
Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies

a)
b)
c)
For simplicity, separate the Supply Authority Metering from the

main switchboard
Electro galvanised plates to be used to protect materials against
corrosion due to high humidity
Panel isolators and door locks to be capable of padlocking open
with 6 mmc - hasp padlock
d) Use separate panel boards for general purpose light and power
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
4.5.9
Cabinets are to be constructed to prevent the ingress of insects

and vermin
For incomer above 400 A, provide over current and earth fault
protection on all starter circuits in excess of 200 A
Where a circuit has a main and standby supply, provide an
isolator in each supply circuit
Junction boxes for submersible pumps and float controls shall

be above the floor or any possibility of flood level and must
not be located in the wet well.
Control Cabinets
(I)
a)
b)
60
Group all motor starting equipment for an area into multi-motor,

starter control board
General
Provide 900 mm minimum clearance between an open door and
any fixed object.
Provide 900 mm clearance between open cabinet doors of facing

cabinets.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Front access cubicles to have the electrical clearance distances

between door mounted equipment and gear tray mounted equipment
as specified in the regulations.
Mount all equipment inside cabinets on gear trays.
All cabinets to have a base frame, at least 50 mm high.
All control panels shall be provided with phase sequence

relay.
All control rooms shall be isolated from invasive environment

of the sewerage system, where carbonisation, corrosion or
condensation may occurs that lead to short-circuiting.
h) Height to be no greater than 1600 mm internally.

i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
Mount cabinet on reinforced concrete plinth, 200 mm minimum

above ground.
Provide a reinforced concrete paved area for the full width of
the cabinet and extending 1 m in front of the cabinet doors,
when they are opened.
Cable entry from the top only.
Provide forced ventilation fan for cubicles housing PLC

equipment.
Provide ventilation for variable speed drives and soft starters.
n) Natural ventilation is suitable for direct-on-line, star-delta and

auto transformer starters.
o)
(II)
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
The minimum acceptable IP rating and tests required shall be

clearly specified.
Outdoor Cabinets
Self contained, free-standing, weatherproof cabinets to be
constructed of marine grade aluminium, stainless steel grade
316 or glass reinforced plastic.
Mount control indication and alarm facilities on internal
doors enclosing compartments housing electrical plant and
equipment.
Provide external doors with security locking facilities.
Provide double roofs on cabinets to reduce solar effects.
Wall mounted outdoor weather proof control panel shall come

with an awning extended by at least 2 m from the wall.
Floor mounted outdoor weather proof control panel shall come
with a roof extended 2 m from the panel.
External weather proof control panel of equal and more than

100 A shall be provided with permanent CO2 fire extinguisher.
Volume 4
61
4.5.10
Control Requirements
This section outlines the general philosophy on control requirements
for the whole facilities.
NO.
TYPE OF PLANT
EWS + PC
(monitoring) /
Data Logger
SCADA
1.
Network Pumping Station

(NPS)
< 100 000 PE
100 000 PE
2a.
Sewage Treatment Plant
Class 3 STPs
Class 4 STPs
2b.

requires full automation, e.g.
sequencing batch reactor.
Class 1, 2 and 3
Class 4 STPs
2c.

(Standard A)
Class 1, 2 and 3
Class 4 STPs
Notes : EWS Early Warning System
I)
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
62
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
General Considerations
PLC shall restart automatically once the power supply reinstate
after a power supply interruption.
PLC shall be equipped with manual over-ride features.
Continuously running drives shall restart automatically after a

power supply interruption.
Plant to have time delayed restarting sequences for equipment
to avoid overloading power supply.
Transducers shall be used to sense the signal for related warning

alarms.
Trip and shutdown to be measured by separate relays.
The operating status and condition of the process shall be verified

by measuring appropriate performance indicator and not by
inference.
SCADA room shall be air-conditioned.
Telephone line must be laid during construction for all sewerage

works to be equipped with SCADA.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
II)
a)
b)
III)
a)

Manual Control
Interlocks shall be provided to prevent damage to the equipment
during equipment start up, for example, bearing overload,
overheated, temperature, loss of cooling water, no flow when
operating.
Selector switches to be provided at one location so that an
equipment can be manually operated from that location.
Drive Systems
Each drive must be independently provided with the following
features :
i. ON
ii. OFF
iii.
AUTO
-
-
-
starts and runs the drive

stops the drive
operates the drive in accordance with
automatic control system
b)
Indicate operation by an ammeter
d)
Local annunciation on motor starter of each fault condition.
c)
e)
IV)
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Record running hours with a local indicator and by computation

in a central SCADA system where applicable.
Record kilo-Watt.hour (kWh) of major drive equipment.
Automatic System Control Facilities
Displays operator adjustable parameters, examples set point of
top water level in a tank and the target dissolved oxygen level
for a process.
Ability for the authorised operator to adjust the set point of
operator adjustable parameters. A default value should always
be provided.
Displays to advise operator of the set points of non-operator

adjustable parameters. Examples would include the overflow
level on a tank and the trip temperature for a bearing.
Displays measured values by all instruments, used to measure
flow, level, DO, pH, temperature or applicable parameters.
The process control sequences must ensure system problems

such as water hammer overtorque or overpressure the equipment
of air compressors. Time delayed in starting and stopping of
equipment where multiple duty units are installed, use a value
with slower rate the final stage of closing, vary the speed of
equipment during starting and stopping are some of the option
for consideration in careful process automation.
Volume 4
63
4.5.11
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems

(SCADA)
SCADA is the acronym for Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition.
The term refers to a large-scale, distributed measurement (and control)
system. SCADA systems are used to monitor or/and to control chemical,
physical or transport processes. The following briefly describe the
requirements of SCADA while the detail requirements of SCADA are
listed in Appendix C.
The term SCADA usually refers to a central system that monitors
and controls a complete site. The bulk of the site control is actually
performed automatically by a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC).
Host control functions are almost always restricted to basic site override or supervisory level capability. Provision of SCADA system shall
be in accordance with Section 4.5.10.
I)
Control Systems
a)
b)
All equipment shall be tagged in the SCADA system.

Develop sequential function diagrams to specify the control logic
to suit the process operation for each system.
c)
Check the process operation against the resulting sequential
function diagram.
d)
PLC programs to be written in modular form to aid fault finding
and commissioning.
e)
Design programs to be fail to safety. That is, PLC failure will
cause plant to stop.
f) On restoration of supply, all controlled system shall be returned
to the ready position before automatic restart takes place.
g)
Bench test all application programs for PLC, before program
installation on site.
h)
Conduct functional control circuits tests for all items of
equipment.
i)
Ensure PLC programming software licences are delivered.
j)
Provide paper copy listing of all PLC application programs and soft
copies of application program (two copies of each required).
k)
Despite the PE, all plants which requires automation and control
shall be provided with human machine interface (HMI) at site.
II)
a)
Supervisory Systems
Where supervisory systems are used, schedule all graphic displays
required to control plant using columns to define:
i)
64
Graphic Name
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
ii)
iii)
Information displayed
Control features
b) Update times for screens to be not more than one second.
c) Nominate the alarm title to be used/displayed for each processgenerated fault input or fault generated internally by the PLC
program.
d) Nominate critical and non-critical alarms and the method of

differentiation. Examples would be: nominating an alarm on a
limit which has been reached as critical and an alarm on a limit
which is being approached as non-critical; differentiated by, for
example, red/amber lights or horn/bell).
e)
f)
At least eight variables to be displayed on a trend graph

simultaneously for ease of monitoring and comparison. This is
a measure of the level of software sophistication which should
be expected.
Supervisory system to log running hours for all plant items.
g) Nominate the reports to be generated for plant operation,

management and history. For example, reports to be daily,
weekly and monthly and the list of parameters to be reported
on in each.
h)
Alarm analysis, that is, frequency of occurrence, similar plant

faults, etc, to be provided as part of the supervising programs.
4.5.12
Early Warning System (EWS)
The EWS is used to monitor the status of the equipment operating inside
the treatment plants such as pumps and aeration equipment. It shall act
as the means to communicate information via Short Messaging Service
(SMS), e-mail or via other telecommunication mean to technical staff
for the fast recovery of the treatment system.
EWS system shall be able to transmit digital and analog values from
the remote module to the operator through their inputs (equipment) via
SMS and e-mail messages in text mode. The modules shall be able to
interpret SMS message from the operator to activate or deactivate long
distance machine (remote control).
4.5.13
Instrumentation
Provision for instrumentation shall be in accordance with the following

Table 4.7. Instruments shall be installed in such a way that they can be
removed for maintenance without interrupting the process.
Volume 4
65
Table 4.7 Required Process Instrumentation

Treatment Unit
Inlet Pump Station
Aeration
Blower
Decanter
Effluent
Sludge (WAS/RAS)
Electrical Drive
Disinfection
Polymer
Sludge Feed
Instrumentation
STP Class
Level/ Pressure
Flow Measurement
Gas Detector (H2S, CO2, O2 &
Combustible gases)
All
All
4
Air flow/ pressure/ temperature/

rpm
All
Flow Measurement
All
DO/pH/ Turbidity
Temperature
4
4
Position Indicator /Speed
All
Flow Measurement
Am/Volt/HR/kW/Power Factor
meter
All
Dosage/ Level Indicator/

Flowrate
All
Dosage/Transmittance /
Flowrate/outlet water level
indicator
All
Flowrate/ Pressure
All
For STP with PE 10 000 and above, a digital power meter is required to
be installed at all individual panel of major equipment such as raw sewage
pump, air blower, aerators, mechanical dewatering unit etc. The digital
power meter shall be able to monitor the following:
Real-Time Readings
Current, Voltage, Real Power, Reactive Power,

Apparent Power, THD (V and I)
Energy Readings
Accumulated Energy (Real kWh, Reactive kVarh,

Apparent KVAh)
Demand and peak

Readings
Current, Real Power, Reactive Power, Apparent

Power
Other:
Power Factor, Load Operating Time
All parameters measured as mentioned must be retrievable at all time.
66
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
4.5.14
Cables and Cabling Installation

I)
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
II)
General
Segregate cables into the following categories:
i)
power (less than 1000 V phase to phase)
ii)
instrumentation/telemetry
iii)
control
Wherever possible, use a separate cable-support system for each

cable category.
Separate such cable support systems by minimum clear distances

of 300 mm.
When one cable support system has to be used, separate cable
categories by minimum clear distances of 150 mm.
Secure cable at 900 mm intervals for horizontal runs and 300

mm for vertical runs.
Cable ties shall be made of non-corrosive material and if exposed
to the environment, shall have UV protection.
All cables shall be at least of double PVC protection, and if exposed
to the environment then armoured cable shall be provided.
Instrumentation
a) Use separate cables for digital and analog signals.

b)
Marshal cables in a process or geographical area into junction
boxes.
c) Use multipair cables between areas.
III)
a)
b)
IV)
a)
Buried Cables
Install cables without trees or through joints, unless approved.
All buried cables shall be laid in ducts.
Underground Ducts
Construct road crossings from uPVC conduit of minimum 100
mm diameter with 900 mm cover and encased on all sides with
150 mm concrete.
Volume 4
67
b)
c)
All other ducts to be PVC conduit laid with a minimum cover

of 600 mm. Ducts to be bedded in 75 mm sieved sand.
Provide draw strings in all ducts.
d)
Provide cable pits to suit cabling layout and to allow drain-in of

cables through the duct work. Cable pits shall be provided no
greater than 100 m apart. They shall be fitted with trafficable
cast iron covers and equipped with drainage.
e)
Seal ducts into buildings with approved systems providing a fire

rating of 30 minutes.
(V)
a)
b)
Conduits
All cabling within buildings or structures where cable trays are
not permitted, and in all external locations, shall be installed
within conduits.
Conduits installed externally shall be arranged to minimise their
length and exposure. PVC heavy duty conduit is permissible,
where it is protected from physical damage and UV. Otherwise,
metal or flexible conduits shall be used.
c) Use flexible steel reinforced conduit for connections, where relative

movement and removal for maintenance has to be considered.
VI)
a)
b)
4.5.15
Cable Support Systems

Ensure cable support systems in electrical switch rooms, equipment
(for example, pump) rooms and service galleries.
When run in common service galleries, ensure cables are not

adjacent to hot services.
Earthing and Lightning Protection

a)
Provide earthing and lightning protection to meet local

regulations.
b) Use a specialist inspector to verify the installation.

c)
68
Earthing test results shall be submitted and results shall be below

or equal to 1 ohm.
d)
Lightning arrestor test results shall be submitted and results shall

not more than 5 ohms.
e)
Earthing and lightning arrestor chamber shall be of pre-cast

material.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
4.5.16
General Purpose Power

Provide general purpose power socket outlets as follows:
a)
b)
c)
d)
4.5.17
Single phase outlet rated at 10 A adjacent to, or inside each

control cabinet and within 10 m of all equipment installations.
Three phase outlet rated at 50 A within 20 m of every screen,
sludge scraper, clarifier rake, grit collector and conveyor.
Three (3) phase (with neutral) outlet rated at 50 Amp shall be

provided at an interval of at least 20 m.
These outlets shall be water proofed industrial type switch socket

outlets (SSO).
Manuals, Drawings and Labelling

a)
b)
c)
d)
Provide equipment manuals that are specific to the plant and

instrumentation supplied.
System manuals describe the way each system manages the

individual items of plant. Ensure these are available in draft
form, before testing and commissioning commences.
Provide plant function diagrams, electrical system, electrical

circuit, Process and Instrumentation Diagram(P&ID), instrument
loop diagrams, electrical design calculations and single line
diagrams with endorsement by qualified person, before the plant
is pre-commissioned.
All plant and equipment are to be provided with inscriptions and
labels to facilitate understanding and safe operation and to satisfy
the requirements of any standards and regulations applying to
the works. Labelling includes:
i)
inscriptions on equipment, cubicles, instruments, process

controllers and on small equipment such as relays, control
switches, indicating lights, etc
ii)
identification of cables at both ends and along their

lengths
iii) identification of terminations for cable cores and cubicle

wiring in accordance with the circuit diagrams
e)
Drawings submitted shall show all unit processes to be constructed,

and equipment to be installed based on the ultimate capacity of
the sewerage system, especially for phase development where
the construction of unit processes and installation of equipment
will be based on phasing.
Volume 4
69
f)
4.5.18
Hazardous Areas
a)
b)
4.6
For treatment plant with PLC/SCADA systems, ladder diagram,

programme source codes and programming console unit shall be
provided before pre-commissioning of the treatment plant.
A plan setting out various hazardous areas and classes of electrical

hazard is required. For example, flameproof area in the vicinity
of anaerobic digesters/sludge gas compressors, chemical storages
or laboratories.
Ensure the plant and methods of construction and installation

conform to the requirements of each defined area, as this plan
will be used by the Supply Authority to inspect the area for
conformance.
Material Requirements for STP Structures and

Installations
Materials permitted for structural fabrication in treatment plants are
concrete, reinforced concrete, steel, fibreglass reinforced plastic and
aluminium. The requirements for such materials shall be in accordance
with information provided in the following sub-sections. Any others
material used for STP structures and installations shall obtain special
approval from the Commission.
Structural design of treatment plant structures shall be submitted by
registered professional engineers. They shall be in accordance with the
requirements and standards given in this section and any other relevant
standards, as well as, sound engineering practices.
4.6.1
Concrete and Reinforcement

a)
b)
c)
70
Concrete structures shall be designed in accordance with MS

1195, except that concrete structures for retaining sewage and
other aqueous liquids shall be designed in accordance with BS
8007.
Concrete shall generally comply with the relevant requirements
in MS 523.
Concrete for structures retaining sewage shall have a strength
grade not less than grade C35A. Strength grades higher than
C35A may be specified as required by the Commission.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Concrete for structures retaining sewage shall be designed for

buoyancy due to ground condition.
Concrete for purposes other than structures retaining sewage shall

have a strength grade not less than grade C20 where unreinforced,
and not less than grade C30 where reinforced. Strength grades
higher than the minimum may be specified as required by the
Commission.
Concrete structures retaining sewage, shall be lined with high
alumina cement mortar of 20 mm minimum thickness or other
approved liners/lining materials.
Concrete and cement mortar exposed to soils or groundwater

shall be made using a cement suitably resistant to sulphate attack,
as specified in this section. Where part of a concrete structure
is exposed to soils or groundwater, cement suitably resistant to
sulphate attack shall be used for the entire structure.
Cement to be used to resist sulphate attack shall be one of the
following:
i)
ii)
i)
j)
k)
Aggregates shall comply with MS 29 and shall be coarse aggregate

of 20 mm nominal maximum size.
Approval for admixtures shall be obtained prior to inclusion in

the concrete mix. All admixtures shall comply with MS 822.
Steel reinforcement shall comply with:
ii)
m)
portland pulverised fuel ash cement complying with MS

1227.
iii) ground granulated blast furnace slag complying with

MS 1387.
iv) high silica content portland cement
v) supersuphated cement complying with BS 4248.
i)
l)
sulphate-resisting portland cement complying with MS

1037.
MS 144 for cold reduced mild steel wire.

MS 145 for steel fabric.
iii) MS 146 for hot rolled steel bars.

Welding of steel reinforcement shall be in accordance with
BS 7123.
Waterstops for sealing joints in concrete shall comply with
MS 1292.
Volume 4
71
4.6.2
Steel
I)
Structural steel
a)
Structural steel sections shall comply with BS 4 or otherwise

with:
i)
EN 10162 for cold rolled steel sections.
ii)
EN 10210 for hot rolled steel sections.
iii) EN 10025 for weldable structural steel.

b)
c)
iv) EN 10296, EN 10297 and EN 10305 for steel tube.
The use of structural steel in building shall be in accordance

with MS 416.
Minor structural steelwork shall be Grade 43A complying with

EN 10025. All other steelwork shall be of appropriate grade, as
determined using MS 416 and other appropriate standards. These
shall be determined by a qualified structural engineer.
II)
Coating for steel
a)
Steelwork that may be in contact with sewage through immersion,

splash or spray, or that is over tanks containing sewage, shall be
protected against corrosion using one of the following coating
systems:
i)
high build tar epoxy system complying with AS 3750.2

and applied in two or more coats to give a total dry film
thickness of not less than 200 m.
ii)
high build micaceous iron oxide pigmented epoxy system

complying with AS 3750.12 and applied in two or more coats
to give a total dry film thickness of not less 200 m.
iii) hot dip galvanised coating of 140 m nominal thickness in

accordance with MS 740.
iv) sealed sprayed zinc coating of 150 m nominal thickness
in accordance with EN ISO 2063.
b) Other coatings providing 10 to 20 years service, before first
maintenance, as selected using Table 3 Part 8 of BS 5493 shall
be considered for approval by the Commission. Steelwork that
is exposed to the external atmosphere, except severe marine
atmospheres, shall be protected against corrosion using one of
the following coating systems:
72
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
i)
ii)
c)
a prime coat of a two pack polyamide cured epoxy zinc

phosphate of dry film thickness 60 to 80 m with a finishing
coat of a high build micaceous iron oxide chlorinated rubber
paint, spray applied to a dry film thickness of 60 to no
more than 80 m.
hot dip galvanised coating of 85 m nominal thickness, in

accordance with MS 740.
iii) sealed sprayed zinc coating of 150 m nominal thickness,

in accordance with EN ISO 2063.
Steel substrates shall be prepared before application of coatings,

in accordance with BS 7079.
d) Other corrosion protection coating systems for steelwork shall be

determined using BS 5493 or AS 2312 for tropical atmospheres
so as to provide 20 or more years to first maintenance.
e) Unprotected steelwork in contact with sewage shall be stainless
steel grade 316S31 complying with EN 10088: Part 1 and 3 or
EN 10029 and EN ISO 9445.
f)
g)
h)
Successive coatings of the one component shall be tinted a

different colour to facilitate overcoating and inspection.
All coatings shall be applied strictly in accordance with the
coating manufacturers printed instructions.
Bolts, nuts, screws and other fasteners shall have either:
i)
ii)
i)
hot dip galvanised, in accordance with MS 739
sherardized zinc coating, in accordance with BS 4921
iii) electro plating

Washers and other small components shall have either:
i)
hot dip galvanised, in accordance with MS 740
ii)
a sherardized zinc coating, in accordance with BS 4921
j) Nuts, bolts, screws and washers in contact with sewage shall be

stainless steel of Grade 316S31 steel complying with EN 10088:
Part 1 and 3 or EN 10029 and EN ISO 9445.
k)
Fasteners of incompatible material to the component being

fastened shall have suitable isolating washers and sleeves.
III)
Marine and Corrosive Environment
a)
All areas within 5 km from the coast line or salt water bodies
shall be classified as marine environment. Sewerage facilities
in marine and corrosive environment e.g. where the atmosphere
Volume 4
73
b)
or soil contains high levels of chloride, sulphates and corrosive

chemical elements or compounds shall be adequately designed
to withstand the corrosive actions of the chemicals prevalent in
the environment. Necessary protections shall be provided against
all corrosive actions of the environment.
Design requirement for facilities in marine and corrosive
environment shall include:
i)
ii)
c)
ii)
e)
4.6.3
Concrete shall be resistant to all chemical attacks and be

designed in accordance with BS 8110 Part 1: 1997.
Exposed metal shall be of corrosion resistant and of marine

grade. Proper smooth surface finishing shall be provided for the
metal. Unprotected metals acceptable for use are as follows:
i)
d)
Two coats of sodium silicate shall be applied to all external

surfaces of concrete structures.
SS316L
Aluminium alloy
iii) Materials suitable for use in corrosive environment acceptable

by the Commission
All structural steelwork shall be thoroughly descaled to BS 7079
second quality and shall be painted with 2 coats of two pack
epoxy based red lead primer before leaving the manufacturers
works. In addition, all structural steelwork shall be provided
with protective paint for chloride, sulphate or the prevailing
chemicals in the site after installation.
Cathodic protection shall be provided for all load bearing steel

structures in marine environment for a minimum life of 50
years.
Fibre Reinforced Plastic (FRP)

Only FRP products approved by the Commission shall be used and
FRP products shall not be used for access purposes.
FRP tanks, vessels and appurtenances for sewage treatment processes
shall be designed in accordance with BS 4994 and EN 13923. The
thickness of the structural section of the FRP tank wall shall not be
less than 5 mm and shall be at least of wall thickness as given in
ASTM D 4097.
All other FRP products shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 582
for FRP laminates.
74
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Notwithstanding any other requirements in standards, all FRP products,

including FRP tanks and vessels for sewage treatment processes, shall
conform to the following material requirements:
a)
FRP properties shall be as determined by design to standards

mentioned in this Section and other relevant standards, but shall
not be less than the following values:
Tensile strength - 80 MPa

Tensile modulus - 7000 MPa
Flexural strength - 140 MPa
Flexural modulus - 6000 MPa
Water absorption - 0.75 %
Barcol hardness - 40
Operating temperature - -40oC to +50oC
Specific gravity - 1.5
Fire rating ASTM E84, < 25s or Class 1 BS476
b) Unsaturated polyester resins shall be used but shall only be

isophthallic, bisphenol A fumurate or terephthalic polyester resins
meeting the requirements of Type B or C of BS 3532.
c)
d)
e)
f)
All surfaces shall have a resin rich layer, gel coat. Surfaces in
contact with sewage, water or any moisture shall comprise of
a resin rich layer at least 1 mm thick. All other surfaces shall
comprise of a resin rich layer at least 0.25 mm thick. Up to 10%
by mass of corrosion resistant glass fibres, (that is, C-glass or
E-CR glass), polyester fibres or acrylic fibres may be used in
the surface layer.
A barrier layer shall be provided behind the surface layer and
shall be at least 1.5 mm thick. The barrier layer shall comprise
of 70 to 80 % by weight resin with the remainder by weight
being E glass or E-CR glass.
The structural layer shall comprise resin impregnated layers of
E glass or E-CR glass and shall comprise at least 25 % E glass
or E-CR glass. Aggregate and filler may be included.
E glass and E-CR glass shall conform to the requirements of:
i)
ii)
EN 14020 for glass rovings.
EN 14118 for chopped strand mat.
iii) BS 3396 for woven fabric.
iv) BS 3749 for woven roving fabric.
Volume 4
75
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
Glass fibres shall have a surface treatment compatible with the

manufacturing process to ensure bonding to the resin.
Aggregates shall only be used in FRP structural layers and
external layers. Aggregates shall be clean, washed, high grade
silica sand containing not less than 95 % silica. Aggregates
shall be of a size not greater than 20 % of the thickness of the
FRP structural layer with a particle size not less than 0.05 mm
and not greater than 5 mm.
Fillers shall only be used as a resin extender and shall comprise
of clean inert material, for example, silica, with particle size less
than 0.05 mm.
Surfaces exposed to sunlight shall incorporate provisions to

minimise ultraviolet degradation, such as, ultraviolet inhibitors,
screening agents or pigment in the outer resin rich layer.
Pigments and dyes shall not normally be required, but where
required by the Commission, shall be of a type and colour
specified by the Commission.
FRP water tanks shall comply with the above requirements and
requirements in:
i)
m)
n)
4.6.4
ii)
MS 1241: 1991 where not constructed of FRP panels.

MS 1390: 1995 where constructed of FRP panels.
All design of package plants using FRP materials shall take

into account for the buoyancy effects. This effect is of concern
during high ground water conditions and emptying of the tank
content during desludging works.
Anchor strap shall be at least stainless steel grade 304.
Aluminium
a)
b)
Aluminium is found primarily as the ore bauxite and is remarkable

for its resistance to corrosion (due to the phenomenon of
passivation) and its light weight. Structural components made
from aluminium and its alloys are very important in which light
weight, durability, and strength are needed.
Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys shall comply with:
i)
ii)
BS 1161 for structural purposes.
EN 485 for sheet plate and strip.
iii) EN 754 for drawn tube.
iv) EN 755 for bars, extruded round tubes and sections.
76
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
v)
EN 1676 for ingots and castings.
vi) BS 4868 for profiled sheet.

c)
d)
4.6.5
Anodic oxidation coating on aluminium shall be in accordance

with EN 12373.
Requirements for structural design, materials, workmanship and
protection of aluminium shall be in accordance with BS 8118
HDPE (High Density Polyethylene)

High-density polyethylene (HDPE) is the high density version of PE
plastic. Its molecules have an extremely long carbon backbone with
no side groups. As a result, these molecules align into more compact
arrangements, accounting for the higher density of HDPE. HDPE is
stiffer, stronger, and less translucent than low-density polyethylene.
HDPE is lighter than water, and can be moulded, machined and joined
together using welding.
High-density polyethylene shall comply to the following physical
properties:
Tensile Strength
0.20 0.40 N/mm2
Notched Impact Strength
no break Kj/m2
Max Cont Use Temp
650C
Thermal Coefficient of expansion

Density
Minimum Require Strength
Volume 4
100 220 x 10-6

0.944 0.965g/cm3
8.0 MPa
77
78
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Section 5
Requirements for Individual
Treatment Processes
80
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
5.1
Introduction
All new applications for sewage treatment plant approval shall follow
the design requirements as stipulated in this section. These requirements
have been formulated as a gradual change in sewage treatment methods
for Malaysia prior to enforcement of ultimate requirements as stipulated
in Sections 3 and 4 of this volume.
Design requirements for each stage of the sewage treatment process, as
shown in Figure 5.1 are given in this section.
Figure 5.2 gives an overview of the typical flow diagram and elements
of a sewage treatment plant. Figure 5.2 also shows how one facility
is closely related to another and thus has an impact upon the overall
design.
Sewage treatment plants must be designed to produce an effluent quality
that conforms to either Standard A or Standard B or any other special
requirements under the provisions of the Environmental Quality Act.
The major indices are those of BOD5, Suspended Solids, COD, Oil &
Grease, Ammoniacal Nitrogen, Nitrate Nitrogen and Total Phosphorus.
The requirement to comply with absolute standards, where no failures
are permitted by law, means that new sewage treatment plants must be
designed to produce average effluent qualities well below those permitted
by the Standard figures. Design values for final effluent shall be used in
the design of new treatment works are given in Table 3.2. These design
effluent levels serve as the basis for the design requirement of each unit
process given in the following sub sections.
General ventilation systems shall be provided in compliance to the OSHA.
The potential for odour generation, its impact and treatment, shall be
considered in all aspects of design. Odour treatment equipment shall be
selected that such odours be reduced to the lowest possible level and
in compliance to the EQA.
Volume 4
81

Requirements for Stages of Sewage Treatment
Figure 5.1 Typical Treatment Process Flow Chart

Figure 5.1 Typical Treat
ment Process Flow Chart
Treatment
Stage
Pre
Treatment
Primary
Treatment
Secondary
Treatment
Treatment
Processes
1
Primary
Screen
Pump
Station
Design
Requirements
Section 5.2
Function
Removes rocks, roots and

rags
Lifts sewage and provides

consistent flow to the
treatment system
M/O
Section 5.3
Secondary
Screen
Section 5.4
Removes smaller/finer
particles from sewage
Grit/Grease
Removal
Section 5.5
Removes sand, gravel and

other inorganic materials;
separates oil & grease
Balancing
Tank
M/O
Section 5.6
Balances and equalises flow
Primary
Sedimentation
M/O
Section 5.7
Removes settleable
solids/materials
Biological
Treatment
Section 5.8
Remove major polutants

(BOD and SS)
Secondary
Sedimentation
Section 5.9
Separates treated effluent

and settled sludge
Disinfection
Section 5.10
Destroy disease causing

organisms
Flow Meter
Section 5.11
Measures and records flows
10
Bio Solids
Handling
Requirements
Mandatory (M)
Optional (O)
11
Thickener
Stabilisation
Holding
Dewatering
M/O
Section 5.12
Reduces potential
detrimental effect on the
environment and converts
sludge to a form suitable for
ultimate disposal
Sludge Disposal
82
70
Volume 4
V ol ume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
M al aysi an S ewerage
I ndustry G ui del i nes
Raw
Sewage
Inlet
Ultimate Disposal
Balancing
Tank
Sludge Storage Area
Grit/Grease
Secondary
Screen
Incinerator/Dryer
Sewage
Pump Station
Primary
Screen
Volume 4
Volume 4
Return
Sludge Drying Bed
Mechanical Sludge
Dewatering
Alternate
Alternative
Primary Clarifier
Alternative
Final Clarifier
Mechanical Sludge
Thickener
Flow
Distribution
Sludge Holding
Tank
Sludge Digester
Liquor
Return Sludge
Pump Station
C. Trickling Filter
D. RBC
B. Extended Aeration
Activated Sludge
A. Conventional
Activated Sludge
Biological System
Disinfection
10
Effluent To
Nearest
Receiving
Watercourse
Flow Meter

Figure5.2
5.2 Typical
Typical
Elements
Process
Diagram
of a
Figure
Elements
and and
Process
Flow Flow
Diagram
of a Sewage
Sewage
Treatment
Treatment
PlantPlant
83
71
5.2
Design of Primary Screens
5.2.1
Purpose of Primary Screens

Upon reaching the sewage treatment plant, sewage flows through the
primary screening facility which is the first stage of treatment. The
screens must be provided upstream of all inlet pump stations and shall be
designed to protect downstream processes and equipment. The purposes
of primary screens are:
a)
b)
5.2.2
to protect equipment from rags, wood and other debris
to reduce interference with in-plant flow and performance
Inlet Chamber
Provision for inlet chamber before the primary screen channel is necessary
for proper operational and maintenance. The summarised requirements
for inlet chamber are as follows:
Table 5.1 Requirements for Inlet Chamber
Unit
Process
Requirements
> 20 000
PE
> 50 000
PE
Yes
n/a
n/a
Dual
n/a
Yes
Yes
Motorised
n/a
No
Yes
Inlet
Chamber
Type
20 000
PE
Single
Mandatory
Notes
Single and dual

penstocks are referring
to members of penstocks
required. For more
than 50 000 PE, the
main penstock must be
motorised.
n/a Not applicable

a)
b)
c)
84
A penstock shall be installed upstream to isolate the pump station

in the event of flooding in relation to the bypass and emergency
overflow.
For safety reasons, a double penstock system shall be provided

at the inlet works of all plants with pump station above
20 000 PE.
The penstock spindle shall extend to pump station ground level

and shall be suitably positioned to allow unrestricted operation of
the penstock.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Figure 5.3 Typical Details of Double Penstock
CLEAR SPACING
MANUAL FINE SCREEN
FIRST PENSTOCK
SECOND PENSTOCK
OVERFLOW PIPE
DISCHARGETO DRAIN
PRIMARY
SCREEN
CHAMBER
INLET
CHAMBER
450mm
1:2
5.2.3
IL
Design Requirements for Primary Screens

Table 5.2
Provision of Primary Screens

Numbers of Primary Screen
Requirements
Duty
Standby
5000 PE
> 5000 PE
1 Unit
Mechanical
1 Unit
Manual
Mechanical
1 Unit
1 Unit
1 Unit
Manual
By Pass
Volume 4
85
Table 5.3 Design Parameters for Primary Screens
Description
Unit
Maximum clear spacing
mm
Slope to the vertical
Design Criteria
Manually
Mechanically
Raked
Raked#
25
25
30o 45o
15o 45o
Maximum approach velocity at

the feed channel
m/s
1.0
1.0
Maximum flow through velocity

at the screen face
m/s
1.0
1.0
Minimum freeboard
mm
150*
30
150
See Figure 5.4
day
Estimated volume of screenings

per volume of sewage
m3 / 106 m3
screenings skip storage capacity

Minimum channel width
Minimum channel depth
RC Staircase with riser detail
mm
500
500
1 unit
Anti-skid and
non-corrosive
Anti-skid and
non-corrosive
mm
500
500
Notes:
*
Designer shall ensure that with 50% of blockage at the face of screen, sufficient
freeboard is provided to prevent the approach channel from overflowing
#
Washing and dewatering of screenings shall be provided.
5.2.4
All plants must include:
a)
An emergency manual bypass screen. In the event of system

failure and/or power outages, the flow shall be automatically
directed to the bypass. It shall also be able to cope with
maximum flow.
b)
Hand railings, kick plates, standing platforms and other safety

features to improve maintenance
Screen chambers must be of open channel construction with proper ventilation.

Forced ventilation must be used if chambers are enclosed.
86
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Screens must be designed to withstand the flushing velocity. In the

event of the manual bypass screen being blocked, sewage must be able
to flow over the top of the screen without causing excessive backup
flooding or overflows.
Chambers design must have taken into consideration necessary health
and safety aspects. The chamber must also be hydraulically efficient to
prevent the settlement of solids in the chamber.
Macerators and communitors as replacements for primary screens are
generally not recommended. It may be considered if the consultant is
able to provide good engineering reasons for its application.
Reinforced concrete staircase with proper handrailing must be provided
to access screen chambers.
Shaftless screw conveyors and belt conveyors may be used where
required. The screw conveyor shall be equipped with easy to remove
covers. The frame and support of screw conveyor shall be of minimum
stainless steel Grade 304 while the screw shall be of high tensile steel.
The belt conveyors shall be of heavy duty reinforced rubber belts on
a protected mild steel frame. Conveyors shall normally be installed on
a very slight grade to allow drainage, with foul water returned to the
inlet channel.
All screenings raked from mechanical screen shall be dropped into a
skip.
A proper standpipe shall be provided and located within 3 m to the
screen chamber.
Figure 5.5 and 5.6 illustrate typical arrangement of screen chambers of
various depths.
Refer also to relevant clause of MS 1228 for more details.
Volume 4
87
Requirements
Individual
Treatment
Processes
Requirements for
for Stages
of Sewage
Treatment
Figure
ScreeningsCollected
CollectedFrom
From
Primary
Screens
Figure 5.4 Quantities
Quantities of
of Screenings
Primary
Screens
100
80
Screenings, m 3/ 10 6m 3 of Sewage
Average
Maximum
60
40
20
Opening Between Bars, cm
88
76
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
INCOMING SEWER
Volume 4
Volume 4
INCOMING SEWER
R.C STAIRCASE
TO ENGR'S DETAIL
HANDRAIL
HANDRAIL
PENSTOCK
R.C STAIRCASE TO
ENGR'S DETAIL
PENSTOCK
CHAIN GUARD
GRATING COVER
MECHANICAL COARSE SCREEN
CONC. APRON LAID TO FALL
PLAN
(PE > 5000)
SECTION A-A
STOP LOG
DRAIN
RAMP DOWN
PERFORATED SLAB
SCREENINGS COLLECTION BIN
WP
GRATING
COVER
HANDRAIL
HANDRAIL
PENSTOCK
PENSTOCK
CHAIN GUARD
INCOMING SEWER
R.C STAIRCASE
TO ENGR'S DETAIL
INCOMING SEWER
STOP LOG
CONC. APRON
LAID TO FALL
DRAIN
SECTION A-A
PLAN
(PE 5000)
R.C STAIRCASE TO
ENGR'S DETAIL
RAMP
DOWN
WP
S.S PERFORATED
TROUGH
Figure 5.5 Typical Drawing of Screen Chamber based on depth

Figure 5.5 Typical
Drawing of Screen Chamber based on depth
(<5 m for different PE)
< 5m
< 5m
89
77
< 5m
INCOMING SEWER
STOP LOG
R.C STAIRCASE
TO ENGR'S DETAIL
HANDRAIL
HANDRAIL
PENSTOCK
R.C STAIRCASE TO
ENGR'S DETAIL
INCOMING SEWER
CHAIN GUARD
PENSTOCK
A
M.S GRATING COVER
DRAIN
CONCRETE APRON
LAID TO FALL
SECTION A-A
MECHANICAL
COARSE SCREEN
PLAN VIEW
(PE > 5000)
RAMP
DOWN
DN
WP
OPENINGS
CAT LADDER
R.C PERFORATED SLAB
SCREENINGS
COLLECTION BIN
MECHANICAL COARSE
SCREEN
R.C STAIRCASE
TO ENGR'S DETAIL
> 5m
INCOMING SEWER
STOP LOG
HANDRAIL
PENSTOCK
R.C STAIRCASE TO
ENGR'S DETAIL
CHAIN GUARD
PENSTOCK
HANDRAIL
M.S GRATING COVER

INCOMING SEWER
DRAIN
CONCRETE APRON
LAID TO FALL
SECTION A-A
PLAN VIEW
(PE 5000)
RAMP
DOWN
MANUAL COARSE
SCREEN
OPENINGS
S.S PERFORATED
TROUGH
CAT LADDER
R.C PERFORATED SLAB
SCREENINGS
COLLECTION BIN
DN
WP
Figure 5.6 Typical Drawing of Screen Chamber based on Depth.

(>5 m for different PE)
90
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
78
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
5.3
Design of Pump Stations
5.3.1
Purpose of Pump Stations

Inlet pump stations must be preceded by primary screens to protect
the pumps from being damaged or clogged. The inlet pumps of the
treatment works must be capable of handling raw unscreened sewage.
Water pumps must not be used as they are not designed to cope with
matters that may be found in sewage and the variability and quantity of
sewage flow. The purposes of pump stations are:
a)
to lift sewage to a higher point for treatment
c)
to prevent overflow of raw sewage
b)
5.3.2
to provide consistent inlet flows to the treatment system
Design Requirements
(I)
Structural Requirements
a)
Substructure shall be constructed with reinforced concrete

using cement resistant to chemical attack, aggressive soils and
groundwater.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Safe and suitable access to the wells shall be provided.
If cement used is not resistant to the chemical attack, internal

walls shall be made resistant to sulphide corrosion by coating
with high alumina cement or approved equivalent coating.
A controlled overflow from the last manhole upstream of the pump
installation shall be provided to allow emergency maintenance
works.
Access shall be provided at all locations where operation and
maintenance works take place.
Static screen shall be provided at specific locations where it needs
to protect downstream unit processes.
Access covers shall be hinged with a lifting weight not exceeding
16 kg.
Volume 4
91
II)
Ventilation Requirements
a)
Ventilation shall be provided for all hazardous zones of the

pump station.
Below ground pits shall have mechanical ventilation.
Separate ventilation shall be provided for wet wells and dry
wells.
Lighting systems shall be interconnected with ventilation.
Permanent ventilation rate and air changes shall comply with
Section 6 of this Guidelines.
b)
c)
d)
e)
III)
Odour Control Requirements
a)
Isolate odorous gases from general ventilation by containing

identified odour generating sources with a separate local exhaust
system.
Containment of the odour sources shall be by installing lightweight
and corrosion resistant covers/enclosures designed for practical
operation and maintenance works.
Local exhaust rates for containment shall be designed to provide
a negative pressure preventing build up of toxic, corrosive or
explosive gases and to include provision for process air or air
displaced by changes in the level of liquid inside the covered
space.
The odourus air in the local exhaust system shall be conveyed
through well designed and balanced ductworks by a centrifugal
fan to an effective odour treatment system.
Odour treatment equipment shall be selected such that odour is
reduced to the lowest possible level and in compliance to the
EQA.
In situation where specific gases such as hydrogen sulphide and
ammonia are significantly present, provide a pre-scrubber unit
upstream of the main odour treatment equipment.
Containment, exhaust and treatment shall be designed as an
integrated package.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Consideration must be given to the life span of the odour control

system and associated costs in operating and maintaining such
a system.
IV) Wet Wells Requirements

a)
92
Suction channels shall be designed to avoid dead zones, i.e.,

prevent solids and scum accumulation. All dead zones shall be
chamfered.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Requirements
for Individual
Treatment
Processes
Requirements
for Stages of
Sewage Treatment
b)
b)
c)
c)
d)
d)
e)
e)
f)
f)
g)
g)
h)
h)
i)
i)
Benching shall
shallbebe
such
to minimise
deposition
solid
Benching
such
that that
to minimise
deposition
of solid of
matters
matters
on
the
floor
or
walls
of
wet
wells.
The
minimum
slope
on the floor or walls of wet wells. The minimum slope of benching
of benching
be 45o to the horizontal.
shall
be 45o toshall
the horizontal.
Benching shall
shallpreferably
preferably
extended
the pump
Benching
be be
extended
up toupthetopump
intake.intake.
Minimum hopper
hopper bottom
bottom slope
slopeshall
shallbe
be1.5
1.5vertical
verticaltoto1.0
1.0horizontal.
horizontal.
Minimum
Tapered slope
slopeshall
shallbebe
provided
upthe
to suction
the suction
section.
Tapered
provided
up to
section.
Automatic flushing
flushingofofgrit
gritand
andsolids
solids
recommended
plants
Automatic
is is
recommended
for for
plants
of
of
PE
>
2
000.
PE > 2,000.
The difference
differencebetween
betweenstop
stopand
andstart
start
levels
shall
a maximum
The
levels
shall
be abemaximum
of
of
900
mm
and
a
minimum
of
450
mm.
900 mm and a minimum of 450 mm.
The difference
difference in
in level
level between
between start
start oror stop
stop ofof duty
duty and
and assist
assist
The
pumps
shall
be
greater
than
or
equal
to
150
mm.
pumps shall be greater than or equal to 150 mm.
The minimum internal width of wet well shall not less than 2m.
The minimum internal width of wet well shall not less than 2m
Where possible, wet wells shall be open and guarded by a handrail
Where possible, wet wells shall be open and guarded by a handrail
or open mesh grating. The grating shall be easily and safely
or open mesh grating. The grating shall be easily and safely
removed.
removed.
Figure
ofWet
WetWell
Well
Figure 5.7
5.7 Typical
Typical Dimensions
Dimensions of
Submersible
PumpStation
Station
Submersible Pump
MIN 2000
(/S)
QO (I/S)
i
INCOMING SEWER
Qi (I/S)
(/S)
D2
HIGH LEVEL ALARM
150
STANDBY CUT IN LEVEL
CUT IN LEVEL
CUT OUT LEVEL
LOW LEVEL ALARM
D1
Note :
Q1 = Incoming flow rate
QO = Forcemain Discharge rate
D2 = Forcemain Diameter, min 100
d
= Difference between stop & start level, Min 450 Max 900
= Minimum submergence, depends on manufacturer recommendation
= Minimum clearance between pump suction and wet-well invert
All dimension are in mm unless otherwise state
Volume 4
93
Volume 4
81

Figure 5.8 Typical Dimensions of Dry Well

Figure 5.8 Typical Dimensions of Dry Well
Submersible Pump Station
Submersible Pump Station
IN
Qi COMI
(I/S NG
SE
)
W
ER
HIGH LEVEL ALARM
150
CUT IN LEVEL
CUT OUT LEVEL
LOW LEVEL ALARM/EMERGENCY
CUTOUT
D1
150
D2 to D2
3
D2 to D2
4
D2
QO (l/s)
150 (min)
ALLOW ADDITIONAL DEPTH

FOR SOLID HEAVY OBJECTS
IN
Qi COM
(I/S I NG
SE
)
WE
R
150 S
HIGH LEVEL ALARM

CUT IN LEVEL
CUT OUT LEVEL
D2 TO D2
D2
LOW LEVEL ALARM/EMERGENCY

CUTOUT
Q0 (l/S)
150
D1
Note :
Q1 = Incoming flow rate
QO =
Forcemain Discharge rate
D2 =
Bellmouth Diameter
ALLOW ADDITIONAL DEPTH

FOR SOLID HEAVY OBJECTS
D1 = Suction Diameter, Min 100

D =
S
Difference between stop start level, Min 450 and Max 900
= Minimum depth above pump intake to prevent vortex formation
V)
(V)
Lighting Requirements
Lighting Requirements
a)
a)
b)
b)
Wet wells and dry-wells shall be adequately lit.

Wet wells and dry wells shall be adequately lit.
Electrical installations
installationsshall
shallbebewater
waterproof
and vapour
vapour proof
prooforor
Electrical
proof and
explosion
proof.
explosion proof.
c)
c)
If lights
lights are
arefitted
fittedoutside
outsidethethe
well,
then
a spotlight
system
If
well,
then
a spotlight
system
may may
be
be
used
to
provide
adequate
illumination.
used to provide adequate illumination.
94
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
82
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guideline
VI)
Level Controls
a)
Either floats or ultrasonic level controller may be used for the

start-stop levels of pumps. Instrument with environmental friendly
features are recommended.
Ultrasonic level control is recommended due to its clog-free
nature.
Non-mercury type floats are recommended.
Hollow tube electrodes are not acceptable.
Level controller shall be placed where they are not affected by
the turbulence of incoming flow and where they can be safely
removed.
b)
c)
d)
e)
VII) Pump Hydraulic Design

a)
The submission of pump hydraulic design and performance shall

include:
i)
ii)
System curves
Pump curves
iii) Operating points of pumps with respect to flow and total

dynamic head (TDH)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
5.3.3
iv) Operating characteristics such as efficiency, horsepower and

motor rating
Pump shall be operating within their best efficiency range at

normal operating condition.
Pumps are to be equipped with an auto restart mechanism in the
event of power failure.
Dry-well mounted pumps shall be equipped with auxiliary services

such as cooling and gland seal water supply.
Pumps equipped with cutting or macerating facilities are not

acceptable.
Guide rail, lifting device and other wet well fittings must be
fabricated of stainless steel that is corrosion resistant. The use
of hot dip galvanised iron is not recommended.
Horizontal installation of pumps is not allowed. All pumps shall

be installed vertical, unless the Consultant is able to provide good
engineering reasons for horizontal installation.
a)
Drainage of dry-wells and valve pits shall be provided. Drainage

lines shall be equipped with back flow protection to ensure that
the chamber is not flooded.
Volume 4
95
b)
The wet well shall not be housed with a building structure.
d)
Pipework
c)
Where separate valve pits are used, the connecting pipes shall
incorporate at least two flexible joints to allow for differential
settlement.
i) Pipe work shall be of ductile iron or cast iron with cement
internal lining. Other approved material by the Commission
may be used.
ii) External surface of pipework in chambers and wells shall be
epoxy coated.
iii) Buried ductile iron pipe shall have polyethylene sleeving.
iv) Pipe within wells and pits shall have flanged joints, while
pipe laid in the ground shall have spigot and socket joints.
v) Pipe work shall be adequately supported on concrete plinths
or steel structural supports.
vi) Flanges shall be located at least 150 mm away from
structures.
vii) Dismantling joints such as bends shall be provided.
viii) Pumping thrust shall be resisted using pipe supports inside
chambers and by mass concrete thrust blocks poured against
undisturbed soil in the ground outside chambers.
ix) No welding joints are allowed.
e) Valves
i) Gate valves are preferred with rising spindles operated by
a tee piece.
ii) The uses of counterweights are recommended. Tapping
(12 mm BSP) shall be located upstream and downstream of
check valves.
Also refer to additional requirements in relevant Clause of MS 1228.
96
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines

Figure 5.9 Typical Details of Wet-well Pump Station

Figure 5.9 Typical Details of Wet-well Pump Station
MECH. COARSE SCREEN

INCOMING SEWER
STEPS
GRATING COVER
OVERFLOW PIPE
DISCHARGE TO DRAIN
V.C.P
STAND PIPE
CONC. APRON
COLLECTION BIN
CLEAR SPACING
S.STEEL MANUAL
FINE SCREEN
OVERFLOW
CHAMBER
INFLUENT PUMP
PRIMARY SCREEN
A
GRATING COVER
17 18 19 20 21 22 23
STEPS
A
PUMP SUMP
S.STEEL HANDRAIL
PENSTOCK
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
EXPLOSION PROOF
SPOT LIGHT
CHECK VALVE
FLEXIBLE COUPLING
GATE VALVE
DELIVERY PIPE
R.C STAIRCASE TO ENGR'S DETAIL
PLAN VIEW
LIFTING I-BEAM C/W
CARRIER
HANDRAIL
CLEAR SPACING
MANUAL FINE SCREEN
MECH. COARSE SCREEN

CHAIN GUARD
CHECK VALVE
FLEXIBLE COUPLING
GATE VALVE
DELIVERY PIPE
PENSTOCK
OVERFLOW
PIPE DISCHARGE
TO DRAIN
NON-EXPLOSION SPOT LIGHT
OVERFLOW
CHAMBER
DELIVERY PIPE
GUIDERAIL
S.S PERFORATED
TROUGH
PUMP SUMP
LIFTING CHAIN
PRIMARY SCREEN
CHAMBER
CONC. SLAB
R.C WALL TO
ENGR'S DETAIL
IL
1:2
IL
FRP STOP LOG C/W

HAND WHEEL
IL
OPENING
ALARM
START
MANUAL COARSE SCREEN

STOP
SECTION A-A
Volume 4
Volume 4
97
85

Figure
Typical
Details
of Dry-well
Pump Station
Figure5.10
5.10 Typical
Details
of Dry-well
Pump Station
OVERFLOW PIPE DISCHARGE
TO MONSOON DRAIN
OVERFLOW CHAMBER
DRAIN
RAMP DOWN
CONC. APRON LAID TO FALL
3 LAYER CONC. VENTILATION

BLOCK AT TOP AND BOTTOM LEVEL
LIQUID RETURN FROM OTHER UNIT PROCESSES
WP
FORCEMAIN
GATE VALVE.
NCOMING SEWER
AIR EXTRACTOR FAN
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
G.I CHAIN GUARD.
G.I CHAIN GUARD

PENSTOCK
GRATING COVER
3 LAYER CONC.
VENTILATION BLOCK
AT TOP AND BOTTOM
LEVEL
CHECK VALVE.
CONC. THRUST BLOCK.
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CONC. THRUST BLOCK.
EXTRACTOR FAN
R.C STAIRCASE TO ENGR'S DETAIL.
CONCRETE VENTILATION
BLOCK AT TOP AND BOTTOM LEVEL
DN
CHAIN GUARD.
DN
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
ADJUSTABLE GLASS
LOUVRES WINDOW
SPOT LIGHT
CHEQUER PLATE
DOOR
BRICKWALL C/W CEMENT

PLASTER ON BOTH SIDES
DRY PIT PUMPS
PLAN VIEW
COPPER TYPE
LIGHTNING ARRESTOR
LIFTING I-BEAM C/W

CARRIER
RAIN WATER DOWN PIPE

TO NEAREST SUMP
PENSTOCK
HANDRAIL
R.C GUTTER TO ENGR'S DETAIL
DOOR
BRICKWALL C/W
CEMENT PLASTER ON BOTH SIDES
WINDOW
CHEQUER PLATE
3 LAYER CONC. VENTILATION

BLOCK
HANDRAIL
WET WELL
DRY WELL
PERFORATED SLAB
CAT LADDER
OPENINGS
INCOMING SEWER
(FLOAT SWITCH)
CHECK VALVE
2nd. STANDBY PUMP START

2nd. DUTY PUMP START
GATE VALVE
1st.. DUTY PUMP START
ALARM
1st. STANDBY PUMP START
ALL PUMP STOP
STOP LOG
SUMP BWL
DEWATERING PUMP
DRY PIT PUMPS
SECTION VIEW
86
98
Volume 4
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guideline
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Table 5.4 Recommended Design Parameters for Inlet Pump Stations

1000 Design Parameters
Description
Unit
Type of station
Number of pumps
(all identical and work
sequentially)
Pumps design flow
PE 1,000
1,000 < PE 5,000
Wet well
2
1 duty,
1 standby
(100 % standby)
Each at Q
Wet well
2
1 duty,
1 stand-by
(100 % standby)
Each at Q
peak
peak
Maximum retention time at Q
min
30
30
Min pass through openings

Minimum suction and discharge
openings
Pumping cycle
(average flow conditions)
Lifting device*
mm
75
75
mm
100
100
ave
start/
hour
6 min
15 max
Lifting davit
6 min
15 max
lifting beam and
block
Design Parameters
Description
Type of station
Unit
5,000 < PE 20 000
Wet well or dry-well

up to 10,000 PE
10,000 PE above wet
well and dry-well
4 (2 sets)
1 duty, 1 assist,
per set
(100 % standby)
Number of pumps
(all identical and work
sequentially)
PE > 20,000
Wet well and dry

well
6 (3 sets)
1 duty, 1 assist,
per set
(50 % standby)
min
each at 0.5 Qpeak

30
each at 0.25 Qpeak

30
Min pass through openings
mm
75
75
Minimum suction and discharge

openings
Pumping cycle
(average flow conditions)
mm
100
100
start/
hour
6 min
15 max
6 - 15
Pumps design flow

Maximum retention time at
Qave
Lifting device*
Mechanical and block
mechanical
Note: * Motorised hoists shall be provided when the lifting weight exceeds 100 kg
Volume 4
99
5.4
Design of Secondary Screens
5.4.1
Purpose of Secondary Screens

After the inlet pump station, further screening is required to reduce the
remaining floating matter and finer particles in the sewage that will
disrupt the treatment process downstream. The purposes of secondary
screens are:
a)
b)
5.4.2
to remove material such as plastic, paper, cloth and other particles

that may cause problems to the treatment process downstream.
to minimise blockages in sludge handling and treatment

facilities.
Design Requirements
Plants of all sizes must be installed with secondary screens. The channel
shall be designed for Qpeak or pump flow whichever is greater. Approach
channel shall be design to ensure good contribution of velocity
A minimum of two screens are required for duty and standby. Facility
for a screened bypass must be provided in the event of clogging. Where
mechanically cleaned screening devices are installed auxiliary manually
cleaned screen shall be provided.
Table 5.5 Provision Requirement of Secondary Screens
Requirements
Duty
Standby
Bypass
100
Manual
Mechanical
Manual
Mechanical
Screen
Volume 4
Numbers of Secondary Screen

5000 PE
>5000 PE
1 Unit
1 Unit
1 Unit
1 Unit
1 Unit
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Table 5.6 Design Parameters for Secondary Screens
Description
Unit
Maximum clear spacing
mm
Maximum approach velocity at

the feed channel
Maximum flow through velocity
at the screen face
Minimum freeboard
Slope to the vertical
Estimated volume of screenings

per volume of sewage
Screenings skip storage capacity
Minimum channel width
Minimum channel depth
RC Staircase with riser detail
Design Criteria
Manually
Mechanically
Raked
Raked #
12
30o 45o
12
15o 45o
m/s
1.0
1.0
m/s
1.0
1.0
mm
150*
150
m3 / 106 m3
day
mm
mm
1 unit
See Figure 5.4

7
500
500
Anti-skid and
non-corrosive
7
500
500
Anti-skid and
non-corrosive
Notes:
* Designer shall ensure that with 50% of blockage at the face of screen, sufficient
freeboard is provided to prevent the approach channel from overflowing
# Washing and dewatering of screenings shall be provided.
5.5
Design of Grit and Grease Chambers
5.5.1
Purposes of Grit and Grease Chambers

This unit process is important to minimise problems associated with grit
and grease. Grit creates problems to pumps and also sludge digestion
and dewatering facilities. Grease creates problems at the clarifier and
is carried over in the final effluent.
In grit removal system, grit or discrete particles that have subsiding
velocities or specific gravities substantially greater than those of organic
putrescible solids, e.g. eggshells, sands, gravel are removed by gravitate
settlement or centrifugal separation. Same principle apply to oil and
grease removal system, where free oil and grease globules lighter than
water rise through the liquid and skimmed from the top surface.
Volume 4
101
The particles must be removed at an early stage of the process

because:
a)
b)
c)
5.5.2
the grit particles cannot be broken down by any biological

treatment.
the grit particles are abrasive and wear down equipment.
the biological treatment in sewage treatment works is not designed

to degrade grease.
A manual bypass shall be provided. In case of grit removal system
failure and/or power outages, the flow shall be automatically directed
to the bypass.
Where mechanical grit separator is used, they shall be installed at an
angle of at least 10 to allow drainage and foul water to be returned to
the inlet channel.
Where manual systems are used, allow for safe and easy access to remove
grit to a storage bin.
If pump systems are used, the suction pipe shall be short and straight.
Tees and short radius bends shall be avoided, if at all possible. Flanges
at strategic locations shall be provided so that they can be dismantled
to remove any blockages.
The mechanical oil and grease skimming device shall be designed to
minimise the water being remove while skimming the oil and grease.
Sand pit may be used for further dewatering of the grease removed before
ultimate disposal. The drainage from the sand pit shall be returned to
the inlet channel for further treatment.
102
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Table 5.7 Provision Requirement of Grit and Grease

Removal System
Number of Unit Processes
Requirements
i) Grit Removal System

Duty
Manual
Mechanical
5000 PE
> 5000 PE
1 Unit @ design flow
-1 Unit @ design flow

(up to 10 000 PE)
-2 unit @ 50% design flow each
( >10 000 PE)
Yes
Standby
Manual
Mechanical

Bypass
ii) Grease Removal System
Duty
Manual
1 Unit
Mechanical
Standby
Bypass
5.5.3
Manual
Mechanical

-
-1 Unit @ design flow

(up to 10 000 PE)
-2 unit @ 50% design flow each
( >1000 PE)
Yes
Design Criteria
Design criteria are given in Tables 5.8 and 5.9.
Table 5.8 Design Parameters for Grease Chambers
Description
Unit
PE 5000*
Design Criteria
> 5000PE
Grease removal
Chamber type
Rectangular
Baffled tank
Aerated type
min
Minimum detention
time (Qpeak)
Simple manual Manual interceptor
> 5000PE
Mechanical
Grit and grease storage

period before off-site
day
30
7
7
disposal
Note:
* Combined grit & grease chamber is allowed. If combined, then total detention
time shall comply to 6 minutes at Qpeak.
Volume 4
103
Table 5.9 Design Parameters for Grit Chambers

Description
Unit
Design Criteria
PE 5000*
>5000PE
>5000PE
Grit removal
Manual
(tanker)
Mechanical
Mechanical
Chamber type
Horizontal
flow (2 units
required for
duty and
standby during
cleaning)
vortex also
acceptable
Square, rotary or
vortex type simple
mechanised grit
chamber
Aerated
minute
m/s
0.20
0.20
0.20
m/s
n/a
<1.0
<1.0
35% of depth
l/s/meter
length of tank
10.0
1:2
Manufacturers
Specification
Manufacturers
Specification
Minimum
detention time at
Qpeak
Maximum gravity
flow through
velocity at Qpeak
Maximum
centrifugal flow
through velocity
Head loss
(at parshall flume)
Aeration
requirement
Chamber
dimension:
Depth: Width
Length: Width
Estimated grit
quantity
Washing and
dewatering of grit
2:1
m3/103 m3 of
sewage
0.03
0.03
0.03
No
Yes
Yes
Notes:
* Air lift pump for removal of grit is not acceptable.
* Water depth in tank to be controlled by weir outlet.
104
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
5.6
Design of Balancing Tanks

Balancing tanks are mandatory for all treatment processes that are not
designed at peak flow. The tanks are effective means of equalising
sewage flow. For extended aeration plants that are designed with a
retention time of more than 18 hours and clarifiers designed at peak
flow, the use of balancing tanks is not required.
5.6.1
Purposes of Balancing Tanks

The purposes of balancing tanks are to:
a)
prevent flow variations entering secondary treatment processes.
c)
reduce potential overflows that may cause health hazard and

pollution.
b)
5.6.2
reduce hydraulic loading into secondary treatment processes.
Design Requirements
The design requirements for balancing tanks are:
a)
All balancing tanks must be completely aerated and mixed.
c)
Allowance must be made for an emergency overflow.
b)
d)
e)
f)
Flow control shall be by a non-mechanical constant flow device,

such as an orifice, in order to avoid double pumping.
Bypass and drain down facilities as well as suitable access for
cleaning shall be provided.
A dead water depth of 0.6 - 1.0 m is normally required.
For plants with PE > 10 000, where balancing tank is used,
minimum one (1) unit of balancing tank shall be provided. The
design flow of the upstream and downstream unit processes are
recommended as follow:
i) Where no balancing tanks is provided, design flow of unit
process at

Upstream = Peak/pumped flow

Downstream = Peak/pumped flow
ii) Where balancing tank is provided, design flow of unit process
at

Upstream = Peak/pumped flow

Downstream = Average flow
Volume 4
105
Table 5.10 Design Parameters for Balancing Tanks

Description
Mixing power
requirements
Aeration
W/m3 of
sewage
Overflow bypass to downstream unit requirement
5.7
Unit
Volume of tanks
Design Criteria
1.5 hr detention at Qpeak

5 at TWL
m3 air/hour/
m3 sewage
1 m3 of air supply for every

m3 of sewage stored per
hour at TWL
Yes
Design of Primary Sedimentation Stage

At primary sedimentation stage, the velocity of sewage is reduced to
subside settleable suspended organic matters in the sewage. The settled
matter is known as primary sludge.
5.7.1
Purposes
The purposes of primary sedimentation are:
a)
b)
c)
5.7.2
to remove maximum amount of pollutants such as settleable

solids quickly and economically.
to separate sewage into sludge and settled sewage, which by

being treated separately are normally dealt with more efficiently
and economically.
When used as a preliminary step for further treatment, the main
function of primary sedimentation tank is to reduce the organic
loadings on the secondary treatment units and is a essential
component of secondary sewage treatment.
Design Requirements
The design requirements of primary sedimentation include the
followings:
a)
b)
106
Provide sufficient time for maximum settling under quiescent

conditions. Therefore, design factors require careful consideration
include: overflow rate, detention period, weir-loading rate, shape
and dimensions of the basin, inlet and outlet structures, and
sludge removal system.
Tanks can either be rectangular, circular or upward flow
(square).
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
c)
Provisions for the removal of sludge on a daily basis.
e)
V-notch weirs with baffle shall be provided at the outlet.

Weirs shall be adjustable with notches 100 mm deep. Typical
variation in water level shall be no more than 50 mm under all
conditions.
d)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Holding tanks for wasted sludge must be provided.
Multiple hopper are not permitted.
Scum skimming shall be provided to remove both floating

materials and scum. These materials can be either discharged
to biosolid holding tank or sand drying bed. They shall not be
returned to the preliminary treatment units.
Flow distribution channel/ chamber shall be provided for flow

isolation or equal flow distribution.
Rectangular tank
i)
Sludge hopper shall have side slopes of 60 or more

from horizontal with the sludge pump located in a pit at
hopper invert level. The length of suction pipe shall be
minimised. Provision for withdrawal pipe from the tanks
shall be provided.
ii) The capacity of hopper shall be equivalent to 2 hours
detention time at Qpeak.
iii) Additional water depth of minimum 400 mm should be
provided above the hopper in the vertical side-wall section
between the top of the hopper and the top water level. The
side-wall height should not be less than 400 mm.
iv) Equalise flow distribution across the inlet of the tank shall
be achieved using a multi-port wall and baffles.
Circular Tank
i)
ii)
(k)
Circular tanks shall be no more than 50 m in diameter

and minimum water depth shall be 3.0 m.
Circular tanks with more than 30 m diameter shall be
provided with perimeter walkway for cleaning the weir
and shall have appropriate drive system.
The floor slab of the sedimentation tank shall be of reinforced

concrete type construct to gradient to enhance the sludge scraping
effectiveness.
Volume 4
107
Table 5.11 Design Parameters for Primary Sedimentation

Description
Unit
Design Criteria
Sedimentation followed by secondary treatment

hr
Detention time at Qpeak
Surface overflow rate at Qpeak
- circular (maximum)
m /m /d
3
- rectangular (maximum)
Weir loading at Qpeak
2
45
m /m /d
m /m/d
45
150
m/hr
1.2 - 2.0
> 3:1
2.5
1 : 1 to 2.5 : 1
Upward flow rate at Qpeak
Sizing of rectangular tanks

Length : Width
Min water depth
Width : Depth
Sizing of circular tanks
Min. side water depth
Floor slope wall
5.8
Design of Biological Treatment Stage
5.8.1
Introduction
> 3.0
1:12
Biological treatment is the heart of the sewage treatment process. It is

the processes where the dissolved and non- settleable organic material
remaining in the sewage are removed by living organisms.
For reasons of long term whole life economics, ease of operation and
maintenance, consistent effluent standards and standardisation, the
following types of biological treatment processes are recommended for
use in Malaysia.
Suspended Growth System
a)
Conventional activated sludge (CAS) system
b)
Extended aeration (EA)/Oxidation Ditch (OD) System
c)
108
Sequencing Batch Reactor (SBR)/Intermittent Decant Extended

Aeration (IDEA)
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Attached Growth System

a)
Rotating biological contactor (RBC) system
b)
Trickling filter (TF) System
c)
Hybrid System/Combination multistage design
All plants must be strictly designed to meet DOE Standard A/Standard
B requirements including, nitrification and denitrification to reduce
ammonia and total nitrogen removal level that ensure compliance with
the requirement stipulated in Section 3 earlier. Total phosphorus removal
must also be taken into account for plants where treated effluent is to
be discharged into stagnant water bodies.
Mass balance calculation must be computed and submitted for all biological
treatment system and other unit processes proposed for the STP.
5.8.2
Conventional Activated Sludge System (CAS)
5.8.2.1
General Description
The conventional activated sludge process is one of the many versions
of the activated sludge process. The activated sludge process is most
suitably used where land is limited and expensive, and where large
volumes must be treated economically, without creating nuisance to
neighbours.
The process involves the production of activated mass of microorganisms
capable of stabilising sewage aerobically. This is achieved by introducing
organic waste, produced from pre-treatment and primary treatment
facilities, into reactors where suspended aerobic bacterial culture oxidises
the organic matter into stable matters. These active bacteria cultures are
commonly known as activated sludge. During the process, new bacteria
cell are also produced.
5.8.2.2
Design Requirements for CAS

For the design of conventional activated sludge system, the aeration
tank shall be preceded with primary sedimentation system. An appropriate
amount of the bacteria culture, known as activated sludge must be recycled
to the upstream of the reactor while the remaining excess sludge must
be removed at secondary sedimentation system.
All conventional activated sludge system used at STPs for Class 3,
Class 4 and at where requested by the Commission must be designed with
anoxic zone to achieve a total nitrogen removal in order to comply with
the requirements in Section 3 of this Guidelines, as well as to minimise
potential rising sludge at secondary sedimentation system. The anoxic
zone must be mixed without inducing dissolve oxygen.
Sludge treatment and dewatering must be available on-site to handle the
large quantity of unstable sludge generated.
Volume 4
109
Table 5.12 Design Parameters for Conventional/ Activated

Sludge System
Description
Unit
Primary Sedimentation System
Minimum number of aeration tanks

F/M ratio
Hydraulic retention time (HRT)
Oxygen requirements (for BOD and

ammonia nitrogen removal)
Mixed liquor suspended solids
(MLSS)
Sludge yield
hrs
kgO2/kg substrate
mg/l
kg sludge
produced/kg BOD5
consumed
Sludge age #
day
Return activated sludge flow, QRAS
m3/d
Waste activated sludge, QWAS
Must be provided
2
Dissolved oxygen (DO) level in tank mg/l

Aeration device rating
Design Criteria
m3/d
0.25 - 0.50
6 -16 (for system where

only ammonia removal is
require)
12 -16 (for plants require
total nitrogen removal)
2.0
1500 -3000
Typical: 2500
1.0
Continuous, 24 hrs
0.8 - 1.0
5 - 10
Refer to equation below

0/66
[ 4DYJ
&X 0/66
Cu is underflow concentration
QRAS / QINFLOW
0.75-1.0
Mixed liquor suspended solids

recirculation for denitrification
purpose
4 6 of Qavg
RAS pump rating
hrs/day
24
Organic loading
kg BOD5/kg MLSS
0.25 - 0.5
W/ m3
20
Volumetric loading
Minimum mixing requirement
110
kg BOD5/m3.d
Volume 4
0.3 - 0.6
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines

Table 5.12 Design Parameters for Conventional

Table 5.12Activated
DesignSludge
Parameters
Conventional
Systemfor
(cont.)
Activated Sludge System (continued)
Description
Description
Unit
Unit
Tank dimension
Tank dimension
Water depth
Water depth
Length:Width
Length:Width
Max width
width of
of joined
joined tank
tank
Max
# Sludge Age =
m
m
Design Criteria
Design Criteria
35
<30
3:1
35
3:1
< 30
total solids in aeration tank

excess sludge wasting / day + solids in effluent
VT u MLSS
Q avg u SSeff
T sludge
WAS =
Cu
>
Where:
vT
= volume of reactor (m3)
3
MLSS = mixed liquor suspended solids (kg/m )
Tsludge
Qavg
SSeff
Cu
= sludge age (days)

= average flow (m3/day)
= effluent suspended solids (kg/m3)
= underflow concentration (kg/m3)
Refer Table D1 and D2 for aeration equipment duty / standby and also to
Refer
Table
D1ofand
forfor
aeration
equipment duty/standby and also to
relevant
clause
MSD2
1228
more details.
relevant clause of MS 1228 for more details.
5.8.3
5.8.3
5.8.3.1
5.8.3.1
Extended Aeration System (EA)

Extended Aeration System (EA)
General Discription
General Discription
The extended aeration process is similar to the conventional activated
The
extended
is similar
to the conventional
sludge
process aeration
except thatprocess
it operates
in the endogenous
respirationactivated
phase of
sludge
process
it operates
in theloading
endogenous
respiration
the growth
curve,except
which that
requires
a low organic
and long
aeration
phase
of the
growth
curve,high
which
requires
a low organic
loading
and
time. The
system
produces
MLSS
concentration,
high RAS
pumping
rate and
low sludge
long
aeration
time. wastage.
The system produces high MLSS concentration, high
RAS pumping rate and low sludge wastage.
The advantage of having long hydraulic retention times is that it allows the
plantadvantage
to operateofeffectively
overhydraulic
widely varying
flow
and is
waste
The
having long
retention
times
that loadings.
it allows
Secondary
be designed
to thevarying
variations
hydraulic
the
plant toclarifiers
operate must
effectively
over widely
flowin and
waste
loadings
and
high
MLSS
concentrations
associated
with
this
process.
loadings. Secondary clarifiers must be designed to the variations in
hydraulic loadings and high MLSS concentrations associated with this
process.
Volume 4
111
Volume 4
99
5.8.3.2
Design Requirements for EA

EA plants shall be designed as either plug flow or completely mixed.
Anoxic zone at the head of the reactor must be provided for denitrification.
The anoxic zone must be mixed without inducing dissolved oxygen
For Oxidation Ditches, the minimum velocity within the channel shall
be sufficient to keep the activated sludge in suspension. The minimum
velocity within the channel shall not be less than 0.3 m/s. The tank
configuration and aeration and mixing devices shall promote unidirectional
channel flow, so that the energy used for aeration is sufficient to provide
mixing in a system with a relatively long hydraulic retention time.
Table 5.13
Design Parameters for Extended Aeration
Description
Minimum number of aeration tanks
F/M ratio
Hydraulic retention time (HRT)

Oxygen requirements(for BOD and
ammonia nitrogen removal)
Mixed liquor suspended solids (MLSS)
Dissolved oxygen (DO) level in tank
Sludge yield
Sludge age #
Waste activated sludge flow, QWAS
Return activated sludge flow, QRAS
RAS pump rating

Recirculation ratio, QRAS/QINFLOW
Unit
18 - 24
2.0
mg/l
2500 - 5000
Typical: 3000
2.0
mg/l
kg sludge produced/kg
BOD5 consumed
day
m3/d
m3/d
24
0.5 - 1.0
Water depth
Length:Width
Max width of joined tank
m
ratio
m
Volume 4
> 20
Refer to equation
Cu is underflow
concentration
hours/day
W/m3
0.4 (at 24 hrs HRT)

0.6 (at 18 hrs HRT)
0/66
[ 4DYJ
&X 0/66
kg BOD5/m .d
112
0.05 - 0.1
hrs
kgO2/kgsubstrate
MLSS recycle ratio

Volumetric loading
Minimum mixing requirement

Tank dimension
Design Criteria
4 6 times of Qavg
0.1 - 0.4
20
35
3:1
< 60
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Requirements
for Individual
Treatment
Requirements
for Stages
of SewageProcesses
Treatment
Notes:
#
Sludge Age =
Notes:
#
excess sludge wasting/day + solids in effluen
Sludge Age =
VT u MLSS
Q avg u SSeff
T sludge
WAS =
Cu
>
VT u MLSS
Where:
> Q avg u SSeff @
T sludge
in effluen
WAS =
= volume+ofsolids
reactor
(m3)
vT excess sludge wasting/day
Cu
MLSS
= mixed liquor suspended solids (kg/m3)
Tsludge
= sludge age (days)
Where:
Qavg
= volume of reactor (m3)
vT
SSeff
= effluent suspended solids (kg/m3)3
MLSS
= mixed liquor suspended solids (kg/m
)
Cu
= underflow concentration (kg/m3)
Tsludge
= sludge age (days)
Qavg
Refer
Table D1 and D2 for aeration equipment duty /
SSeff
= effluent suspended solids (kg/m3)
relevant
clauseconcentration
of MS 1228(kg/m
for3more
details.
Cu
= underflow
)
standby and also to
Refer Table D1 and D2 for aeration equipment duty/standby and also to

relevant
clause
of MS
1228
for more
details.duty / standby and also to
Refer
Table
D1 and
D2 for
aeration
equipment
relevant clause of MS 1228 for more details.
Figure 5.11 Fine Bubble Diffuse Air Extended Aeration System
Anoxic Zone
Aeration Tank
Flow
Final Clarifier
Figure 5.11 Fine Bubble Diffuse
Air
Extended
Aeration System
Distribution
Grit Removal Diffuse Air Extended Aeration System
Figure 5.11 FineScreens,
Bubble
Raw
Sewage
Inlet
Anoxic Zone
Aeration Tank
Flow
Distribution
Sewage
Pump Station
Screens, Grit Removal
Effluent
To River
Final Clarifier
Effluent
To River
Return Sludge
Pump Station
Raw
Sewage
Inlet
Sewage
Pump Station
Return Sludge
Liquor
Pump Station
Chemical
Dosing
Sludge Storage Area
Mechanical Sludge
Dewatering
Liquor
Chemical Mechanical Sludge
Thickener
Dosing
Ultimate Disposal
Sludge Holding Tank

Sludge Storage Area
Mechanical Sludge
Dewatering
Mechanical Sludge
Thickener
Sludge Drying Bed
Sludge Holding Tank
Ultimate Disposal
OPTIONAL
Sludge Drying Bed
OPTIONAL
Volume 4
Volume 4
113
101


M echanical R otor
Flow
Distribution
S creens, G rit R em oval

R aw
S ewage
Inlet
Final Clarifier
Flow
M easurem ent
E ffluent
To River
O xidation Ditch
S ewage
P um p S tation
R eturn S ludge
P um p S tation
Chem ical
D osing
S ludge Storage A rea
M echanical S ludge
Dewatering
M echanical Sludge
Thickener
S ludge Holding Tank
Ultim ate D isposal

S ludge D rying B ed
O P TIO N AL
5.8.4
5.8.4
Rotating Biological
BiologicalContactors
Contactors
(RBC)
Rotating
(RBC)
5.8.4.1
5.8.4.1
General Description
Description
General
Rotatingbiological
biological
contactors
series
of media
rotating
media for
Rotating
contactors
use a use
seriesa of
rotating
for biological
biological
treatment.
The
rotating
medium,
typically
made
from
sheets
treatment. The rotating medium, typically made from sheets of high quality
of highprovides
quality aplastic,
surface on
which
organisms
grow.
plastic,
surface provides
on which aorganisms
grow.
As the
media rotate,
As
the
media
rotate,
the
fixed
film
biomass
is
in
contact
with
organic
the fixed film biomass is in contact with organic pollutions in sewage and
pollutions
in sewage alternately.
and oxygenLayers
in atmosphere
oxygen
in atmosphere
of biomassalternately.
are sheared Layers
from theof
biomassofare
from the
the rotation
surface to
of prevent
the media
during of
thetherotation
surface
thesheared
media during
overgrown
fixed
film.
to prevent overgrown of the fixed film.
RBCs
RBCs are
are conventionally
conventionally submerged
submergedtoto40%
40%ofof disc
discdiameter.
diameter. Increased
Increased
submergence
90%
is also
acceptable
if sufficient
air
submergence ofofdiscs
discsupuptotoabout
about
90%
is also
acceptable
if sufficient
supply
is
provided
at
the
base
of
the
tank.
This
system
is
normally
called
air supply is provided at the base of the tank. This system is normally
the
submerged
biologicalbiological
contactor contactor
(SBC).
called
the submerged
(SBC).
5.8.4.2
5.8.4.2
Design
RBC
Plants
Design Requirements
Requirementsforfor
RBC
Plants
Preceding
Preceding the
the RBC
RBC must
must be
be aa primary
primary sedimentation
sedimentationtank
tankororaa secondary
secondary
screening with <6 mm opening. A flow balancing tank must also be
screening with < 6 mm opening. A flow balancing tank must also be
provided unless the plant is designed to peak flow.
provided unless the plant is designed to peak flow.
Units must be covered for aesthetics and odour control, and only approved
Units must
for aesthetics and odour control, and only approved
media
typesbe
arecovered
accepted.
media types are accepted.
114
Volume 4
102
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines

Table 5.14 Design Parameters for RBC Plants

Table 5.14 Design Parameters for RBC Plants
Description
Description
Minimum number
of stages
Unit
Unit
Total BOD
specific
loading
g/m /d
Minimum
number
of stages
5
5 - 10 3
Total
BOD5 specific loading
Total tank
volume
Design Criteria
Design Criteria
5 -210
Based on
hrs at Qavg
g/m2/d
0.9
kg excess sludge/
Based on 2 hrs at Qavg
kg BOD5 consumed
Sludge yield
kg excess sludge/
0.9
Disc diameter
m
kg BOD5 consumed 2.5 - 3.5
Speed of rotation
rev / min
0.5 - 1.0
Disc diameter
M
2.5 - 3.5
Maximum peripheral velocity m/s
0.3
Speed of rotation
rev / min
0.5 - 1.0
Depth of disc submergence
%
40 - 90
Maximum peripheral velocity m/s
0.3
Sludge yield
Total tank volume
Depth of disc submergence
40 - 90
Refer also to Table D.3 for duty standby requirements and relevant clause of
MS
1228
Refer
alsofor
to more
Table details.
D.3 for duty standby requirements and relevant clause of MS
1228 for more details.
Rotating Biological
Contactor
Screens, Grit Removal,
Flow Measurement
Fine Screen
Raw
Sewage
Inlet
Flow
Distribution
Final Clarifier
Balancing
Tank
Sewage
Pumping
Station
Effluent To
River
Liquor
Chemical
Dosing
Sludge Storage Area
Mechanical
Sludge Dewatering
Mechanical
Sludge Thickener
Sludge Holding Tank
Ultimate Disposal
SludgeDrying Bed
OPTIONAL
Volume 4
Volume 4
115
103
5.8.5
Trickling Filter
5.8.5
Trickling Filter
5.8.5.1 General Description
5.8.5.1
General Description
The trickling filter is an established biological treatment process removing
65 to 85%
and suspended
solids.treatment
The process
of a bed
The trickling
filterBOD
is an5 established
biological
processconsists
removing
65 to 85%
BOD
and
suspended
solids.
The
process
consists
of
a
bed
of
of highly 5permeable medium. An overhead rotating distributor applies
highlysewage
permeable
An The
overhead
to medium.
the media.
flowrotating
tricklesdistributor
over andapplies
flows sewage
downward to
to the the
media.
The
flow
trickles
over
and
flows
downward
to
the
underdrain
underdrain system.
system.
The media provides a large surface area to develop biological slime
The media
provides
to developfilm.
biological
slimecontains
growth living
growth
whichaislarge
alsosurface
knownarea
as zoogleal
The film
which organisms
is also known
as
zoogleal
film.
The
film
contains
living
organisms
that break down organic material in the sewage.
that break down organic material in the sewage.
Many variations of the trickling filters have been constructed, however
Many the
variations
of the trickling
have been
constructed,
recommended
designsfilters
are given
in Table
5.15. however the
recommended designs are given in Table 5.15.
5.8.5.1 Design Requirements for Trickling Filters

5.8.5.1
Design Requirements for Trickling Filters
Secondary
(<and
6 mm)
flow balancing
tanks to
the
Secondary
screensscreens
(< 6mm)
flow and
balancing
tanks to equalise
theequalise
flow
flow
must before
be provided
before
must be
provided
trickling
filters.trickling filters.
Provisions
shall
be available
for distribution
even distribution
to achieve
complete
Provisions
shall be
available
for even
to achieve
complete
of the
filter media.
wettingwetting
of the filter
media.
Figure
Trickling
Filter Systems
Figure
5.14 5.14
Trickling
Filter Systems
Biofilter
Pump
Station
Fine
Screen
Screens, Grit Removal
Flow
Distribution
Final Clarifier
Filter
Raw
Sewage
Inlet
Effluent
To River
Sewage
Pump Station
Liquor
Chemical
Dosing
Sludge Storage Area
Mechanical Sludge
Dewatering
Mechanical Sludge
Thickener
Sludge Holding Tank
Ultimate Disposal
Sludge Drying Bed
OPTIONAL
116
104
Volume 4
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Table 5.15 Design Parameters for Trickling Filter

Description
Unit
Organic loading
Design Criteria
kg BOD5/day/m3
(depending on filter type)

Low rate
Intermediate rate
High rate
0.08 - 0.15
0.15 - 0.5
0.5 - 2.0
> 1.0
Recirculation of flow to head of plant

Qrecycle
Qinflow
(to maintain wetting rate and improve

flow)
Acceptable media
Hydraulic loading
m3/day/m2
Sludge Yields
kg sludge / kg
BOD5 influent
Minimum depth of media
Low rate
Intermediate rate
High rate
Low-rate filters
Intermediate filters
High-rate filters
HDPE, PVC, stone,

slag, coke, etc.
(random or standard
arrangement)
1-4
4 - 10
10 - 40
0.5
0.6 - 0.8
1.0
1.5
Refer also to Table D.4 for duty standby requirements and relevant clause
MS 1228 for more details.
5.8.6
Sequencing Batch Reactors (SBR) System
5.8.6.1
General Description
Sequencing Batch Reactors system is suspended activated sludge system.
In this system, sewage flows into one or more reactors where biological
oxidation and clarification of sewage take place within the same reactors
sequentially on cyclical mode. There are five (5) basic sequences in a
cycle, namely:
Volume 4
117
1.
Fill
3.
Settle
2.
4.
5.
React (Aeration)
Decant
Idle
Typically, all actions in the reactor occur at different sequence of time.

In other words, the system is intermittently fill and intermittently decant.
Typical SBR plant consists of a minimum of two (2) reactors in a plant.
When one unit of the reactors is in fill mode, the other reactor(s) may be
in the stage of react, settle, decant or idle. Recent development of SBR
system leads to the emergence of variation in the operating sequences.
Continuous fill and intermittently decant system is one of the variations
of this system, where feeding into all rectors are continuous but the
other phases (react, settle, decant, idle) are run in sequence.
In the reaction stage, oxygen supplied to the system shall be in
accordance to the load to the system within the time frame of reaction
cycle. This generally requires higher oxygen capacity per unit time than
a continuously aerate system.
In the decant stage, there shall be sufficient time to allow for mixed
liquor suspended solids (MLSS) to settle before effluent decanting begins.
Decanting time is normally much shorter than fill time. Consequently,
the effluent flow rate will also be much higher than influent flow rate.
Hence the design of the decanting weir must be capable to handle high
over-flow rate without scouring the settled sludge. Therefore, sufficient
clear water depth between the minimum water level after decant and
the top of the settled sludge blanket must be allowed for to minimise
sludge carry over. Hence the depth of water decanted must be restricted
to prevent scouring of solids.
5.8.6.2
Design Requirements for SBR Plants

All SBR plants must be designed to cater for peak flows. A minimum
of a two (2) tanks system is required. Proven control system in the form
of Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) with complete instruction, and
operational and training manuals must be submitted together with the
design. All SBR systems must be preceded with complete preliminary
works. Allowance shall be provided to completely empty a tank for
maintenance purposes without interrupting the operating sequence of
the plant.
Table 5.16 highlights the key design requirements for an SBR plant.
118
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Table 5.16 Design Requirements for SBR System

Unit
Continuous Fill and

Intermittently Decant
Intermittently Fill and

Intermittently Decant
unit
Minimum 2
Minimum 2
Hydraulic retention
time at Qavg (at
average water level)
hr
18 24
18 24
F/M ratio
d-1
0.05 0.08
0.05 0.30
Sludge age
20 30
10 30
kg Sludge
0.75 0.85
0.75 1.10
mg/l
3000 4500
3000 4500
hr
48
48
DO (Reactor)
mg/l
0 ~ 6.5
0 ~ 6.5
DO (Effluent)
mg/l
2.0
2.0
Parameter
No. of Reactors
Sludge Yield
kg BOD5 load
MLSS (End of decant)

Cycle Time
Oxygen Requirement
kg O2
kg Substrate
Cycle time
Aeration Time
2.0 kg O2
kg substrate
Cycle time
Aeration Time
2.0 kg O2
kg substrate
Decant time
hrs
1.0
1.0
Decant depth
Max 0.5
max 1.0
Decant volume
Not more than 25% of

volume of Biological
Reactor at TWL
Not more than 30% of volume

of Biological Reactor at TWL
m3/m/hr
20 for decant draw-down

from TWL
20 for decant draw-down

from TWL
2 nos. independent
decanter per tank
2 nos. independent decanter

per tank
4.0
4.0
Decanting device
loading rate*
Minimum number of
decanter
Max. pecanter length
WAS
kg sludge/d
Fill volume
*
*

m3

Total solids in system
Total solids in system
Was=
Was=

Slude age

Slude age
Vfill = (QP m3/hr x 1.5hr)
+ (Tfill 1.5) x QAVG (if no
balancing tank)
Vfill = QAVG x Tfill (if
preceded by
balancing tank)
Vfill = (QP m3/hr x 1.5hr) +

(Tfill 1.5) x QAVG (if no EQ)
Vfill = QAVG x Tfill (if preceded
by balancing tank)
For continuous fill, length to width ratio shall be based on 3 : 1

Decanting device loading rate shall be based on Vfill/decant time during
decanting.
RAS maybe necessary where length to width ratio poses dilution affect
into the inlet.
Volume 4
119
5.8.7
Design Requirements for Hybrid Systems

A hybrid system is a recent development in biological treatment combining
suspended solids and fixed film growth processes. The treatment system
may be considered if the design criterion to be adopted has proven
performance and result.
5.8.8
Design for Nutrient Removal for Sensitive Receiving Water

Nutrient removal is required for effluent discharge to lakes and stagnant
water bodies to prevent eutrophication or other potential impacts that
may impede the sensitivity of the receiving water. Nutrient removal can
be achieved via:
a)
Biological treatment.
c)
Chemical treatment.
b)
Physical treatment.
It has been emphasised in the beginning of this chapter, all biological

treatment system shall be designed to achieve ammonia reduction and
where necessary anoxic zone/stage to be added to encourage denitrification
for total nitrogen removal.
The biological phosphorus removal mechanism is based on the fact that
bacteria are capable of storing excess phosphorus as polyphosphate and
removing simple fermentation substrates produced in the anaerobic zone
and assimilating them into storage products within their cells. Hence,
the design for of the biological treatment shall follow the following for
plants where nutrient removal (nitrogen and phosphorus) is required,
design parameters:
Table 5.17 Design Requirement for Biological
Nutrient Removal System
Item
120
Design Parameters
HRT
(hrs)
MLSS
(mg/l)
1
2
1st stage anaerobic

1st stage anoxic
1-2
2-4
2 000 6 000
2 000 6 000
1st stage aerobic (oxic)
8 - 12
2 000 6 000
4
5
6
2nd stage anoxic

2nd stage anaerobic
2nd stage aerobic (oxic)
2-4
1-2
4
2 000 6 000
2 000 6 000
2 000 6 000
Volume 4
Internal recycle
RAS from clarifier

2 to 1 (MLSS
recirculation ratio)
3 to 2 (MLSS
recirculation ratio)
Mixing
Mixing
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines

It has been emphasised in the beginning of this chapter, all biological

It has
been emphasised
in be
the designed
beginningtoofachieve
this chapter,
all reduction
biological and
treatment
system shall
ammonia
treatment
shallanoxic
be designed
to achieve
ammonia
reduction and
where
wheresystem
necessary
zone/ stage
to be added
to encourage
denitrification
necessary
anoxic
zone/stage
to
be
added
to
encourage
denitrification
for
for total nitrogen removal.
total nitrogen removal.
Figure 5.15 Typical Process Flow Diagram for
Figure 5.15 - Typical Process Flow Diagram
Biological Nutrient Removal System
for Biological Nutrient Removal System
To get
phosphate
To get
nitrate bac k
Back
1st.
Anaerobic
1st.
Anoxic
1st.
Aerobic
2nd
Anoxic
2nd.
2nd.
Anaerobic Aerobic
Clarifier
Effluent
RAS
Alternatively,
both both
physical
and chemical
treatment
may be used
Alternatively,
physical
and chemical
treatment
maytoberemove
used to
Phosphorus
wastewater.in wastewater.
remove in
phosphorus
TheThe
designer
shallshall
taketake
all necessary
consideration
in theindesign
in relation
designer
all necessary
consideration
the design
in relation
to the
specific
requirements
of
the
receiving
water
in
determining
the
actual
to the specific requirements of the receiving water in determining the
nutrient
removal
requirement
the case byon
case
actual
nutrient
removal on
requirement
thebasis.
case by case basis.
Volume 4
Volume 4
121
109
5.9
Design of Secondary Clarifiers
5.9.1
Purpose
Effluent from biological processes contains large populations of microorganisms (MLSS). Secondary clarifiers provided after the biological
system allow the mixed liquor organisms/ solid to settle. Clear supernatant
is discharged as the effluent, while some of the settled microorganisms
are returned to the biological treatment system to maintain the MLSS
concentration and excess microorganisms are removed as biosolid to the
sludge treatment facility.
5.9.2
Design Requirements
The design requirements shall include:
I)
a)
Minimum retention time for settlement.
c)
Sludge hopper to collect settled sludge.
b)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Maximum settling velocity for settlement.

All clarifiers must be equipped with sludge scrapers to skim
sludge from the bottom unless they are designed with a 60o
hopper bottom.
All clarifiers must be equipped with scum skimmer to remove

scum from the surface. The scum collected must be drained
(where necessary) and disposed off. Returning the scum to the
preliminary system or the biological system is not permitted.
Multiple hopper are not permitted.
Stilling basin to prevent hydraulic shock circuiting.
h)
Bottom slope at clarifier floor.
j)
Appropriate feed and outlet pipe with hydraulic consideration.
i)
k)
l)
m)
II)
a)
122
General
Facilities to dispose scum and sludge.
Effluent collection channel to be of glazed finish/tiles.

Proper maintenance access to all components.
Properly designed air lift pumps are only permitted for PE less
than 1000.
Weirs
If insufficient length is available, then considerations shall be
given for the use of double weir.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
b)
Cascading V-notch is preferred over rectangular weirs.
d)
Broad crested weirs are not encouraged.
c)
e)
f)
Slots in the weir shall be provided to allow for level adjustment

during the installation stage.
All parts of the weirs must be visible and accessible for regular
cleaning.
Type of weir and the hydraulic calculation for the weir proposed
must be submitted.
III)
Circular clarifiers
a)
The maximum diameter permissible is 50 m and a reasonable

allowance between tanks shall be provided for vehicle access.
b)
c)
d)
The minimum side water depth shall be 3.0 m. Greater side water
depths may be used if it can be shown that the mixed liquor is
well denitrified in the aeration tank.
Flow distribution channel/chamber shall be provided for flow
isolation or equalise flow distribution.
The scraper tip travelling speed shall not exceed 0.03 rpm. A
multiple stage reduction unit must be incorporated to achieve
such speed.
IV)
Rectangular clarifiers
b)
Multiport wall and baffled inlet shall be provided.
d)
Allowance also shall be provided for vehicle movement between

unit processes for maintenance purposes.
a)
c)
e)
Shall not be wider than 6 m per tank to allow for scraper removal,
unless other approved scraper units are available.
Slide gates shall be used to isolate each tank.
Scraper travelling speed shall be between 0.3 0.6 m/min.
Refer also to relevant clause of MS 1228 for more details.

5.9.3
Multiple Hoppers
Multiple hoppers are not accepted. This is due to the settling characteristics
of the particles in the flow. Larger and heavier particles settle faster
than smaller and lighter particles, creating difference in the distribution
of sedimentation in different hoppers. This will present operational
difficulties because sludge removal from the hoppers is unequal. To
avoid the non-uniform withdrawal of sludge, each hopper in the multiple
hopper configuration needs a separate pipe and pump or valve on each
outlet.
Volume 4
123
Table 5.18
Design Parameters for Secondary Clarifiers
Description
Design Criteria
Unit
PE 5,000
PE > 5,000
Minimum number of tanks
2*
Tank configuration
Square
Circular
Rectangular
Circular
Rectangular #
Minimum side water depth
3**
Minimum hydraulic retention time

(HRT) at Qpeak
hrs
Surface overflow rate at Qpeak
m3/d/m2
30
30
Solids loading rate at Qpeak
kg/d/m2
<150
<150
Solids loading rate at Qavg
kg/d/m2
<50
<50
Weir loading rate at Qpeak
m3/day/m
<180
<180
Return activated sludge (RAS)

pumping rate
Continuous
Continuous
Waste activated sludge (WAS)

pumping rate
Continuous or
batch
Continuous or
batch
Sizing of rectangular tanks

Length : Width
Maximum side water depth
3:1 or greater.
m
Width : Depth
3.0
1 : 1 to 2.5 : 1
Sizing of circular tanks

Side water depth, minimum
Floor slope wall
3.0 **
1:12
Notes:
* For PE less than or equal to 1000 a single clarifier is acceptable.
#
Rectangular tanks are acceptable if equipped with automatic scraping and
desludging devices.
** For square clarifier with 600 slope minimum 1 m side water depth shall
be provided.
124
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
5.10
Disinfection
Disinfection refers to the selective destruction of disease causing organisms
in sewage effluent.
Methods of disinfection can be physical, chemical or radiation.
Continuous disinfection is required for those areas where the discharge
from the sewage works will cause detrimental effect onto the receiving
water course, such as bathing beaches, lakes, etc.
The Commission reserves the right to determine the need for the provision
of a continuous disinfection facility.
The common forms of disinfection that are available for wastewater
applications are:
a)
Chlorination
b)
Ultra-violet (UV)
c)
Others
Chlorination is by far the most common type of disinfection used worldwide. This is due to its effectiveness in providing a good pathogen
kill with relative simplicity in operation and maintenance. However,
chlorination using chlorine gas, requires a higher degree of operational
skills and poses potential health and safety hazards in the shipping and
handling aspects. Therefore, to reduce these hazards, only liquid or
solid hypochlorite (sodium or calcium) shall be used.
Ultra-violet (UV) disinfection differs from chemical disinfection in
that it uses irradiation to induce photobiochemical changes within the
micro-organisms. To ensure effective photochemical reaction taking
place, one of the conditions is that such radiation must be absorbed by
the target molecule (organism). The other condition is that sufficient
radiation energy to alter chemical bonds is made available. Given the
conditions above, it is critical that the effluent prior to disinfection must
be relatively clear of suspended solids. As such, for UV disinfection to
be highly effective in wastewater applications, filtration of upstream of
the UV unit must be made available.
Other forms of wastewater disinfection that are available are maturation
ponds and ozonation. Maturation ponds have been used widely and
successfully in Malaysia. However, the drawback is that a relatively
large area of land is required to provide sufficient retention time in the
pond for the decay of pathogens. Ozone disinfection involves the direct
ozone oxidation or by reaction with the radical by-products of ozone
decomposition. However, due to ozonations relatively new status in
wastewater applications and higher costs at small scale facilities, its
usage for disinfection is still limited.
Volume 4
125

5.10.1
5.10.1
Design Requirements
Requirements
Design
All new STPs must have provision for disinfection infrastructure such
All
new STPs
provision
for structures.
disinfection infrastructure
as contact
tankmust
andhave
other
necessary
The provisionsuch
of as
the
contact
tankfacilities
and other
The provision
of 5.19
the
disinfection
and necessary
equipmentstructures.
shall be in accordance
to Table
disinfection
facilities andshall
equipment
shallout
be in
in continuous
accordance or
to intermittent
Table 5.19
below. The disinfection
be carried
below.
mode. The disinfection shall be carried out in continuous or intermittent
mode.
Table 5.19: Requirements for Disinfection Facility
Table 5.19: Requirements for Disinfection Facility
Description
Description
Class of STP*
Continuous
Continuous
Class 4
Class of STP*
Intermittent
Intermittent
Class 1
Class1 2
Class
Class 4
Class2 3
Class
Type of Disinfection
Chlorination

Chlorination
Class 3
Ultra-violet (UV)
Type of Disinfection

Chlorination
Chlorination

Ozone
Ultra-Violet (UV)
Facility
(1duty/1standby) for
Basic facility structure.
equipment
Ozone
(1Duty/1Standby)
for requirements
Basic facility
*Facility
The Commission may
impose separate
on case by case
equipment
structure.
basis.
* The
Commission
may impose
separateofrequirements
case by case basis.
Figure
5.16
Schematic
illustration
ultravioletondisinfection
system with stilling plate for flow conditioning and
Figure 5.16 Schematic
illustration
ultraviolet
disinfection system with
elongated
weiroffor
level control
stilling plate for flow conditioning and elongated weir for level control
"A"
"A"
FLOW
PDC
COVER PLATES OR GRATING
STAINLESS STEEL WEIR
TOP VIEW
(Cables removed for Clarity)
CONTROL PANEL AND

POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTRE
FRONT ACCESS
ULTRAVIOLET LAMP RACKS

COVER PLATES OR GRATING
STILING PLATES
LEVEL PROBE
FLOW
SECTION 'A' - 'A'
126
Volume 4
114
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines

5.17 schematic
Profile schematic
of lamp relative
modules
relative
Figure Figure
5.17 Profile
of lamp modules
to inlet
and outlet
to inlet and
outlet structure
structure
Figure 5.17 Profile schematic of lamp modules relative to inlet and outlet
structure
Flapper Gate
Level Control
Disinfection Module
Power & Data
Interconnect Cables
Flapper Gate
Level Control
Flow
Power & Data

Interconnect Cables
Effluent
Channel
UV Protective
Disinfection Module
Effluent
Channel
Station Cleaning
Liner with covet
304 Stainless Steel
Station Cleaning
Liner with covet
304 Stainless Steel
Service
Electrically Operated
Area Jib Host
Station Cleaning drain
Electrically Operated
Jib Host
Inffluent
Channel
Flow
Service
Area
UV Protective
Inffluent
Channel
Flow
Flow
Power Distribution
Data center (PDDC)
Power Cable
Signal Cable
from Plant Flow meter
Station Cleaning drain
PLAN VIEW
Power Distribution
Data center (PDDC)
Power Cable
Signal Cable
from Plant Flow meter
PLAN VIEW
Influent
Channel
Influent
Channel
Influent
Channel
Influent
Channel
SECTION "A - A"

SECTION "A - A"
Figure 5.18
Chemical-feed system schematic
Figure 5.18 Chemical-feed system schematic
Figure 5.18
Chemical-feed system schematic
CALIBRATION COLUMN
RELIEF VALVE
CALIBRATION COLUMN
RELIEF VALVE
CHEMICAL
FEED PUMP
CHEMICAL
FEED PUMP
STORAGE TANK
BACK PRESSURE
CONTROL
BACK PRESSURE
CONTROL
STORAGE TANK
Volume 4
Volume 4
Volume 4
127
115
115
5.10.1.1 Continuous Disinfection

I)
Disinfection with Ultra-Violet (UV)

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
128
Filtration ahead of the ultra-violet disinfection is a must in order

to ensure consistent and reliable disinfecting performance, as well
as, to reduce maintenance, such as, fouling of the UV lamps.
The performance of the UV unit shall meet a UV transmittance

level of secondary effluent of at least 60% on a filtered basis. If
a lower transmittance level is encountered, it shall be compensated
with the reduction in the spacing of lamps and/or usage of
an advanced higher intensity system to compensate the lower
tranmissibility of the sewage effluent.
The channel for the UV shall be open, long and narrow to
encourage plug flow and avoid short circuiting.
As a guide, the average sizing is roughly 10 conventional 1.5 meter

lamps per 1,000 m3/day at peak flow. However, the actual sizing
shall be site specific and subjected to effluent quality desired as
well as the level of upstream treatment provided.
In the design to house the UV modules, it is important to include

proper inlet and outlet structures and consider the approach and
exit flow conditions.
A stilling well is required to distribute the flows and equalise the

velocities across the cross-section of the channel. The stilling
plate shall be placed at least 5 meters in front of the first lamp
bank. Otherwise, the channel should have an undisturbed straight
line of two (2) or three (3) lamps length.
Sufficient distance shall be allowed between lamp banks (0.5 m

to 1.0 m) and two (2) to three (3) lamp lengths between the last
bank and the downstream level control device.
In large system applications, a multichannel configuration is

required. This is to allow the inlet structure to satisfy the dual
requirements of inducing flow and to allow even distribution of
flow among operational channels. Channel inlet structures shall
allow for hydraulic isolation of individual channels during low
flow and routine maintenance. In operation, the multichannel
design shall be controlled to maintain a minimum velocity through
any one channel.
Wastewater within the channel must be maintained at a constant
level with little fluctuations. This shall be accomplished by
using a mechanical counter balance gate downstream of the lamp
batteries.
It is crucial to avoid a dryness state in the channel during low

or no flow conditions to prevent the fouling of the quartz jackets
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
surrounding the lamps and/or causing damage to the UV modules.

To alleviate this, for a small STP, a fixed or adjustable weir
should be used.
k)
l)
m)
n)
However, sufficient weir length shall be provided to avoid water

level fluctuations. In larger STPs using the multichannel design,
these flow fluctuations can be attenuated by the opening and
closing of channels as needed.
Control systems should be simple. Its objective is to ensure that
the system loading can be maintained and disinfection accomplished,
while conserving the operating life of the lamps. In small STPs,
the control system shall consists, of a full duty unit in operation
at all times with a similar redundant unit on standby. Manual
control and flexibility should be made available to enable the
operator to bring portions of the systems in and out of operation,
as needed, to adjust for the changes in flow or water quality. In
larger STPs, a complete automation is warranted for plants using
the multi channel design.
Safety aspects of an UV disinfection facility involve mainly

the electrical hazards and protection from the exposure to UV
radiation. The exposure risks could be minimised as long as the
operating lamps are submerged and the lamp batteries are shielded.
The UV lamps shall not be operated in air and unshielded. All
systems must be equipped with safety interlocks that shut down
the modules if they are moved out of their operating positions
or the wastewater level falls, leaving any or all lamps exposed
to air. Electrical hazards can be minimised by the inclusion of
ground-fault-interruption circuitry with each module. This feature
is a requirement for all UV systems.
The design of the UV system shall allow for easy access to the
lamp modules for cleaning and other maintenance tasks. The
installation shall have adequate working area for maintenance
and servicing of the modules when taken out of the channels.
Cleaning of the lamps shall be accomplished using mechanical
wipers which may be fitted with chemical injectors and with
chemical baths when taken out of the channels.
A drainage system back to the head of the treatment works shall
be provided to drain back water from the reactors, channels
and other related tankage. In addition, a permanent clean-water
system is to be made available to allow for rinsing and cleaning
needs. A bypass around the UV disinfection facility is to be
made available in the event the system is shut down completely
for maintenance.
Volume 4
129
Table 5.20 Design Guides for Disinfection with Ultra-Violet(UV)
UV system
Description
Design Criteria
Mounted in open channel type*

Must be preceeded with filtration.
Minimum UV Dose (at 254 nm) at end of

lamp life
30 mJ/cm2 (30,000 Ws/cm2)

at Qpeak
Maximum Total Suspended Solids in

effluent to UV system
< 10 mg/l
Maximum Mean Particle Size in effluent
20 microns
UV Transmittance at 254 nm
65%
Lamp life
12 000 hours
Minimum UV output at end of lamp life
80%
Operating Temperature
18 40 oC
Relative Humidity
> 95% at 40 oC
UV detection System
UV sensor, transmittance, dose pacing
Lamp Sleeve Cleaning system
a. Mechanical wipers and out of

channel chemical cleaning.
b. Additional 25% more lamps shall be
provided for mechanical wipers.
Standby lamps
25% to be provided with min 2 lamp

banks
Disinfection Standards
In accordance with receiving water

requirement or effluent usage
Note:
*Enclosed system shall be permitted under special circumstances
II)
Disinfection with Hypochlorite

a)
130
Calcium and sodium hypochlorite are hazardous chemicals to

handle and use. Calcium hypochlorite is classified as a corrosive
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
and rapid oxidant, while sodium hypochlorite is a corrosive

agent. Eye protection, access to an emergency eyewash system
and showers must be made available to the operators.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Also, direct contact with the undiluted hypochlorite is likely to

cause burns to the skin and clothing. Therefore, it is imperative
that protective clothing which includes rubber gloves, must be
worn by operators when working with these chemicals. When
calcium hypochlorite is being transported in the powder form and
mixed in water to form solutions, the operator should always wear
eye protection and dust masks. All areas exposed to hypochlorite
should be washed thoroughly.
Chlorine dosage ranges from 6 to 10 mg/l for effluent. The
dosage rate is affected by the suspended solids and ammonia
present in the effluent, mixing employed, contact time and the
control strategies used for dosing.
Proper mixing is important for effective disinfection.
If a hydraulic jump is employed as a mixing device, the submergence

of the diffuser shall not be less than 230 mm (9 in.) below
the water surface and placed before the hydraulic jump at the
minimum flow. The hydraulic jump is effective in mixing when
the head loss exceeds 0.6 m (2 ft). To ensure adequate mixing
is achieved, the evaluation of the flow characteristics should be
carried out. As a minimum, the Reynolds number shall be 2.1
x 104 for pipe flow and Froude numbers between 4.5 and 9 for
open channels is recommended.
Hypochlorinators are chemical-feed pumps used for feeding

sodium or calcium hypochlorite. The basic components are a
storage reservoir or mixing tank for the hypochlorite solution; a
metering pump that consists of a positive displacement pumping
mechanism, motor or solenoid and a feed rate adjustment device;
and an injection device. Depending on the size of the system, a
plastic or fiber-glass vessel may be used to hold a low-strength
hypochlorite solution. It is not acceptable to use metals commonly
used in the construction of storage tanks to hold the hypochlorite
solutions because of the corrosive nature of the chemical which
will also expedite the decomposition of the liquid hypochlorite.
Feeding of calcium hypochlorite will require a mixing device,

usually a motorised propeller or agitator located in the tank.
Also, in the tank is a foot-valve and suction strainer connected
to the suction inlet of the hypochlorinator.
The hypochlorinator shall be feed rate adjustable.
The injection fitting shall be similar to that used in the gas

chlorinator.
Volume 4
131
i)
A chlorine contact tank shall take the form of rectangular

serpentine chamber. Circular chambers for disinfection are not
acceptable.
j)
Local supply of water shall be made available for the dilution of

powder calcium or sodium hypochlorite. A breaker tank for supply
of water is required for the proper running of the hypochlorinator.
If deemed necessary, the water pressure maybe increased with the
provision of water booster pump.
k)
Pipe works should be suitable for chlorination applications and

well supported.
l)
m)
n)
o)
Provision for draining the chlorine contact chamber is required

for cleaning and maintenance purposes. This shall include a drain
valve located at the bottom of the downstream end of the chamber.
The point of discharge shall ensure that adequate treatment is
given and this could be done through pumping the content from
the chamber and return to the head of the treatment plant.
A bypass around the chlorine contact chamber shall also be
provided to enable flows to be bypassed during maintenance or
servicing. There shall be penstocks upstream and downstream
of the chlorine contact chamber for isolation purposes.
Adequate access with sufficient turning radius for the vehicle

to carry in the chemicals to the disinfection system shall be
provided.
A small housing structure shall be provided to house hypochlorinator,

associated chemicals and ancillaries. Some important consideration
have to be given in the design of adequate space for the operators
to replace and fill the chemicals, washing facility, eyewash, record
keeping of chemical dosing, effluent flowmeter data among others.
Due to the hazardous nature of the disinfection system housed,
a locking system shall be made available to deter vandalism and
promote safety of the plant.
The structure housing the hypochlorinator and the chemicals shall be

bunded to prevent the possibility of spillage. The sizing of bunds shall
correspond to the total volume of the storage/solution tanks.
132
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Table 5.21 - Design Guide for Disinfection with Hypochlorite

Type
Dosage
Mixing
Hypochlorinator
system
Equipment
Contact Tank
Contact Period
Maximum depth
Depth : Width
Min no. of passes
Length : Width at
each pass
Wetted Depth :
Width
Calcium or Sodium
6 10 mg/l
Mechanical, baffles or hydraulic jump.
Feed rate adjustable
1 duty/ 1 standby
15 minutes at Qpeak
3m
2:1
4
6:1
< 2:1
5.10.1.2 Intermittent Disinfection

The design requirements for intermittent disinfection facility shall comply
to the following:
a)
b)
Due to the infrequent usage and other health and safety considerations
in an intermittent disinfection system, ONLY liquid hypochlorite,
either calcium or sodium, shall be used.
A chlorine contact chamber shall be provided with a minimum of
15 minutes hydraulic retention time at peakflow. This chamber
shall be of a rectangular configuration with aspect ratios optimised
to promote plug flow conditions. The recommended aspect ratios
are as follows:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Length to width (each Pass): 6:1

Minimum number of passes: 4
Height to width of the cross-section of the wetted section:
< 2:1
Depth of chlorine contact chamber is typically 2 3 m.
The corners shall be rounded to reduce the dead flow
areas and the velocity through the contact chamber shall
be sufficient to minimise solids deposition.
Volume 4
133
v)
horizontal baffles shall be used to ensure the plug flow

conditions are maintained and to minimise the possibility
of short circuiting.
vi)
Upstream of the contact chamber, a dosing coupling for

easy hook-up of the mobile hypochlorite disinfection system
shall be an inherent part of the chamber design.
c)
A breaker tank for supply of water adjacent to the contact tank is

required to provide water for the mixing of powder hypochlorite
and for cleaning or cleansing of the contact chamber. If deemed
necessary, a water booster system shall be provided to increase
the water pressure for the intended application.
d)
Draining provision must be made available to allow for complete

drainage of the chlorine contact tank. For this purpose, a drain
valve shall be provided at the bottom of the downstream end of
the chamber.
e)
f)
g)
Penstock/slide gate shall be provided at the upstream and downstream

end of the contact chamber. This allows for the effluent flow
from the treatment plant to bypass this chamber when its service
is not required.
Adequate access shall be provided for a portable hypochlorinator

unit mounted on a skid to be brought by a truck to the contact
chamber area when disinfection is required. A concrete pad
adjacent to the contact chamber shall be provided for the skid
mounted hypochlorinator to be situated when in use.
Power supply shall be adequately provided and located close to
the contact chamber to run the intermittent disinfection system.
Table 5.22 Design Guide for Intermittent Disinfection
Type
134
Calcium or Sodium
Dosage
6 10 mg/l
Mixing
Mechanical, baffles or hydraulic jump.
Hypochlorinator
system
Feed rate adjustable
Equipment
1 duty/ 1 standby
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Table 5.22 Design Guide for Intermittent Disinfection (cont.)

Type
Calcium or Sodium
Contact Tank
Contact Period
15 minutes at Qpeak
Maximum depth
Depth : Width
Min no. of passes
Length : Width at each
pass
Wetted Depth : Width
3m
2:1
4
6:1
< 2:1
5.11
Design of Flow Measurement Devices
5.11.1
Purpose of Flow Measuring Devices

Flow measuring devices are necessary for monitoring of plant operation
and process control continuously. The purposes of flow devices are:
a)
b)
c)
d)
5.11.2
to maintain flow records periodically for future reference, especially

when plant expansion is needed.
to identify the flow pattern which may be due to population

growth or infiltration.
Statutory requirement by the DOE to maintain flow records at
all sewage works.
To establish operational cost for treatment of sewage.
Design Requirements for Flow Devices

Flow devices are mandatory for all STP, regardless of size.
Volume 4
135
Table 5.23 Design Parameters for Flow Devices

Design Criteria
Description
Location of flow
meter
Type of Flow
Measurement
Type of flow meter
Method of
measurement
Measurement
times
PE 5,000
PE > 5,000
Inlet or Outlet
Inlet and Outlet
Closed Conduit or Open

Channel
V- notch (Outlet Only)
Rectangular Weir (Outlet Only)
Flumes
Closed Conduit or Open

Channel
V-notch (Outlet Only)
Rectangular (Outlet Only)
Flumes
Electromagnetic
Electromagnetic
Ultrasonic
Automated or manual
measurement of Staff gauge
to measure height of crest
with calibration curves /
tables
Continuous or Intermittent
Ultrasonic
Automated devices linked to
data logging with integrator
and transmitted to chart
recorder
(minimum 7 days chart time)
Continuous
5.12
Sludge Holding, Treatment and Disposal
5.12.1
Introduction
All treatment processes are capable of producing significant quantities
of sludge which requires to be further treated. The sludge comprises
essentially inert and organic matters that are biodegradable and nonbiodegradable present in sewage, and bacterial cells generated by the
biological treatment processes. The treated sludge, often referred as
biosolids is ready for safe disposal or reuse.
The importance of sludge management increases with the increase in the
amount of sewage treated. Space has to be allowed within the premises
of an STP to accommodate sludge treatment, handling and storage
facilities.
All sludge need to be treated for safe disposal back to the environment.
The minimum requirement for sludge treatment is to achieve stabilize
sludge with a 20% dry solid content.
136
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
For large scale development whereby the full sludge generation will
only be achieved over a certain time period, proper sizing/modulation
of sludge treatment facilities need to be provided in order to achieve
the immediate needs for sludge treatment.
5.12.2
Sludge Strategy in General

Figure 5.20 shows the typical sludge treatment and disposal strategy
which consists of three main stages.
a)
Stage 1 - Preliminary treatment and digestion
c)
Stage 3 - Utilisation and disposal
b)
I)
Stage 2 - Conditioning and dewatering
Stage 1 - Preliminary Treatmentand Digestion
Preliminary treatment may include reception or holding facility for

screened sludge, primary thickening and digestion facilities.
For imported sludge the reception facility may comprise of an unloading
area, screen chamber, reception tank and transfer pump(s).
Thickening equipment, such as, centrifuge, drum thickener or gravity
belt thickener is provided to thicken the raw screened sludge from
about 1% dry solids content to about 6% dry solids content. To assist
the thickening process, an in-line polymer dosing system or chemical
conditioning shall be provided.
Two types of digestion facilities are available for digestion after the
thickening: aerobic and anaerobic digestion.
Secondary thickening is recommended to reduce the volume of digested
sludge, which will then reduce the size and the number of the next
treatment process unit, i.e., dewatering equipment.
II)
Stage 2 - Conditioning and Dewatering
Dewatering can be achieved by two (2) methods : mechanical dewatering

and non-mechanical dewatering.
a)
Mechanical dewatering such as belt filter press, centrifuge or

filter press is provided for sludge dewatering purposes. To assist
the mechanical dewatering equipment in achieving optimum level
of cake dryness, an in-line polymer dosing system or chemical
conditioning shall be provided.
Volume 4
137
b)
Non-mechanical dewatering, e.g. drying beds or sludge lagoons

is often used
For a facility serving 10,000 PE, the drying beds must be
designed to support mechanical/machine lift for the purpose of
clearing the dried sludge.
Sludge lagoons of about 2 m depth are also used for sludge
stabilisation and drying. The sludge lagoons shall be sized to
receive sludge for a period of at least 6 months and are allowed
to undergo stabilisation through evaporation and drying for
another 6 months period. The lagoons shall be lined with either
PVC lining, concrete or 600 mm thick clay lining. An access
ramp shall be provided to allow mechanical equipment access
to clean dried sludge.
III)
Stage 3 - Utilisation and Disposal
After the dewatering process, an on-site storage for 30 days of the

treated bio-solid shall be provided. The storage structure shall be
covered with roof and provided with partly opened walls to allow for
proper ventilation.
Finally, the bio-solid is either composted and/or applied directly for
land reclamation (i.e., for ex-mining land), land application (i.e., for
certain types of agriculture land and forest land/reforestation) or used
as top soil cover at land fill site. The ultimate disposal of bio-solid is
the responsibility of the plant operator.
5.12.3
Provision of Sludge Holding, Treatment and Disposal

The Service Licensee will advise on current capacity in its existing
sludge treatment facilities, suitable sludge stabilisation, dewatering and
final disposal of the sludge shall be provided.
If the Service Licensee has the capacity to receive sludge generated from
the development, then the project proponent has the option to negotiate
with the Service Licensee to dispose off the sludge at the existing
facility. In this case, a sludge storage tank with a minimum capacity to
hold for 30 days with the sludge thickened to 1% solids is acceptable.
Otherwise, the sludge shall be stabilised, dewatered and prepared in a
suitable form for disposal.
Different types of STPs produce different quantities of bio-solid. The
principal assumptions adopted on waste generation rates are summarised
in Table 5.24.
138
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Table 5.24 - Sludge Generation Rates

Treatment System
Unit Generation Rates
Comments
Primary Sludge
Primary Clarifier
0.5 kg sludge/kg solids input
Based on continuous
sludge withdrawal
Imhoff Tank
0.15 kg sludge/kg SS input
Based on average 6 month

desludging period
Conventional
Activated Sludge
System
0.8 to 1.0 kg sludge/kg BOD5

removed
Standard A/B
Extended Aeration or
Oxidation Ditch
0.4 to 0.6 kg sludge/kg BOD5

removed
Standard A/B
RBC/SBC/High
Rate Trickling Filter
System
0.8 kg sludge/kg BOD5 removed Standard A/B
Hybrid System
0.4 kg sludge/kg BOD5 removed Standard A/B
Secondary Sludge
Note:
Based on the above assumptions, the quantity of waste sludge requiring treatment and disposal can
be estimated. Refer also to design guides related to each of the above individual processes.
5.12.4
Design Criteria
The ultimate aim of sludge treatment is to achieve at a minimum
stabilised sludge with dry solids content of 20% for final disposal.
A combination of various unit processes may be used to achieve this
minimum requirement.
I)
a)
b)
c)
Sludge Reception/Sludge Holding

An unloading area is normally provided to receive sludge tankers
delivering imported sludge to the facility, if necessary. It should
also includes a parking area for sludge tankers.
A mechanically raked screen with 12 mm opening together
with a manually raked by-pass screen shall be provided where
necessary.
Connection fitted female coupling with ball valve shall be
provided at the reception facility for the connection of desludging
tankers hose.
Volume 4
139
d)
Minimum three (3) days sludge holding capacity of between

1 to 4% dry solids content sludge (depending on the types of
sludge) shall be provided after the screening process.
e)
Overflow pipe shall be provided at sludge holding tank to

aeration tank to avoid overflowing.
f)
II)
Adequate ventilation/air extraction fan shall be provided at the

thickening/dewatering house.
Solid Thickening
Thickening is a process used to increase the solids content of sludge by

removing a portion of the liquid fraction. It is generally accomplished
by physical means, including co-settling, gravity settling, flotation,
centrifugation, gravity belt and rotary drum. The design parameters for
sludge thickening equipment shall follow Table 5.25 below:
Table 5.25 - Design Parameters for Sludge Thickening
Type of Thickening
Picket Fence Gravity

Thickener
% Dry
Solids
1.5
Dissolved Air
Flotation
Belt Thickener
Drum Thickener
Centrifuge
Polymer
System
Speed of
Sludge
feed
pump
Backwash
water
system
n/a
n/a
n/a
< 300 rpm
Yes
Yes with
appropriate
polymer
turndown
ratio
Note:
a) Mechanical thickener shall be designed for 8 hrs/day and 5 days/week
operation.
b) For belt, drum and centrifuge thickener, three polymer injection
points shall be provided
c) Potable water to be provided for polymer mixing system.
140
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
III)
Solid Digestion
Sewage biosolids in its natural state (raw) is rich in pathogenic organisms,

easily putrescible and rapidly developing unpleasant smells. Stabilization
processes were developed with the purpose of stabilizing the biodegradable
fraction of organic matter present in the bio-solids, thus reducing the risk
of putrefaction as well as diminishing the concentration of pathogens.
The stabilization processes can be divided into:
a)
b)
c)
Biological stabilization specific bacteria promote the stabilization

of the biodegradable fraction of the organic matter.
Chemical stabilization chemical oxidation of the organic matter

accomplishes sludge stabilization.
Thermal stabilization heat stabilizes the volatile fraction of
sludge in hermetically sealed containers.
The most widely used stabilization process is biological stabilization

via anaerobic and aerobic digestion.
Table 5.26 - Design Parameters for Aerobic and Anaerobic Digestion
Description
Number of Tank, Minimum
Min. Solids Retention Time

Organic Loading Rate
Typical Feed Solids

Concentration
Unit
No.
Days
KgVS/m3.d
%
Type of Mixing
Tank Dimension, maximum
Dissolved Oxygen
Aerobic
Digestion
Anaerobic
Digestion
10
18
1.6 4.8
2
Aerators
Diffusers
Min. Water Depth, minimum
Tank Shape
Design Criteria
mg/L
Volume 4
Cylindrical
Rectangular
25 diameter
25 length
1-2
0.8 1.6
2-6
Gas Injection
Mechanical
Stirring
Mechanical
Pumping
7.5
Cylindrical
Egg-Shaped
25 diameter
-
141
IV)
Sludge Dewatering
Table 5.27 Recommended Design Parameters

for Sludge Stabilisation and Dewatering
Descriptions
Sludge Stabilisation
Type of stabilisation
process
Hydraulic retention time

(HRT) minimum
Design Considerations
Unit
PE 2,000
PE > 2,000
Simple anaerobic or
aerobic digestion
Ambient anaerobic
digestion with good mixing
facility
Days
Dewatering
Type of device
30
30
Belt press
Centrifuge
Filter press
Drying bed
Belt press
Centrifuge
Filter press
Drying bed *
Operating period of
mechanical thickening
and dewatering facility
5 days/week #
8 hours/day
250 days/year
5 days/week #
8 hours/day
250 days/year
Covered storage area
1 month holding
Minimum dry solids

(content after dewatering)
Handling capacity of
drying bed
20
4 weeks cycle on
450 mm thick feed
20
4 weeks cycle on
450 mm thick feed
1 month holding
Notes:
a)
Access ramp of at least 1.5 m wide shall be provided at all sludge drying
beds
*
#
142
Drying beds must be designed to support mechanical/machine lift for more

than 10 000 PE.
Design to be based on one full-time working shift only.
In computing the area requirements of a sludge drying bed, the designer may
assume a maximum 450 mm depth of sludge feed to the bed. The actual
quantity of sludge from the upstream unit processes needs to be computed
before sizing the bed. Each bed may be designed to handle a maximum of
7 days continuous feed. The next feed to the same bed shall only be after
a minimum of 21 days from the last feed. A one-third (1/3) reduction in
actual land area requirement will be acceptable if fully covered drying beds
are provided. Reduction shall only apply to the total surface area of drying
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines

for thickness.
Stages of Sewage
Treatment and
bed. No reduction is allowed for theRequirements
drying bed
Structures
materials used for the drying bed covers shall be designed to an acceptable
structural
strength
andused
of acceptable
to withstand
local weather
Structures and
materials
for the dryingquality
bed covers
shall be designed
to an
conditions.
acceptable structural strength and of acceptable quality to withstand local weather
conditions.

Untreated Sludge
Screening
Primary Thickening
Preliminary
Treatment
and Digestion
Anaerobic Digestion
Aerobic Digestion (Optional)
Secondary Thickening
(Optional)
Possible disposal
of Liquid Sludge
Chemical Conditioning
Conditioning
and
Dewatering
Mechanical Dewatering
Drying Beds
Drying Lagoons
Storage at works
Utilisation
and
Disposal
To inlet of STW
or
on-site Liquor Treatment Plant
Composting
Transportation from works
Land Reclamation

Land Application
Forestry/Agriculture
Landfill Site
Volume 4
Volume 4
143
131
V)
Ultimate Disposal
The treatment plant project proponent has to indicate in the
proposal the ultimate disposal options and actual volume for
disposal throughout the life time of the plant.
5.13
Tertiary Treatment
5.13.1
Introduction
Tertiary treatment is associated with the requirements to further reduce
or remove pollutants beyond the levels achieved by common secondary
treatment processes. Such requirements can be in the forms of the
removal of nutrients, such as, nitrogen and phosphorus; lower BOD5 or
SS levels; or trace elements of toxic constituents, such as, heavy metals
or refractory organics.
The various methods of tertiary treatment include simple maturation ponds,
adsorption, chemical treatment and filtration; air stripping, mambrane or
reoxygenation.
Tertiary treatment is required before discharging to very sensitive receiving
waters. The Commission will specify the need for such treatment on a
case-by-case basis, depending upon the sensitivity of the project.
5.13.2
Design Requirement
I)
Filtration system
a)
Filtration is the most common tertiary treatment system used to

remove suspended or colloidal matter in the effluent.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
144
Backwashing shall be limited to once per day. The volume

of backwash water shall not exceed 10% of plant throughout.
Backwash water shall be stored in a buffer tank before being
return to the inlet of the plant.
Where used, the facility for dosing conditioners shall be provided
at the inlet of the filter system.
On-line turbidity meter, level detector and flow measurement shall
be utilized to measure filter performance.
If the filters are housed in a building, adequate and safe access

shall be provided for maintenance purposes.
The filters shall have automated backwash features and sized

adequately to allow continuous filtration.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
g)
For package plants, it is preferred to use FRP as the filter vessel.

However, fabricated steel is also acceptable provided that protective
coatings are included. For larger plants, the use of reinforced
concrete is encouraged.
II)
Adsorption (Activated Carbon)
b)
Adsorption shall be preceded by filtration using granular media

to ensure a consistant feed quality, which is affected by pH,
temperature and flow rate.
a)
c)
d)
e)
Activated carbon is used to remove small quantities of refractory

organics, as well as inorganic compounds, such as nitrogen,
sulficles and heavy metals.
Uniform feedwater to avoid any surges that might adversely affect

the carbon adsorption.
Clarity of feedwater is important to avoid restriction of pores or
build up of materials within the pore structure.
Backwashing rate and the frequency required depend on the

hydraulic loading and operational method. Typical duration of
backwashing is 10-15 minutes.
III)
Chemical Treatment
b)
Phosphorous precipitation requires the addition of coagulants,

which usually are lime, alum, sodium aluminate, ferric chloride
and ferrous sulfate.
a)
c)
Chemicals can be used as tertiary treatment for acid-base

neutralisation and precipitation of phosphorous.
Dosing systems and safety features to be provided to assure the

operation and maintenance of the systems can be carried out in
a safe and healthy environment.
IV)
Air Stripping
b)
The design features shall depend on the required level of nitrogen

removal with the critical parameters being tower packing, quantity
of air supply, air and liquid temperatures and process control
measures.
a)
This method is used to remove ammonia nitrogen (NH4 N)

from effluent.
V)
Reoxygenation
a)
This method is used to increase the dissolved oxygen (DO) levels

in the effluent.
Volume 4
145
b)
The different types of reoxygenation systems are cascade,

reoxygenation and mechanical reoxygenation
Requirements
for
Individual Treatment
Processes
c)
Cascade
reoxygenation
is achieved using on the hydraulic design

of structures, such as, weir overflows, flumes, spillways, etc.
d)
b)
e)
d)Design
Mechanical
reoxygenation
is achieved using
mechanicalisequipment
of structures
or mechanical
equipment
based
such as surface aerators, jet diffusers or diffused air (coarse, fine
amount
of
DO
required
for
the
effluent.
bubble, etc.)
VI)
a)
The different types of reoxygenation systems are cascade,
Mechanical
reoxygenation
is achieved
using mechanical equipment
reoxygenation
and mechanical
reoxygenation
as surface
aerators,is jet
diffusers
or the
diffused
(coarse,
fine
c)such Cascade
reoxygenation
achieved
using on
hydraulicair
design
of
bubble,
etc.) such as, weir overflows, flumes, spillways, etc.
structures,
e)
on the
Design of structures or mechanical equipment is based on the
amount of DO
required for the effluent.
Maturation
ponds
PondMaturation
systems are
normally not encouraged because it requires
ponds
large land area and the inherent difficulty in controlling algal
a)
Pond systems are normally not encouraged because it requires large
growth.
In special
cases, difficulty
where land
is in abundance,
land area
and the inherent
in controlling
algal growth.the
In project
proponent
may where
choose
use
this system.
special cases,
landtois in
abundance,
the project proponent may
(VI)
choose to use this system.
134
146
Volume 4
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Section 6
Requirements for
Ancillary Facilities
148
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
6.1
Introduction
This section defines the minimum requirements of ancillary facilities
to be provided at the sewage treatment plants. These requirements are
crucial in ensuring the workability and operability of the plants.
6.2
Water Supply and Wash Water

Water shall be supplied to each site from standpipes and taps, to provide
for sanitary cleansing of plant areas, personal hygiene, safety, fire
fighting, process use and for equipment cooling and/or sealing. Water
shall be connected to potable supply that provides a minimum pressure
of 20 m head across the site. A ring main system shall be provided for
all treatment plants larger than 5000 PE.
Each sewage treatment plant or sludge treatment facility shall be
provided with water tank of at least 445 litre storage capacities or one
day water usage or whichever is higher.
Double backflow prevention shall be provided in all cases. This is to prevent
contamination of any potable water service, including the incoming supply
line.
The water supply system shall be sized to meet the following cases:
i)
ii)
Fire fighting demand as instructed by the local regulations and

any essential plant water demands.
All potentially simultaneous process uses, equipment uses and a

for plant cleansing.
All water supplies and its installation (piping, tanks, air conditioning
drainpipes, gutters and etc.) must be totally isolated from all potential
contact of electrical system by means of total enclosure or suitably
located the electrical system above flood level.
Where required, wash water shall be equipped with booster pump and
where possible, obtain from reclaimed water.
Drawings submitted for approval shall indicate locations of water tapping
point and piping layout. Approval for water tapping should be obtained
from water authority for permanent water supply before submitting
inspection form. All related document, such as water bills and transfer
of ownership, to be submitted before final inspection.
Table 6.1 tabulates the minimum number and location of stand pipe
required in a sewage treatment plant. Typical drawing of stand pipe
are shown in Figure 6.1
Sewerage Treatment Plants
Volume 4
149

Table 6.1 Minimum Number of Recommended Water

Table 6.1 Minimum Number of Recommended Water
Stand Pipe and Location
Stand Pipe and Location
Class of
Class of
STP
STP
1
1
22
33
4
4
Population
Population
Equivalent
Equivalent
1,000
1000
1,001
1001 5000
5,000
5001
20 000
5,001
20,000
>20 000
>20,000
Minimum
Minimum
Numbers
Numbers
Location
Location
1
1
2 2
Inlet Works
Inlet Works
Inlet
Works
and
Treatment
Inlet
Works
and
TreatmentProcess
ProcessUnit
Unit
2 2
Inlet
Works
and
TreatmentProcess
ProcessUnit
Unit
Inlet
Works
and
Treatment
Inlet Works, Secondary Screen Area,

Inlet Works, Secondary Screen Area,
Treatment Process Units and Dewatering
Treatment Process Units and Dewatering
Facilities.
Facilities.
Figure 6.1 Standard Details for Stand Pipe

Figure 6.1
Standard Details for Stand Pipe
800
76
648
76
64
8
76
608
15 G.I PIPE
76
80
0
100
STAND PIPE
6.3
6.3
Mess
Facilitiesand
andAblutions
Ablutions
Mess Facilities
All
plants shall
shallhave
havea aminimum
minimum
sanitary
set consisting
All treatment
treatment plants
of of
oneone
sanitary
set consisting
of
of
a
toilet
and
wash
basin.
Washing
facilities,
toilets
and
showers
shall
a toilet and wash basin. Washing facilities, toilets and showers shall be
be
provided
operators
all Class
and 4Class
plants
PE
provided
for for
operators
at allatClass
3 and 3Class
plants4with
PE with
greater
150
138
Volume 4
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines

greater than 5000. Additionally, mess accommodation shall be provided

than
mess accommodation
at 5,000.
Class 4Additionally,
treatment plants
with PE greatershall
thanbe20provided
000. at Class
4 treatment plants with PE greater than 20,000.

Guard house with water and power supply shall also be provided for
Guard house with water and power supply shall also be provided for plant
plant more than 20 000 PE.
more than 20,000 PE.
Figure 6.2 Typical for Administration and Mess Facilities Building
Figure 6.2 Typical for Administration and Mess Facilities
Building
16
Visitors / Staff Parking
Covered Porch
Managers /
Engineers Office
Reception Area
General Office
Supervisor's Office
5
Meeting /
Briefing Room
14
8
Workshop
Sample Reception
& Preparation
Male
Toilet
Female
Toilet
Prayer
Room
12
Control Room
Clean Locker Room

Recreation Area
10
Pantry
13
11
General Store
Eating Area
16
Note :
Dirty Locker Room
9
Toilet / Shower
Motorcycles / Operational Vehicles Parking
The numbers on the layout correspond to the numbers in Table B.1.

The layout is only for indicative purposes only and can be changed ( i.e. floor space and other arrangement)
to suit the plants needs and requirements.
Volume 4
Volume 4
151
139

6.4
6.4
6.4
Minimum internal floor area of mess facilities are 400 meter 2 .

Minimum from
internal
area of mess
facilities
are 400
meter2. floor
Approval
Approval
thefloor
Commission
shall
be sought
if smaller
area
2
from
theinternal
Commission
shallofarrangement
be
sought
ifof smaller
floor
is to bein
Minimum
floor
area
mess
facilities
are 400
meterarea
. is
Approval
is
to be
provided.
Typical
mess
facilities
shown
provided.
Typical arrangement
mess facilities
is shown
Figure
6.2be
from
the 6.2
Commission
shall be ofsought
if smaller
floor in
area
is to
Figure
provided. Typical arrangement of mess facilities is shown in Figure 6.2
Roads and
Roads
andAccess
Access
Roads and Access
All-weather, surfaced
surfaced roads
All-weather,
roads shall
shall be
be provided
provided to
to permit
permit access
access toto all
all
treatment
plants.
The
roads
must
withstand
a
load
of
at
least
15
tonnes.
All-weather,
surfaced
roads
shall
be
provided
to
permit
access
to
all
treatment plants. The roads must withstand a load of at least 15 tonnes.
Such roads
roads
must
also
be
within
plant
access
to
treatment
plants.
must withstand
a the
load
of
atproviding
least
15 tonnes.
Such
mustThe
alsoroads
beconstructed
constructed
within
the
plant
providing
access
each
process
The
construction
shall
with
Such
roads
must unit.
also
be
constructed
within
thecomply
plant
providing
accessWork
to
to
each
process
unit.
The
construction
shall
comply
withPublic
Public
Work
Department
requirement.
Figure
6.3
and
Figure
6.4
illustrate
the
typical
The
construction
shall
comply
with
Public
Work
each
process
unit.
Department requirement. Figure 6.3 and Figure 6.4 illustrate the typical
section of road pavementFigure
and site road.
Department
Figure 6.4 illustrate the typical
section of requirement.
road pavement and 6.3
siteand
road.
section of road pavement and site road.
Figure 6.3
Figure 6.3 Typical Details of Road Pavement
Figure 6.3
40 THK. WEARING COURSE
60 THK.
PREMIXCOURSE
BINDER COURSE
40 THK.
WEARING
10 THK. SAND/QUARRY DUST
60 THK. PREMIX BINDER COURSE
10 THK. SAND/QUARRY DUST
300 THK. CRUSHER RUN

50 THK SAND
300 THK. CRUSHER RUN
50 THK SAND
Figure 6.4
Typical Road Section of Site Road
Figure
6.4 6.4 Typical
TypicalRoad
RoadSection
Section of Site
Figure
SiteRoad
Road
4000
4000
ROAD KERB
ROAD KERB
ROAD KERB
FALL
FALL
FALL
ROAD KERB
FALL

60 THK. PREMIX BINDER COURSE
250 THK.
ROADBASE
60 THK.
PREMIX
BINDER COURSE
THK.
SUB-BASE
250150
THK.
ROADBASE
GEOTEXTILE MEMBRANE APPROVED BY ENGINEERS
150 THK. SUB-BASE
GEOTEXTILE MEMBRANE APPROVED BY ENGINEERS
152
140
140
The on-site road shall be able to provide safe and convenient access for
trucks
or other
equipment
usedsafe
for and
maintenance
purposes.
The
The
on-site
road machinery
shall be able
to provide
convenient
access for
trucks or other machinery equipment
used
for
maintenance
purposes.
The
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Volume 4
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
IndustrySewerage
Guidelines
Malaysian
The on-site road shall be able to provide safe and convenient access for
trucks or other machinery equipment used for maintenance purposes.
The minimum width of the road shall be 4 meter Where vehicles need
to pass frequently or parking is required along the road, the minimum
width shall be 6 m.
Corner of junction for perimeter internal road for tankers or trucks
access shall have a minimum inside radius of 6 meter. Inside radius
for perimeter road not intended for tankers or trucks access shall be
not less than 4 m.
Cul-de-sac at the end of roads shall be provided with turning area
reserve of not less than 9 m.
Where roads for maintenance vehicles or machineries are not required,
concrete or hard surfaced walkways of at least 900 mm width shall
be provided between each process unit. Concrete hardstanding area
can be laid where storage bins are located. The use of steps shall be
avoided, where possible.
Where the ingress or egress of the treatment plant is near a junction of
a public road, an adequate acceleration and deceleration lane must be
made available between the access road and the junction for vehicles
to safely enter and leave the treatment plant.
Vehicular access shall be provided to all unit processes that require
daily operation and maintenance.
6.5
Drainage
The area of the treatment plant shall be adequately drained and this
shall be arranged to prevent surface water run-off from entering the
process units.
Any cleaning or maintenance process wash water must be returned to
the inlet works via a separate drainage system.
External drainage facilities must be provided for treatment plant along the
slope area. Cut off drainage at the entrance must also be provided.
Treatment plant platform level shall be designed above flood level.

If the treatment plant is located in a flood prone area, flap gate shall
be provided to avoid back flow from the river/ main drain. The plant
hydraulic must be designed properly to ensure the discharge head is
adequate to open the flap valve at any circumstances.
Volume 4
153
The effluent discharge shall be directed to the main drain or river

to avoid discharging effluent into a drain within the residential area.
Discharge to a retention pond is not allowed unless prior approval has
been granted.
The receiving drain/watercourse shall have sufficient capacity to accept
the run-off from the plant as well as the effluent discharge from the
treatment plant.
6.6
Fencing and Security

The boundary of a treatment plant, pumping station and/or sludge
treatment facility shall be secured by 3.0 meter high fence. The perimeter
fence shall have an entrance by double gates or sliding barrier to allow
access of maintenance vehicles. The gates shall be secured by padlocks
and shall comply with the requirements of the Commission. Where the
treatment plant is situated in a building, access to the plant must be
secured.
The fence shall be 2.4 meter solid wall with three strands of 0.6 meter
high barbed wire. Typical details of the fence are given in Figure 6.5,
6.6, 6.7 and 6.8.
STP project proponent is required to provide adequate warning/safety
and the Commission signboard before handing over the sewerage system
to the Commission.
154
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
600
Volume 4
Volume 4
INTERNAL
COLUMN @ 3m
CONCRETE
6"x6"
3 NOS. 2.5 DIA. BARBED WIRE
X
X
BRICKWALL FENCE
3000
X
X
63 x 63 x 6
THK. ANGLE
225
X X
150
225
M.S. POST
150 DIA. X 14.6 #
600 x 600 x 900 DEEP GRADE 20

MASS CONCRETE STUMP
3 THK. M.S. PLATE
4200
X
X
600 SQ.
X
X
2100
X
X
X
X
X
X
BRICKWALL FENCE
X
X
3 NOS. 2.5mm DIA. BARBED WIRE

Figure 6.5 Typical Drawing of Brickwall Fencing and Gate

Figure 6.5
Typical Drawing of Brickwall Fencing and Gate
900
150
2400
155
14 3
300
2200
MIN. 900
2T12
750
300
300
750
75
2T12
2T12
750
63 x 63 x 6mm M.S. ANGLE

WITH 3 STRANDS OF BARBED WIRE
750 x 750 x 230mm FOOTING
150 x 300mm GROUND BEAM
115mm THICK CEMENT / SAND

BRICKWALL WITH 20 PLASTERING
BOTH SIDES
100 x 125mm COPING BEAM
45
2T12
T12
R6-200
750 x 750 x 230mm

RC FOOTING
T12
T12
150
R6-200
T12
T12
T12
T12
R6-100
300
750
4T12 B/W
FINISHED GRD. LEVEL
SURFACE TO BE ROUGHENED
LINKS R6-150
4T12
TYPICAL RC COLUMN DETAIL
230
3.) NTERIOR/EXTERIOR WALL COLOUR STANDARDS - DULUX TUNGSTEN (10412) OR EQUIVALENT
2.) TWO BANDS OF IWK'S COLOUR WITH OVERALL HEIGHTS OF 400mm SHALL BE PAINTED ON EXTERIOR FACE OF THE WALL.
APPROVED WEATHER RESISTANT EMULSION PAINT.
1.) ALL EXPOSED WALL SHALL BE PAINTED WITH ONE UNDERCOAT OF APPROVED RESISTING PRIMER SEALER AND TWO COATS OF
PAINTING
7. PLASTERING AND RENDERING TO SURFACE OF BRICKWALL SHALL BE FINISHED TO A MINIMUM THICKNERS OF 20mm WITH 1:3 CEMENT-SAND NORTAR.
6. MORTAR FOR BRICKWORK SHALL BE SET IN 1:1:5 CEMENT-LIME-SAND MORTAR.
5. BRICKWORK WALLS SHALL BE ANCHORED TO CONCRETE FACES USING GALVANISED FISHTAIL A NCHORS TO LAP IN WITH THE BRICK REINFORCEMENT AT EVERY
FOURTH COURSE COMMENCING TWO COURSES ABOVE GROUND BEAM LEVEL.
4. BRICKWORK SHALL BE REINFORCED WITH EXPANDED METAL OR "EXMET" AT EVERY FOURTH COURSE COMMENCINGS TWO COURSES ABOVE GROUND BEAM LEVEL.
3. ALL BRICKS USED SHALL BE FIRST QUALITY CEMENT / SAND BRICKS.
2. MINIMUM COVER TO REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE 25mm.
230
SECTION C-C
T12
T12
FINISHED GRD. LEVEL
115mm THK BRICKWALL

PLASTERED ON BOTH SIDE
230 x 230mm RC COLUMN

AT 3.2m INTERVALS
50mm LEAN CONCRETE
2T12
2T12
SECTION B-B
750
300
1. ALL CONCRETE USED SHALL BE GRADE C25.
NOTES :
SECTION A-A
T12
125
2T12
R6-150
2T12
R6-200
FRONT VIEW OF BRICKWALL FENCING
50mm LEAN CONCRETE
R6-150
R6-200
TYPICAL CROSS SECTION OF BRICKWALL FENCING
3 STRANDS P.V.C. COATED BARBED

WIRE ATTACHED TO POST BY
HEAVY SPLIT PINS
230
2T12
100
2T12
800
2200
MIN. 900
Volume 4
230
230
800
2200
MIN. 900
156
230
3200
Figure 6.6 Brickwall Fencing
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
800
2200
Volume 4
800
PRE-CAST CONCRETE WALL
75mm THICK
T12
T12
FINISHED GRD. LEVEL
SURFACE TO BE ROUGHENED
LINKS R6-150
4T12
230
TYPICAL RC COLUMN DETAIL
45
300
2200
- GREEN
- DULUX GLOSS FINISH

(PANTONE 354C) OR EQUIVALENT
3.) COLOUR STANDARDS

A.) INTERIOR/EXTERIOR WALL
- DULUX TUNGSTEN (10412) OR EQUIVALENT
B.) BANDS - BLUE
PAINTING
1.) ALL EXPOSED WALL SHALL BE PAINTED WITH ONE UNDERCOAT OF APPROVED RESISTING
PRIMER SEALER AND TWO COATS OF APPROVED WEATHER RESISTANT EMULSION PAINT.
2.) TWO BANDS OF IWK'S COLOUR WITH OVERALL HEIGHTS
OF 400mm SHALL BE PAINTED ON EXTERIOR FACE OF THE WALL.
3. FOUNDATION AS PER THE DESIGN OF THE ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE.
1. ALL CONCRETE USED SHALL BE GRADE C25.

2. MINIMUM COVER TO REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE 25mm.
NOTES :
230
SECTION A-A
T12
230
PRE-CAST CONCRETE WALL

75mm THICK

T12
R6-100 C/C
FINISHED GRD. LEVEL
PRE-CAST CONCRETE
WALL 75mm THICK
230 x 230mm
RC COLUMN
AT 3m INTERVALS
2200
TYPICAL CROSS SECTION OF PRE-CAST FENCING
75
FRONT VIEW OF PRE-CAST FENCING
3200
800
3 STRANDS P.V.C. COATED BARBED

WIRE ATTACHED TO POST BY
HEAVY SPLIT PINS
3200
Figure 6.7 Precast Fencing
157
158
146
Volume 4
Volume 4
390mmx190mmx190mm BOND BEAM BLOCK
1 NO HORIZONTAL REINFORCEMENT
390mmx190mmx114mm FULL BLOCK
390mmx190mm190mm BOND BEAM BLOCK
1 NO. HORIZONTOL REINFORCEMENT
ANTI-CLIMB
ELEVATION
2. ALL MASONRY UNITS (CONCRETE BLOCKS) USED MUST BE UNDER

SIRIM CERTIFICATION SCHEME
- GREEN
B.) BANDS - BLUE
- DULUX TUNGSTEN (10412)
- DULUX GLOSS FINISH OR EQUIVALENT
A.) INTERIOR/EXTERIOR WALL
3.) COLOUR STANDARDS
2.) TWO BANDS OF IWK'S COLOUR WITH OVERALL HEIGHTS

OF 400mm SHALL BE PAINTED ON EXTERIOR FACE OF THE WALL.
1.) ALL EXPOSED WALL SHALL BE PAINTED WITH ONE UNDERCOAT

OF APPROVED RESISTING PRIMER SEALER AND TWO COATS OF
APPROVED WEATHER RESISTANT EMULSION PAINT.
PAINTING
4. CEMENT MORTAR USED FOR JOINTS TO BE 1:3 MIX
3. CONCRETE MIX USED FOR GROUTING TO BE GRADE 20
390mm x 190mm x 190mm BOND BEAM BLOCK
1 NO HORIZONTAL REINFORCEMENT
390mmx190mmx190mm FULL BLOCK
390mmx190mmx190mm BOND BEAM BLOCK

SECTION A-A
1. FOUNDATION AS PER THE DESIGN OF THE ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE
NOTE :-
SECTION B-B
3 STRANDS P.V.C. COATED BARBED- WIRE

ATTACHED TO POST BY
HEAVY SPLIT PINS
Requirements for
Requirements
for Ancillary
AncillaryFacilities
Facilities
Figure
6.86.8 Masonry
Masony
Fencing
Figure
Fencing
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
6.7
Beautification Zone and Landscape

Treatment plants shall be effectively and visually screened by a
beautification zone within the treatment plant site of not less than
2 m wide, on which selected species of trees and shrubs can be planted.
In congested or difficult locations, the Commission should be consulted
on these requirements.
Premix or Paved area shall be provided at this zone for all class 1
treatment plants with loading equal or less than 1000 PE or where
necessary.
6.8
Stores and Workshops

All Class 4 Treatment plants that exceed 20 000 PE and have a pump
station within the premises shall be provided with an active store and
workshop.
6.9
Spares
All mechanical units shall be provided with an adequate reserve supply of
critical spare parts. A list of proposed spare parts should be forwarded
for approval when detailed designs are submitted for verification and
approval.
All parts recommended by the manufacturer to be provided with spares
shall be so delivered at the stage of final inspection. Notwithstanding
that, all parts with a life span of 3 years or less shall be provided with
spares
Typical spare parts requirements are provided in Table 6.2. Spare parts
shall be obtained from the original manufacturer of the equipment and
shall be packed and protected for storage to BS1133 requirement.
A set of special tools if required and specific to an equipment including
lifting tackle and greasing equipment necessary for the maintenance,
repair, testing and overhauled of the equipment shall be supplied together
with the spares at the stage of final inspection.
Volume 4
159
Table 6.2 Spare Part

No.
1.
2.
Pumps:
Raw Sewage
Submersible
Pumps.
Grit Pumps.
Feeding Pumps.
RAS Pumps.
Sludge Pumps.
Effluent Pumps.
Motors (Electric):
Drives
a)Direct Couple
b)Chain
c)Belt
Mechanically Raked
Screens
5.
Diaphragm Pump
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
160
Equipment
Progressive Cavity
(Mono) Pump
Blowers
Spare Parts
Bearing
o-ring
oil seal
mechanical seal
wear ring
Impeller (for 3 or more
pump of similar model)
(see Pumps, Motors,
Drives)
one set
one set
one set
one set
one set
one set
one set, whichever parts is
relevant
Bearing
o-ring
oil seal
mechanical seal
one set
one set
one set
one set
gear bearing
chain
sprocket
V-belt
Chain
Chain link
Gear sprocket
(also see Motors,
Drives)
diaphragm
one set
one set
one set
one set
one set
one set
one set
relevant
one set
(see Motors, Drives)

relevant
rubber stator
Aerator:
Diffused Air
Diffusers
Mechanical (surface, (see Motors, Drives)
brush)
Scraper
rotating collectors
wheel
Conveyor
Quantity
Volume 4
one set
10% of total numbers

relevant
one set
one set per clarifier
relevant
relevant
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Table 6.2 Spare Part (continued)
6.10
Yard Lighting
No.
Equipment
Spare Parts
Quantity
11.
Filter Press
oil seal for hydraulic

pump
membrane cloth
one set
one pair out of every five
pair of plates
12.
Belt Press
oil seal for hydraulic

pump
Belt
one set
one set if the STP has only
one press
13.
Centrifuges
(see Drives)

relevant
6.10
Yard Lighting
Effective yard and building lighting systems shall be incorporated within

the treatment plant site in order to provide sufficient illumination for
operation and maintenance schedules to be carried out during day and
night periods. In addition, the entire treatment plant site shall have
sufficient street lights and perimeter lights for various operations, safety
and security reasons.

Compound lighting shall be provided at every 50 m interval for all

manned and security plants. However, sufficient lighting is required at
the strategic location such as entrance gate, inlet works and necessary
areas. Refer to Table 6.3.
All lighting shall be accessible for maintenance / removal. Typical details

of compound lighting are shown in Figure 6.9.
Table 6.3 Numbers of Unit and Location of Compound Lighting

Class of
STP
Population
Equivalent
Minimum
Numbers
of Unit
1 000
1001 5000
5 001 20 000
> 20 000
4
50 meter
Volume 4
Location
Inlet Works or Entrance

Inlet Works and Treatment Process
Unit
Every Internal Corner of STP boundry
and nearby to Inlet Works, Treatment
Process Unit and Sludge Treatment
Entrance, Inlet Works, Mess Building,
Process Treatment Unit, Secondary
Treatment Unit and Sludge Treatment.
161
Requirements
for Ancillary
Facilities Facilities
Requirements
for Ancillary
Figure 6.9 Typical Details of Compound Lighting

Figure 6.9 Typical Details of Compound Lighting
250
290
6000
105
105
670
STANDARD GALVANISED
STREET LAMP POST
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
LAMP POST
6.11
6.12
6.11
Sampling Facilities
Sampling Facilities
Suitable sampling facilities shall be provided (preferably in the form of

Suitable
sampling
facilities
shallthe
be boundary
provided (preferably
form
of an
an open
chamber)
within
of the STP in
to the
allow
representative
open samples
chamber)towithin
the boundary
theperson.
STP toFor
allow
representative
be taken
safely by ofone
treatment
plants up to
samples
to
be
taken
safely
by
one
person.
For
treatment
plants up
to
20 000 PE, sufficient space shall be allowed for proper
preparation
20,000of PE,
sufficient
proper preparation
samples
to bespace
takenshall
awaybetoallowed
central for
laboratories
for furtheroftesting
samples
to
be
taken
away
to
central
laboratories
for
further
testing
and space
and analysis. The sampling area shall contain sufficient
bench
analysis.
sampling
contain
bench
space
and than
and The
storage
spacearea
for shall
samples.
Forsufficient
treatment
plants
greater
storage
space
for
samples.
For
treatment
plants
greater
than
20,000
PE,
20 000 PE, the sampling area shall be provided in accordance the
with MS
sampling
shall ladder
be provided
withsampling
MS 1228.
Access where
1228.area
Access
shall in
be accordance
provided for
facilities
ladder shall be provided for sampling facilities where necessary. Internal
necessary. Internal surface area for sampling point shall be tiled with
surface area for sampling point shall be tiled with clear coloured tiles
clear coloured tiles
6.12

All electrical equipment shall be fitted with auto restart facilities for quick
All electrical
equipment
be fitted
with auto restart facilities for
re-operation
in the event
of failureshall
of power
facilities.
quick re-operation in the event of failure of power facilities.
162
150
Volume 4
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
6.13
Safety Facilities
Safe access and walkways shall be provided at all process units and
equipment (valves, penstocks, aeration tanks, etc.) that require service
and maintenance. Safety handrails shall also be installed at walkways
and other working areas with a fall greater than 2 m. Typical details
of hand rail are shown in Figure 6.10
All chemical storage facilities shall be provided with a safety shower
and eyewash as well as appropriate warning signs. Liquid chemical
storage facilities shall be bund. Access to the area shall be restricted
using lockable doors/gates.
Provision for fire detection, alarm and fire fighting equipment shall
be complying with the latest requirements in the Uniform Building
Bylaws, the Institute of Electrical Engineers (IEE) guidelines and other
statutory requirements.
All tanks shall not exceed 1.2 m above ground.
Stair case and ladder exceeding 1.2 m shall be provided with
handrail
All plants located adjacent to earth slopes shall be provided with proper
slope protection structures. The slope protection design must be certified
by Qualified Professional Engineer.
6.14
Doors
All external doors shall be of weather proof and suitable for out-door
installation.
Door with sufficient width for the manoeuvre of equipment shall be
provided at the building of pump station, blower room, etc. For opening
more than 4 m wide or 5 m high, motorized roller shutter shall be
provided complete with manual over-ride button, which enables it to
be operated during power interruption.
6.15
Fire Hydrant
For treatment plants above 20 000PE, fire hydrant shall be provided
complying with the requirements of Jabatan Bomba.
Volume 4
163
6.16
Power Supply
Power supply shall be provided to each plant from the approved
source. Drawings submitted for approval shall indicate the locations of
electrical power tapping point and schematic layout plan. Approval for
power supply tapping should be obtained from relevant authority for
permanent power supply before submitting inspection form. All related
document, such as electrical bills, transfer of ownership: to be submitted
before final inspection. Requirement of power shall be finalised prior
to obtaining design approval
Requirement of incoming permanent power supply shall be inline with
Section 4 this Volume.
6.17
Internal Sanitation (Toilet)

All plants shall be provided with toilet. The toilet shall consist of water
tap, water closet, shower and wash basin. The area for toilet shall
comply with Uniform Building By Laws. Toilet to be located beside
the control panel building. Toilets can also be located in the mess or
office building.
6.18
Lifting Requirement
Safe lifting weight in unrestricted area is 16 kg. For heavier objects and/
or very tight locations, provision of crane or access for truck mounted
crane to be made.
Lifting requirements are as follows:
-
-
164
Weight < 16 kg:

Manual lifting
16 kg Weight 250 kg: A davit or A frame shall be arranged
to allow items lifted by using manual
chain hoist to be projected on a 1.2
m truck tray and positioned at 2 m
above road level. In the pump station,
motorized hoist is required for lifting
weight exceeding 100 kg.
Weight > 250 kg:
A gantry with motorised hoist shall
be arranged to allow items to be
projected on a 1.2 m truck tray and
positioned at 2 m above road level
truck tray.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Lifting equipment shall be subjected to DOSH approval standards and

guidelines.
Safe Working Load with approved method of installation shall be rated
and printed for all lifting facilities. Height and lifting method must be
considered in the design for Safe Working Load of lifting facilities.
All portable motorised hoist shall be of 230 V operating voltage and fixed
electrical hoist shall be of 415 V operating voltage.
All fixed 3 axis type gantry shall come with additional safety features
such as travel stop limit switch, hoist over run limit switch, slow &
fast speed mode and emergency stop (for all type of hoist).
All fixed type outdoor lifting facility futures shall comprise of hoist
parking bay with shade. All fixed type lifting facility shall come with
working platform and excess ladder.
Typical drawings of lifting davits and A-frame lifting facilities are
shown in Figure 6.11 and Figure 6.12.
6.19
Ventilation
Ventilation is the process of letting in outside air into a space so that it
mixes with the inside atmosphere to dilute contaminants and replenish
oxygen. The purpose of ventilation in a sewage treatment plant is
to provide a comfortable and safe working environment for all plant
personnel.
Hence proper ventilation shall be provided as a mean of providing
sufficient fresh air and reducing poisonous or explosive gases in enclosed
or semi-enclosed spaces where access to human is allowed. Ventilation
can be achieved naturally or mechanically:

Natural ventilation uses the force of nature such as air currents,

breezes, thermal gradients and pressure differences to move air
in and out of the space.
Mechanical ventilation uses fans and blowers to force air

through space. It is also sometimes called forced ventilation.
Particular requirements are:

a)
Ventilation shall be intrinsically safe with respect to explosive

gases (such as methane) where such gases may be present.
b)
Ventilation shall be designed to deal with the different densities

of the various gases.
Volume 4
165
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
166
Ventilation fans shall be located outside the enclosed space to

induce forced air into the plant. Intake locations shall be such
that only fresh air is drawn into the system and not air recirculated
from the exhaust.
Mechanical ventilation shall be used if the system is required to
remove contaminants.
Ventilation exhaust shall be directed to a suitable location for
discharge and it shall not be adjacent to the intake point.
Ventilation at rooms where heat generation may take place must

be adequate to dissipate the heat generated to ensure a comfortable
making ambient for the equipment and the operator.
Noise levels associated with operating fans and blowers, particularly
in a confined space, shall conform to the requirements in Section
4 of this Guidelines and other stationary requirements.
Optimise recurring cost for operation, maintenance and
replacement.
Regular testing and inspection of the equipment
Compliance with the suggested ventilation requirements. Table6.4

presents some commonly used values for ventilation rates in typical
enclosed spaces of a sewage treatment plant: -
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Table 6.4
Space
Common ventilation rates
Minimum Ventilation Rate

(Air Changes/hour, ac/hr)
Remarks
Wet-Well
30 intermittent
12 continuous
Dry-Well
30 intermittent
12 continuous
Grit Removal/
Screen Area
30 intermittent
12 continuous
Same as wet well
Digester Gas
Control Room
30 intermittent
Same as wet well
Sludge Gas
Compressor Room
30 intermittent
Same as wet well
Enclosed Grit
Loading Areas
30 intermittent
Same as wet well
Enclosed Primary
Sedimentation Tanks
30 intermittent
Same as wet well
Scum Concentration
Tank
30 intermittent
Same as wet well
Chlorine and
Sulphur Dioxide
Rooms
60 intermittent
Hazardous areas, toxic fumes,

floor level exhaust required.
Interlock fans with manual
switches located at each
entrance. Also interlock fans
with chlorine and sulphur
dioxide detection. Use 100%
outside air
Filter/Dewatering
Area
12 continuous
Consider odour control for

exhaust air from dewatering
area, where warranted
All other enclosed

unit processes not
mentionedelsewhere
30 intermittent
In particular at blower room,

high tension room, low voltage
room, switchboard and control
panel rooms, where there are
tendency of heat generation
12 continuous
12 continuous
12 continuous
12 continuous
12 continuous
12 continuous
12 continuous
Volume 4
Use 100% outside air. Step up

to 24 ac/hr if hazardous gases
are detected. Consider odour
control, where warranted
167
k)
l)
m)
6.20
An audible and visible warning shall be provided at all entry

points. This shall automatically operate if the fan fails.
Where natural or forced ventilation is provided, it shall be
installed in such a manner so as to avoid any ingress of water
due to rain or other sources.
In areas with routine entry by personnel, the ventilation strategy

shall emphasize adequate control of contaminants and the
ventilation system shall be continuously operated.
Process Water
The designer is encouraged to provide recycle water facilities from
the treated effluent. The recycle water can be utilised for cleaning and
landscaping purposes.
6.21
Aesthetic
The structure of a treatment plant shall blend with the surrounding
development to improve the aesthetic value of the area. Roof, structure
wall or brickwall fancing can be designed with other than conventional
finishing.
6.22
Close Turfing
Unpaved area within the STP reserve shall be turfed with close turfing.
The type of grass must be cow grass. For slope area, turf must be
pegged to avoid grass wash away during water run-off.
6.23
Standard Roofing and related requirement

Roof for control panel shall be of flat roof and shall be installed with
water proving material on the final layer. The slope of flat roof shall
be 1: 20 and gutter shall be provided.
However, for the aesthetic purpose Pitch type roof may be provided.
The slope shall be 30 degree from horizontal. Suitable material for roof
such as roof tile is recommended.
The design of roof shall be considered from the following:
i)
ii)
Suitable material for roof (flat or slope) including colour

Adequate air for ventilations
iii) Enough heights for lifting facilities
168
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
iv) Enough heights for access and headroom

v)
Type of insulation
vi) Acoustic treatment where applicable
6.24
Painting
Painting shall include all plant and machinery inside buildings, including
pipework, grating, handrailing, internal walls below ground level and
all metal work including machinery.
The conduits and piping shall be appropriately named and labelled
indicating flow directions and painted with the following colour codes
for easy identification:
Chlorine line
yellow with double green bands
Fuel gas line
orange
Compressed air line
Potable water supply line

Raw sewage line
Final effluent line

Sludge line
Non-potable water line
Other disinfectant lines

Biogas line
-
-
-
-
green
blue
black
grey
brown
blue with double black bands
yellow with double red bands

yellow
The labels shall be stencilled on the piping in a contrasting colour with

the colour coded bands, if any, located at appropriate and strategic
points.
Colour codes selected for general equipment, building and others items
in a sewage treatment plants shall be adhered to colour standards as
detailed in Table 6.5. The types of paint and surface preparation used
shall be as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
Volume 4
169
Table 6.5 Painting System Index Colour Standards

Item
Colour
Equivalent Colour
Guide
General Equipment including motors

Dark Blue
(unless come with the original manufacturer
approved colour code)
Dulux Regal Blue

0013
Penstocks/Valves/Manhole Covers
Black
Par Bituminous Black
Machinery Guards/Railings/Runways/
Overhead Cranes/Lifting Davit
Yellow
Dulux Lemon 2024
Switchboards
Light Grey
Par Mandarin Blue

0013
Par Golden Yellow

Dulux Pewter 695
Par Willow Grey
00A05
Fencing poles/Gates
Green
Dulux A365-13449
Par Green 3666
Building and Walls Exterior
Grey
(Weathersheild)
Dulux BS 00A0510235
Building and Walls - Interior
White
Fencewall Interior and Exterior
Grey
Dulux BS 00A0510235
Floors - Concrete Interior
Green
Leigh Green 3666
Building Stripes
Green
Dulux A910-13448
Par Green 3666
Blue
Dulux A910-11482
Par Blue 2686
Indah Water Logo (where applicable)
Indah Water
Green
Dulux A365-13449
Par Green 1006
Indah Water
Blue
Dulux A365-11483
Par Blue 1007
Notes:
The above painting requirements are not applicable to stainless steel, aluminium,
galvanised metal surfaces except where necessary to comply with statutory health
and safety requirement.
170
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines

Figure 6.10 Typical Detail of Guard Rail
Typical Details og Guard Rail
550
Figure 6.10
1100
21/4
150-250
100
33
SIDE PALM BASE

TYPICAL RUN OF HANDRAIL AS
VIEWED FROM WALKWAY SIDE
FLAT BASE
550
TUBULAR STANDARDS
1100
1
21/4
150-250
100
12
TYPICAL RUN OF HANDRAIL AS
100
36
TRIANGULAR BASE
VIEWED FROM WALKWAY SIDE

ROUND BASE
TUBULAR STANDARDS
3000 C/C
550
1100
550
3000 C/C
DETAIL OF HOT DIPPED G.I. RAILING
Volume 4
Volume 4
159
171

Figure 6.11 Typical Detail of Lifting Davit

6.11 : Typical Detail of Lifting Davit
50
90
50
75
25
25
25
20
20
FL
FL
30
450
6.11 : Typical Detail of Lifting Davit
30
120
10
6 FILLET WELDED
50
OD=98
0
90
PLAT THICKNESS 10
75
SAFE WORKING
LOAD TO BE
INDICATED
50
25
260
250
1775
25
30
25
20
20
FL
30
450
FL
120
DETAIL À'
10
6 FILLET WELDED
OD = 118
OD=98
SAFE WORKING
LOAD TO BE
INDICATED
DETAIL À'
PLAT THICKNESS 10
SECTION
LIFTING DAVIT
250
1775
260
SIDE VIEW
LIFTING DAVIT
NOTE : DEPTH OF SLEEVE SHALL VARIOUS WITH HEIGHT OF POLE ACCORDINGLY
DETAIL À'
Figure 6.12 : Typical DetailDETAIL

of AÀ'Frame Lifting Facilities
OD = 118
SECTION
LIFTING DAVIT
SIDE VIEW
LIFTING DAVIT
2160
1200
1800
203x203x46Kg/m UB
NOTE : DEPTH OF SLEEVE SHALL VARIOUS WITH HEIGHT OF POLE ACCORDINGLY

180
Figure 6.12 Typical Detail of A-Frame Lifting Facilities

315
203x133x25Kg/m UB
203x133x
25Kg/m UB
2340
2160
1800
203x203x46Kg/m UB
180
1200
2340
Figure 6.12 : Typical Detail of A Frame Lifting Facilities
315
203x133x25Kg/m UB
203x133x
25Kg/m UB
300x300x12 PLATE BOLTED TO CONCRETE
1500
TO PROVIDE WITH ROLLER OR FIX TO THE CONCRETE
FLOOR (TO SYSTEM SUPPLIER DESIGN)
2340
2340

SIDE VIEW
FRONT VIEW
A-FRAME WITH I-BEAM
A-FRAME WITH I-BEAM
1500

FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
A-FRAME WITH I-BEAM
A-FRAME WITH I-BEAM
160
172
160
Volume 4
Volume 4
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Malaysian Sewerage
Section 7
174
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
7.1
Temporary Treatment Plants
7.1.1
Definition
Temporary treatment plants refer to STP that are built to operate on a

temporary basis. The sewage will eventually be diverted to a centralised
sewerage system. After then, the temporary treatment plant will be
decommissioned.
There are 2 categories of temporary treatment plants:
Category 1
For temporary treatment of sewage during the upgrading of an existing
sewerage treatment facility
Category 2
For temporary treatment of sewage during initial stage of a new housing
development where it is not feasible to construct a plant of ultimate
capacity during initial stage or it is located within the catchment of a
centralised sewerage system.
7.1.2
Category 1: Temporary Treatment Plant for Upgrading of

Facilities
During the upgrading of an existing treatment plant, the sewage flows into
that plant shall be directed to a temporary treatment plant for treatment
before discharge. The treatment process of the temporary plant shall
be designed and calculated based on: the duration of the project, total
existing flow and the compliance requirements. The temporary treatment
shall be monitored at regular interval. Approval from the Commission
and DOE must be obtained prior any direct discharge of the untreated
sewage into the receiving watercourse. The temporary treatment plant
shall be located within the compound of the existing site. The temporary
treatment plant shall not be built on other site area unless approval is
granted by the Commission
7.1.2.1
Compliance Standards for Category 1 Temporary Treatment

Plants
Category 1 temporary treatment plant shall comply with the requirements

as stipulated in this Guideline and shall be operated and maintained
to the satisfaction of the Commission and the Director General of the
Department of Environment (DOE) at all times.
The temporary treatment plant shall be designed to comply with the

following minimum effluent requirements:
Volume 4
175
a)
b)
Standard B for STP located downstream of water intake points

and non-water catchment zones
Standard A for STP located upstream of water intake points
The above levels shall be interpreted as absolute pollutant levels.

Final effluents will be monitored over the life of the temporary plant.
A license to contravene shall be obtained before the construction of any
temporary plant and the commencement of any upgrading works.
The temporary plant shall incorporate provisions to minimize adverse impacts
such as visual, noise, odour nuisance etc. to the surroundings.
7.1.2.2
Process Requirements for Temporary Treatment Plants

Alternative or innovative designs may be used for temporary plant to
meet the general design compliance as stipulated above.
Unit processes within the temporary treatment plant can be designed
to absolute standards. For example, a Standard A the effluent level of
temporary treatment plant of this category can be designed to 20 mg/l
BOD and 50 mg/l SS.
Materials for construction can be of semi-permanent installation such
as fiberglass tanks, mild-steel with epoxy coat, etc.
7.1.2.3
Operation of Temporary Treatment Plants

During the upgrading of an existing plant, the project proponent shall
appoint a class license to operate and maintain the temporary plant. If
the upgrading contractor is a licensed operator, they may be appointed
as the operator of the temporary plant.
7.1.3
Category 2: Temporary Plants for New Housing Development

I)
176
Multiple Phases Hosing Development
Temporary plant shall be provided for multiple phases housing

development where it is not feasible to construct a plant with ultimate
capacity during initial stage.
STP reserves must be located as far as practicable from habitable

buildings. The needs of a temporary plant in a multiple phases housing
development project depend on phases of development, size of each
development phase, location of initial development and duration of the
phase lag and entire development plan.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
The project proponent will construct a temporary treatment plant in

compliance with the following criteria:a)
b)
c)
(II)
Temporary plant will be decommissioned by the developer within

time frame agreed between the Commission and the developer.
Implementation program for ultimate plant is confirmed in
accordance to an approved catchment study.
All temporary plant shall remain as private plant and shall be

operated and maintained by a licensed operator appointed by the
project proponent.
Future Connection to Centralised STP
This applies to a catchment where implementation program to construct

a centralised STP is approved but the completion date could not meet
the project proponents needs. Under such circumstances, the project
proponent may be allowed to build a temporary treatment plant.
7.1.3.1
Provision of Land for Temporary Treatment Plants

The owner will be required to allocate land within the housing
development for the construction of all temporary works. However,
the site of the temporary treatment plant shall not be located on future
public amenities land.
The project proponent of the temporary treatment plant will be required
to construct the temporary sewer reticulation within the development to
convey sewage to the temporary treatment plant. At the same time, the
project proponent must also construct the permanent sewer reticulation
for the connection to the permanent plants or the centralised sewerage
system.
7.1.3.2
Compliance Standards for Temporary Treatment Plants

This category of temporary treatment plant shall comply with the
requirements as stipulated in this Guideline. The plant shall also be
maintained to the satisfaction of the Commission and the Director
General of the Department of Environment (DOE) at all times.
The temporary treatment plant shall be designed and maintained to
comply with the following minimum effluent requirements:
a)
b)
Standard B for STP located downstream of water intake points

and non-water catchment zones.
Standard A for STP located upstream of water intake points.
Volume 4
177
7.1.3.3
Process Requirements for Temporary Treatment Plants

Temporary treatment plants shall be designed to the requirements set
out in Sections 3, 4 and 6 of this volume.
An alternative design may be considered for the temporary treatment
plant that will be decommissioned within time frame agreed between
the Commission and the developers.
Materials for construction can be of semi-permanent installation such
as fiberglass tanks, mild-steel with epoxy coat, etc.
Filter systems may use refurbished filter material that meet the relevant
standards. However, other equipment used within the works shall be
new. Second-hand equipment is strictly prohibited.
7.1.3.4
Operation of Temporary Treatment Plants

Temporary plant shall remain as private plant. The owner must appoint
a licensed operator to operate and maintain the plant.
Temporary treatment plants shall strictly comply to the requirements as
stipulated by this Guideline and shall be operated to the satisfaction of
the Commission and the Director General of DOE at all times.
Temporary treatment plants shall be designed and constructed so as
not to present any nuisance in terms of odour, noise, safety and visual
impact to the nearby community.
7.1.3.5
Ancillary Requirement of Temporary Treatment Plants

Temporary treatment plants shall be provided with proper security
fencing in compliance with Section 6 of this Volume.
Adequate access roads and drainage shall be provided.
Landscaping of treatment plant shall be provided for better aesthetic
value surrounding the plant.
178
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
7.2
Treatment Plants Located Within Buildings
7.2.1
Introduction
The installation of treatment facilities within buildings whether occupied
or not, including basements of buildings, are not desirable and will
not normally approve. Every effort must be made to come up with an
alternative site or an arrangement to connect to a public system.
Owners must resolve these issues at an early stage of the planning
process. The Commission should be contacted early to establish if an
alternative option is feasible.
If approved, such installations will be subjected to stringent service
condition requirements for the following criteria:
a)
Access
c)
Electrical requirements for lighting system
b)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Ventilation
Noise control
Process type
Inlet works
Pre-treatment
Confined space safety
Odour Control
Discharge systems
k)
Flood mitigation measures
m)
General safety and health
l)
Operation and maintenance
n)
Sludge handling
o)
Sanitary and plumbing facilities
p)
Fire Fighting Equipment
Treatment plants within buildings will be considered as private treatment

plants subject to eventual phasing out and replacement by a centralised
system.
Volume 4
179
7.2.2
Specific Guidelines and Requirements

The specific guidelines and requirements for the criteria specified in
7.2.1 are listed below.
I)
Access
a)
Vehicle access must be provided from the nearest public

highway.
b)
c)
d)
Parking space for a desludging and service vehicle must be

within operating range.
Access must be continuously available and unobstructed.
Accessible to water and electricity supplies.
e)
Sampling point to be available for final effluent.
g)
Provision must be made for lifting of heavy equipment.
f)
h)
II)
Allowance must be made for installation and removal of

equipment.
Suitable arrangements must be made for service and repair of
equipment.
Ventilation
Ventilation design shall be in compliance with the requirements in

Section 6 and the specific requirements listed below:
a)
b)
c)
180
Suitable system must be provided to address poisonous, explosive

and lack of oxygen conditions.
Separate and independent (from the basement) ventilation must
be provided for the confined spaces.
Ventilation shall be of forced mechanical type.
d)
Ventilation must be intrinsically safe with respect to explosive

gases such as methane.
e)
Ventilation must be designed to deal with the different densities

of the various gases.
f)
Ventilation fan must be located outside the enclosed space to

induce forced air into the plant. Intake locations shall be such
that only fresh air from outside the building id drawn into the
system and not air re0circulated within the building.
g)
Ventilation exhaust must be directed outside the building for

discharge.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
h)
Ventilation air exchanges shall be as follows:
Intermittent: Minimum of 30 complete air changes per

hour
ii) Continuous: Minimum of 12 complete air changes per
hour
A backup fan must be provided in the event of duty fan failure
and must be automatic on entry.
i)
i)
j)
A petrol driven generator with an auto restart facility must be

provided to continually operate the ventilation system in the event
of power failure.
III)
Electrical Requirements for Lighting System
a)
Only high-intensity, low-voltage discharge lamps to be used for

floodlighting of plant area during operation and maintenance.
b)
c)
d)
e)
The lighting and electrical equipment must be both vapour and

explosion proof.
A separate housing must be provided for electrical controls to

prevent electrical sparks from coming into contact with flammable
and explosive gases.
All electrical equipment must be water proof against
submersion.
Standby generators must be provided to allow the plant to operate

independently of the mains supply.
IV)
Noise Control
a)
Adequate dampening of noise must be provided to meet minimum

stipulated requirements by the local Building By-laws, DOE and/
or other regulatory bodies. Silencers and acoustic enclosures shall
be provided where required to achieve the stipulated noise level
reduction.
b)
c)
d)
Noise control measures shall be implemented to control the

generated noise level to below 65 dB at a distance of 2 m from
the boundary of the housed noise source.
General noise levels (measured in decibel units) must also be

measured 10 m from any point of the plant site within the nearest
public space or occupied space or both to an acceptable level
stipulated by the regulator.
Enclosures used to achieve these noise reductions shall permit
ready access to equipment for routine maintenance. Adequate air
ventilation shall be provided to allow cooling of the air inside
the enclosure to prevent over heating of the equipment/motors.
Volume 4
181
V)
Process Type
The type of treatment process must be limited to systems that are easy
to operate and maintain for reasons of:
a)
b)
lower sludge yield and more stable sludge characteristics

lower operational and maintenance requirements
VI)
Inlet Works
The design shall incorporate some means of controlling the influent

velocity to prevent:
a)
b)
c)
d)
excessive wear due to scouring effects

excessive head loss in the inlet
uncontrolled overflow of raw sewage
release of sewer gases
VII)
Pre-treatment
a)
The design must include a macerator to

i)
ii)
b)
c)
reduce toilet waste and large solids into smaller and finer
particles,
reduce the quantity of screenings
iii) improve the ease of handling.
Screening must be provided at 10 to 12 mm clear spacing to

remove fine particles.
A combined grit and grease removal system must be provided.
VIII) Confined Space Safety

a)
Operators must:
i)
ii)
b)
c)
d)
182
attend a recognised confined spaces training course,

obtain training certificates, and
iii) be certified competent to operate in such an environment.
Confined space areas within the plant site must be clearly

identified before handover for operation.
Confined space areas must be demarcated and warning notices
placed.
Confined space procedures must be established and followed by
operatives.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
e)
The following must be provided:

i)
ii)
f)
gas detection equipment, preferably electronic, and serviced

regularly
The design of the treatment plant shall be subject to a Hazard

and Operability Review (HAZOP) exercise to identify and reduce
the potential risks under the following scenarios:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
g)
rescue sets of breathing apparatus
electrical failure
blockage of inlet and outlet
equipment failure including lighting and ventilation

blockage of any pipework
flooding of external discharge point
vi)
failure of building drainage system
i)
flooding
The consequences of such failures to operators may include:

ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
explosion
drowning
falling into open voids

asphyxia
poison
nausea
IX)
Odour Control
a)
Isolate odorous gases from general ventilation exhausts by

containing identified odour generating sources with a separate
local exhaust system.
b)

c)
d)
e)
The local exhaust odorous air shall be conveyed through well

designed and balanced ductworks by a centrifugal fan to an
effective odour treatment equipment.
Odour treatment equipment shall be selected such that odours
be reduced to the lowest possible level and in compliance with
the EQA.
The potential of odour generation, its impact and treatment, shall
be considered in all aspects of design.
Volume 4
183
X)
Discharge Systems
Most basement plants will lie below the level of the running drain
levels. Therefore, it is essential to:
a)
provide an effluent collecting sump prior to pumped discharge.
b)
provide a check valve at the end of the discharge pipe to prevent
the backflow from the monsoon drain to the treatment plant.
c)
provide a 100% redundancy of the discharge pumping
capacity.
XI)
Flood Mitigation Measures
a)
Provision must be made for the isolation of the treatment plant

from flooding by external sources.
b)
A sump pump shall be provided.
XII)
Operation and Maintenance Agreements
a)
All treatment plants installed in basements of buildings must be

subject to an Operation and Maintenance Agreement. An example
of the standard Operation and Maintenance Agreement is given
in MSIG Volume 2.
b)
All treatment plants located within buildings must be operated by

a fully licensed operator and will be subject to periodic checks
by the Commission to ensure compliance.
XIII) Occupational Safety and Health

a)
All treatment plants shall be designed to comply with the

Occupational Safety and Health Act, 1994. Properly designed
treatment plants will enable the operator to safely handle the
treatment plant throughout its design life. A brief summary of
the contents of Act 514 is attached in Appendix A.
XIV) Sludge Handling

a)
b)
c)
184
An aerated sludge holding tank shall be provided to keep the

sludge from going septic
Permanent pipe work with proper coupling and isolation valve

should be provided adjacent to the access gate for easy coupling
sludge tankers hose of hose for during desludging of the sludge
holding tank.
To provide sludge pump for desludging purpose.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
XV)
a)
Sanitary and Plumbing facilities

To provide stand pipe for cleaning purposes. Waste water to be
channelled back to the inlet of plant.
XVI) Fire fighting system

a)
To provide appropriate fire fighting systems in accordance to

Fire Department and other statutory requirements.
7.3
Fully Enclosed Treatment Plant
7.3.1
Definition
A fully enclosed plant is defined as a treatment plant that is designed
such that their treatment unit processes are located within dedicated
buildings.
A fully enclosed plant is to be equipped with additional features
and requirements to minimize adverse impact to the surrounding
environment.
Fully enclosed treatment plant shall comply with the following
criteria:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Must be located within a dedicated sewage treatment site.

Provide with appropriate architectural enclosures building.
No unit processes shall be located outside the enclosed buildings/
architectural enclosures.
Individual treatment unit process may be covered with a permanent
structure or housed in an enclosed building.
Provide appropriate landscaping to adequately screen the treatment
plant from other developments in the vicinity.
Appropriate architecture style, landscaping, architecture surrounding

the treatment plant and fencing type must be used.
7.3.2
When approved, fully enclosed treatment plants must comply with the
general requirements set out in Section 3, 4 and 5 of this Volume and
also specific requirements in this Section 7.3 for the following:
i)
ii)
Provision of odour control

Noise control and mitigation measures
Volume 4
185
iii)
Minimize visual impact
v)
Enhance safety, health and operability
iv)
I)
Avoid aerosol effects
Odour Control
The potential for odour generation, its impact and treatment, shall be
considered in all aspects of design.
The range of odorous constituents in such biogenic odours is very
wide and they include: hydrogen sulphide, ammonia, thiols and other
organic sulfur compounds, amines, indole and skatole, volatile fatty
acids and a wide range of organic compounds produced by anaerobic
fermentation.
Particular problems can be found at: Inlet works, primary tanks,

secondary treatment, sites for transfer, storage and treatment of raw
sludges and leakages.
A separate local exhaust system, for containment and exhaust of odorous
air to treatment, will isolate such odours from the general ventilation
system.
Odour treatment equipment shall be selected such that odour is reduced

to the lowest possible level and in compliance with the EQA.
Containment, exhaust and treatment shall be designed as an integrated

package.

II)
Noise Control
Adequate dampening of noise must be provided to meet minimum

stipulated requirements by the local Building By-laws, DOE and/or other
regulatory bodies. Silencers and acoustic enclosures shall be provided
required to achieve the stipulated noise level reduction.
Noise control measures shall be implemented to control the generated
noise level to below 65 dB at a distance of 2 m from the boundary of
the housed noise source.
The general noise levels generated shall also be measured 10 m from any
point of the plant site within the nearest public space and/or occupied
space to an acceptable level stipulated by the appropriate regulators.
Enclosures used to achieve these noise reductions shall permit ready
access to equipment for routine maintenance. Adequate air ventilation
shall be provided to allow cooling of the air inside the enclosure to
prevent over heating of the equipments/motors.
186
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
III)
Aerosol Effects
Aerosol is defined as a suspension of colloidal particles in gases/

atmosphere. Aerosol control measures are important because aerosol
affects the human respiratory system.
If uncontrolled, aerosol could present a health hazard to the operator and
residents due to the reduced buffer zone around the treatment plant.
Screens, open channels and aeration tanks, where violent and turbulent
actions are encountered, may release aerosol. The design of the treatment
plant shall take into consideration any unit processes that are likely to
emit aerosol and mitigating measures shall be undertaken to counter
aerosol release to the atmosphere.

IV)
Safety, Health and Operability
The design of a fully enclosed treatment plant shall address safety,

health and operability aspects. The guidelines given for treatment plants
located within buildings in Section 7.2 shall be followed.
7.3.3
Specific Requirements
I)
Covers for Treatment Unit Processes
The purposes of these covers are to contain odour emission at source

and to reduce visual impact.
The design requirements for treatment unit processes are outlined
below.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Covers to contain odour emission shall be provided at all potential

sources of odour generation for all unit processes located within
the sewage treatment works.
Bins used for the storage of screenings and grit collected in the
pre-treatment area shall be completely covered to reduce visual
impact, odour and to keep vectors away. The designer shall
provide further considerations on the size, type and method of
emptying the bins.
Generally, all unit processes shall be covered or housed within
a building enclosure. This shall include all pre-treatment units,
aeration tanks, and sludge treatment and handling facilities. The
only exception is the secondary clarifier.
The bin shall be located on a bunded, paved area adjacent to an
access road to the treatment plant.
Volume 4
187
e)
f)
The cover shall comply with BS EN 124 if subject to loading.

It shall also be designed to meet the operating condition of the
odour extraction system as well as the location and application
appropriation.
If the cover is exposed to the environment,
i)
ii)
iii)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
Metal covers if used, must have appropriate corrosion

resistant coating in accordance to Section 4 of this
Volume.
Where chipping might occurs at the edge of the cover,

stainless steel reinforcement frame on all sides of a plastic
or FRP cover shall be provided.
Coatings for the concrete and steel shall include coal tar, vinyls
and epoxies in accordance to Section 4.
Covers should be hinged and weigh less than 16 kg to enable
lifting unaided. Beyond a cover weight of 16 kg, assisted lifting
is required.
All unit processes with covers or are housed in a building for

odour and visual impact reduction shall be provided with proper
air extraction and air scrubbing system. These devices shall be
safe to operate and maintain. Odour, noise and visual impact,
and aerosol are the major components for consideration in the
design of an enclosed wastewater treatment plant. Windows
and access hatches that give the operator an extended and
uninterrupted view of the treatment process are mandatory for
all unit processes that are covered.
Covers shall be designed to allow for easy dismantling and easy
access for cleaning of the enclosed plant.
The materials used for the cover structure depend on the type of
cover selected and the characteristics of the odorous environment.
In general, the materials shall be selected to provide durability, ease
of maintenance, corrosion resistance and be relatively inexpensive.
The three most common materials used for containing odours
are concrete, aluminum and FRP. The design requirements for
each of these are outlined below.
i)
188
Plastic or fiberglass cover if used, must be manufactured

with UV inhibitor and will not warp or deform due to
weathering effect.
Concrete
Concrete can support the greatest weight but limits the

plant maintenance workers ability to remove the cover
for major repairs. Concrete covers are subject to corrosion
and should be treated with a protective coating, such as
an epoxy resin.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
II)
ii)
Aluminum
Aluminum covers provide the greatest tensile strength with

the thinnest cross-sectional area and can be placed on a
light weight frame. The lightweight nature and thin crosssectional area of aluminum makes it easier to remove and
store the covers during maintenance operations.
Aluminum covers are generally less expensive than FRP and

concrete, but periodic maintenance in the form of an anodised
coating is necessary to help prevent corrosion. The design
of an aluminum cover shall consider the incompatibility of
aluminum with concrete and other metals. If not, disintegration
of the materials occurs and the structural integrity of the
system could be jeopardized.
iii)
FRP
FRP is light weight and generally can be removed by

plant operator and stored during maintenance operations.
FRP covers also offer resistance to corrosion, but require
periodic maintenance with an ultraviolet inhibitor to enhance
durability, particularly, if exposed to sunlight on a prolonged
basis.
Ventilation system
Ventilation systems are required to supply fresh air for workers to

work in a more comfortable environment and to minimise health and
safety concerns.
All covered unit processes must have proper ventilation systems.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
An exhaust ventilation system shall be provided with air distribution

patterns that effectively purge work areas.
For waste areas that workers must enter, both blowing and
drawing air shall be used to eliminate dead spots.
Areas designed for personnel entry must include relief systems
to avoid overpressure conditions. Designers must estimate cover
system leakage to determine fan capacity.
Force air ventilation systems should be inspected and tested
periodically to ensure proper air flow and air distribution.
Ventilation of enclosed plants can be either intermittent or

continuous. However, intermittent ventilation is not recommended
because it has a lower degree of safety and more difficult to
operate and maintain than continuous ventilation. Continuous
ventilation is typically more expensive to operate because of
higher electricity costs for running the blowers. Intermittent
Volume 4
189
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
ventilation typically requires a higher rate of ventilation. For

example, the wet well and grit removal facility requires 12 air
exchanges for continuos ventilation versus 30 air exchanges for
intermittent ventilation.
The requirement in Section 6 shall be refer for the design of

exchange rate. If the work site is classified as a confined space,
workers without proper respiratory equipment must not occupy
spaces that cannot be ventilated to less than 25% of the permissible
exposure limit (PEL) of the contaminant and less than 10% of
the lower explosive limit (LEL). For example, hydrogen sulfide
which is one of the most common contaminants in enclosed areas
exposed to wastewater has a ceiling concentration of 30 mg/m3
(20 ppm).
Combustible alarms set at a percentage of the LEL and ventilation
failure alarms should be installed in wet wells, screen rooms,
or other enclosed areas where a volatile atmosphere could exist.
These alarms must have both audible and visual indicators to
alert workers that the area is now potentially dangerous as well
as alerting those who are about to enter the problem area.
Before entering the enclosed plant, where there is potential for a

hazardous atmosphere to exist, the operator and/or worker must
be able to test for oxygen deficiency, and combustible and toxic
gases or vapors.
Ventilation systems shall be designed on the basis that the
potential odourous gases have been isolated and contained by
the local exhaust system for odour control.
Ventilation design criteria for work space are as follows:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
190
Avoid positioning supply and exhaust registers at equal

elevations and on the same enclosure wall. This will
prevent short-circuiting the ventilation system and creating
dead zones (areas with no apparent ventilation or air
motion).
Equip the makeup air supply and exhaust registers with
volume dampers to control the airflow rate. Makeup air
supply should be less than what is exhausted to create
negative air pressure within the enclosure.
A duty and standby ventilation system are mandatory.
The standby shall be 100% that of duty.
An external visual indicator, such as green/red light, to be
provided outside the enclosed plant to warn of ventilation
systems failure.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
k)
The design of the ventilation system shall take into account

the noise aspects. Generally, the design work shall include for
sound insulating material, resilient mountings or other appropriate
devices to ensure that the plant runs without noise or vibration
in its final installed position. Noise level from machinery shall
not exceed the level stipulated by the regulators.
III)
Odour Control System
a)
Isolate odorous gases from general ventilation systems by

containment of identified odour generating sources with a separate
local exhaust system.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
IV)

Local exhaust rates for containment shall be designed to provide a
negative pressure, prevent build up of toxic, corrosive or explosive
gases and include provision for process air or air displaced by
changes in the level of liquid inside the covered space.
The local exhaust odorous air shall be conveyed through well
designed and balanced ductworks by a centrifugal fan to effective
odour treatment equipment.
The overall performance of the odour control system shall

comply with the requirements of the Department of Environment
(DOE).
In situations where specific gases such as hydrogen sulphide and
ammonia are significantly present, consideration shall be given
for the installation of a pre-scrubber unit upstream of the main
odour treatment equipment.
Effective odour treatment equipment to be a minimum 90%
removal efficient.
Consideration must be given to the life span of the odour control
system and associated costs in operating and maintaining such
a system.
Vent Stack
The vent stack shall at a minimum 5 m above ground level to ensure

sufficient dispersion of air. Where the stack is located adjacent to a
building, it should be located at least 1 m above the roof line of this
building.
Volume 4
191
V)
Noise Level
All mechanical equipment that are likely to generate noise such as

blowers, compressor and pumps, shall be acoustically isolated to ensure
the noise generated are contained and reduced to below the levels
stipulated by the regulators.

VI)
Sludge Handling
a) Due to the compactness of the site, it is not conceivable to have

sludge drying beds in an enclosed environment.

Instead, an aerated sludge holding tank shall be provided to

prevent the sludge from turning septic. Sand drying beds (either
covered or otherwise) are not an acceptable form of sludge
treatment in an enclosed plant.
b) Permanent pipework with female coupling and isolation valve

should be provided adjacent to the access gate for easy coupling
of tankers hose during desludge of the holding tank.

VII)
Treatment Process Type
It is preferred that treatment in an enclosed environment employs extended

aeration activated sludge because it offers greater process stability and
less potential for generating odours. However, other treatment processes
warrant further considerations if proven that they have other distinct
advantages in an enclosed environment.

VIII) Siting of Plant

a)
b)
192
The enclosed plant needs to be located away from driveways

to allow for regular maintenance of the screens, grit and grease
removal units and wet well of pump stations. If this is not
possible, then bollards shall be erected to protect the workers
while maintaining the plant.
Where plants are located within the premise of a private property,
direct vehicle access is to be provided from the public road to
the plant via a gate in the perimeter fence.
IX)
Groundwater Conditions
a)
Adequate provision must be made to resist the uplift of the

structure due to hydrostatic ground water pressures. The side
and bottom walls shall be designed to withstand the anticipated
hydrostatic pressures.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
b)
The top of the plant shall be located at least 150 mm above the
finished surface level to prevent the inflow of surface run off
into the enclosed plant.
c)
Good perimeter drainage is to be provided to ensure that the

plant is not flooded.
X)
Installation and Removal
Installation and the subsequent removal of all mechanical and electrical

equipment need to be taken into account during the design of the cover.
The following requirements must be carefully catered for:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
XI)
Adequate space for servicing must be provided in the design of

the enclosed plant.
If the installation and/or removal of the equipment require the

service of a crane or any lifting vehicle, then access must be made
available within the treatment plant for these lifting vehicles.
An adequate number of access covers and sizes of openings for the

removal and installation of the equipment shall be provided.
The design of an enclosed plant must allow for the plant to be

fully operational during the installation and/or removal of any
equipment. Alternatively, provisions for temporary bypass should
be accommodated to prevent disruption to the sewage flow while
this work is being carried out.
In situations where it is not possible to readily install a duty
and standby unit, the standby unit can be supplied as a separate
item which is kept in store, provided that the faulty unit can be
removed and the spare unit can be installed within two hours by
general maintenance workers using normal tools.
The wiring, lighting and other electrical or mechanical equipment and

appliances that have the potential to generate sparks that may trigger
an explosion shall be designed and installed to meet the relevant safety
codes to avert the possibility of an explosion.

XII)
Building Plan Approval
If a building structure is used to house the enclosed treatment plant,

then the design of this building must comply with the requirements
stipulated by the relevant Building By-Laws.
Volume 4
193
7.4
Covered and Buried Treatment Plants
7.4.1
Definition
Covered and buried treatment plants refer to treatment plants with covers
that are placed below ground or not more than 1.2 m above ground level.
Covers are provided to reduce the odour, noise and visual impact.
This type of plant is only applicable to Class 1 and Class 2 sewage

treatment plant with treatment capacity no more than 5000 PE. Special
approval by the Commission must be obtained if the plant capacity
exceeds 5000 PE. A compromised buffer zone of 10 m minimum from
the fence to the nearest building boundary line must be provided for
this type of plants. However, the height of the structure is normally
limited to 1.2 m above ground.
7.4.2
General
Covered and buried treatment plants have inherent hazard and restriction
in operability in their actual operation and maintenance. The requirements
in the following sections serve to highlight the minimum improvements
that must be made to these plants in addition to those set out in Section
3, 4, 5 and 6 of this Volume.
7.4.3
Specific Requirements for Covered or Buried Plants of 5,000PE

or Less
I)
The design of these tanks must allow for adequate openings so that
the operator can carry out routine operation and maintenance works
in a safe, efficient and effective manner. These requirements apply to
all unit processes that are covered or buried from the inlet works to
the effluent chamber. Staggered square openings of roughly 600 mm
x 600 mm employed in the past for plants of this nature would not be
acceptable. These openings, as a minimum, must be opened top around
the periphery of the tank.
II)
The designer must take into account the confined space and other related
safety issues for entry into such a tank. Provision of proper access into
each individual tank is mandatory. Where the depth exceeds 2.5 m,
steps with intermediate landings must be included. Other requirements,
such as adequate ventilation prior to tank entry, must be considered and
provided in the design.
194
Openings of Covered and Buried Tanks
Access for Routine Operations and Maintenance of the

Plant
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
III)
Pipework and Aeration System Requirements
Piping for buried plant shall be exposed and accessible for ease of
maintenance. PVC pipes are not allowed.
The aeration system (diffuser) must be retrievable from top opening
without emptying the tank.
VI)
Lighting
Adequate lighting must be provided through adequate opening at the

top of these covered or buried tanks to provide a good view of the
treatment process such as the air diffusion system, screening, degritting
and secondary clarification. This is important for daily plant operations
through visual inspection of the individual unit process and routine
maintenance of the plant.
V)
Hand Railings
Hand railing provisions must be made to prevent falling into open spaces.
These hand rails must be provided on the perimeter of the open tanks
and further enhanced with kick plates.
VI) Desludging Activities
Adequate access within the proposed treatment plant site is to be made
available to allow for desludging tankers to be within the reach of the waste
activated sludge storage tanks without undue difficulty of maneuvering
the vehicle or damaging the buried tanks or pipe works.
VII) Labeling of Treatment Unit Process
Labeling of each treatment unit is to be provided, from the inlet works
to the secondary clarifiers, to avoid confusion with the similar geometry
and sizes used for most treatment units.
VIII) Noise Control
Due to the compromised buffer requirements and proximity to adjacent
developments, the potential for noise pollution is accentuated. The designer
must ensure all noise generating mechanical and electrical equipment
within the treatment plant must be contained and treated acoustically to
meet compliance to existing noise levels stipulated by the Department
of Environment and that set out in Section 4.
IX) Ventilation
Adequate ventilation must be made available to allow for the safe routine
operation and scheduled maintenance of the treatment plant. During
Volume 4
195
design, this ventilation aspect must be considered. The type of ventilation,

portable or permanent, must also be determined during design stage.
X)
Odour Control
Odour Control systems to be provided as required in compliance to the

EQA.
XI)
Buoyancy Effects
The designer must account for the buoyancy effects in the design of buried
or covered tanks. This effect is of concern during high groundwater
conditions and emptying of the tank content during desludging works.
Furthermore, the designer must ensure that the design of these tanks
accounts for the hydrostatic force exerted on the floor from the outside
does not exceed the compressive strength of these covered or buried
tanks. This is to prevent any breakthrough of the floor and subsequent
failure of the tank.
The designer must ensure that the design of these tank at worse case
scenario where the tank is fully emptied. This is to prevent any breakthrough
of the floor and subsequent failure of the tank.
XII) Covers
Covers if employed for odour, visual and noise impacts shall be subjected
to the following requirements:
a)
Lifting may be unaided if the covers are hinged and weigh less
16 kg.
b)
Assisted lifting is required if the covers weigh equal to or above
16 kg.
c)
The cover shall comply with BS EN124 loading requirements.
d)
If the cover is exposed to the environment,
i) Plastic or fibreglass cover if used, must be manufactured with
UV inhibitor and will not warp or deform due to weathering
effect.
ii) Metal covers if used, must have appropriate corrosion resistant
coating in accordance to Section 4 of this Volume.
iii) Where chipping might occurs at the edge of the cover,
stainless steel reinforcement frame on all sides of a plastic
or FRP cover shall be provided.
XIII) Fencing
Adequate fencing must be provided for all plants. Adequate security
shall be provided against unauthorised access.
196
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
7.5
Guidelines for Homestead Developments
7.5.1
Single Developments up to 30 Units or 150 PE in Total
Individual septic tanks may be allowed for single developments of up

to 30 units or 150 PE in total.
Septic tanks will be regarded as temporary treatment plants.
The owner must provide all septic tanks as part of the owners infrastructure
works.
Septic tanks must be constructed to standard design in compliable with

MSIG Volume 5.
7.5.2
Single Developments Over 30 Units in Total With Average

Housing Density Greater Than Five Units per Hectare
For single developments over 30 units in total with an average housing

density greater than 25 persons per hectare, a sewer reticulation and a
communal treatment plant must be provided.
The treatment plant may be classified as permanent.
Sewer reticulation must be appropriately designed to achieve acceptable

hydraulic conditions within topographic and routing parameters.
7.5.3
Single Developments Over 30 Units in Total with Average

Housing Density Less Than Five Units per Hectare
For single developments over 30 units in total and with an average

housing density of less than 25 persons per hectare, a sewer reticulation
and a communal treatment plant is preferred.
The treatment plant may be classified as permanent.
Where the terrain of the development is such that if a communal system

is constructed it will require the construction of too many intermediate
pump stations, then individual treatment facilities may be considered,
subject to the following conditions:
i)
ii)
The individual system must be a system approved by the

Commission.
Where the ground conditions permit, soakaway trenches must
be used for disposal of the final effluent from the treatment
systems.
Volume 4
197
iii)
iv)
v)
Developers shall ensure that home owners enter into an agreement

with the supplier of the systems or licensed contractors, to carry
out operation and maintenance of the system as per design
requirements.
Tanks shall be desludged by the Service Licensee as per terms

of the agreement signed between the Services Licensee and the
Commission.
The Commission and DOE may impose stringent conditions, if

they believe that such measures are required to ensure that the
sewage from the development will not result in an adverse impact
on the environment.
All septic tanks shall be designed in accordance with the requirements

in MSIG Volume 5.
7.6
Non-Compliance with Standards
7.6.1
Introduction
This section describes the types of incidents, which are outside the
control of the operator that may cause a sewage treatment plant to fail its
effluent consent. Generally, the more sophisticated the treatment process,
the more a process is at risk of failure from one of these incidents. It
would be unreasonable to expect the operator of the treatment plants to
perform within the effluent quality standards following such incidents.
However, the operator must always use his best endeavours to rectify
the situation as soon as practicable following such an incident.
The following potential incidents are treated as special cases when

meeting absolute compliance with Standard A or Standard B.
7.6.2
Types of Incidents that Can Cause Treatment Plant Failure

I)
Power Interruption
An interruption in the power supply to a treatment plant will cause

failure in all mechanical treatment processes.
Some large treatment plants have emergency generators which can be
brought on stream to ensure inlet pumping continues.
However, the crude sewage will pass through the plant receiving only
rudimentary treatment and will probably fail to comply with Standard
A and Standard B.
Furthermore, all existing sewage treatment plants have to be restarted
manually once they are tripped through power failure.
198
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
On new works, all treatment plants will be fitted with auto-restart facilities
for immediate resumption of operation when power is reconnected.
II)
Lightning
When buildings or cabinets housing electrical control equipment are struck

by lightning, fail safe surge protection equipment trips all mechanical
equipment.
This requires all the equipment to be reset and switched on again. On
an unmanned plant there will be a delay between the trip-out following
the lightning strike and the operators getting to the plant to reset the
equipment.
During this period the plant may fail to comply with the relevant
standards.
III)
Storm and Flood
During periods of very heavy rain, areas of the local sewer network may
suffer such ingress of storm water that surcharge of the sewer system
will result, causing abnormally large flows to arrive at the STP inlet.
Under these conditions, the treatment plant would receive much higher flows
than that designed for and would suffer severe hydraulic overloading.
The effect would be a rapid wash through of sewage and solids causing
the works to fail to meet standards.
IV)
Major Mechanical Breakdown
In many existing sewage treatment plants, particularly the small ones,

insufficient standby equipment has been provided by the developer.

All new plants must be equipped with standby units having an automatic
change over system in the event of failure.
Existing plants may be out of action for several days while repairs are
carried out to failed equipment. To help alleviate this problem, the operator
needs to carry critical spare parts to help speed the repair process.
V)
Vandalism, Theft and Criminal Damage
If a treatment plant is subject to this form of interference, then the

treatment process is at risk until the necessary repairs are carried out.
Reasonable measures must be taken to deter vandalism.
Volume 4
199
VI)
Deliberate Discharge of Toxic Chemicals
From time to time, irresponsible industrialists may discharge chemical

waste to the sewer in contravention of all the relevant legislation.
This may occur as a one-off dumping exercise, or may be the result
of a small continuous discharge from a trade process which affects the
treatability of the sewage and causes the treatment plant to fail.
VII)
Accidental Discharge of
Substances
Strong Loads or Toxic
From time to time, genuine accidents occur on industrial premises or

on the highway that result in abnormal discharges to the sewer. These
may take the form of serious fires at industrial premises, the sudden
failure of large storage tanks or a major traffic incident involving the
transport of liquid products.
Such discharges to the sewer system would almost always result in the
sewage treatment plant failing to comply until the effects of the discharge
have passed through the system.
VIII) Major Blockages in the Sewer Network System
A blockage in the main sewer network system often causes the sewage
to build up behind the blockage and turn septic.
The sudden release of this large volume of septic sewage by the clearance
of the blockage, may cause temporary overloading of the treatment plant
and lead to a reduction in effluent quality beyond the absolute standard
for a short period of time.
IX)
Defect
Completed treatment plant to be inspected by competent personal. Visual

inspection to be conducted during the final stage of construction. Two
type of defect generally detected during inspection :
200
a)
Minor Defect
b)
Major Defect
Non-critical, do not immediately or unduly affect the performance

of the plant but nevertheless, require attention to rectify faults
within reasonable time frame.
Critical or serious and require immediate action to be taken in
rectifying faults, impair plant performance, unit processes, or
system components.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Consultants responsibility to ensure compliance of the design standard

and good engineering practice.
7.7
Energy Saving
In selection of treatment process or equipment, the designer should

consider the best product which minimized the power consumption for
process and major plant equipment without compromising on the quality
of treatment discharge.
7.8
Recycle and Reuse
a)
b)
c)
To promote/encourage designer to look into potential of energy

reuse.
To utilize the recycle water (reclaim water) for cleaning and
landscaping purposes,
To promote and encourage design to identify potential of sludge

reuse and/or recycle.
Volume 4
201
202
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Section 8
Package Sewage
Treatment Plant
204
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
8.1
Definition
A package sewage treatment plant is a form of treatment plant both for fixed
film and suspended growth processes. It shall consist of a prefabricated
biological treatment system and be limited to the development of the
sewage treatment system between the ranges of 150 to 5000 populations
equivalent (PE).
The package sewage treatment plant is only applicable to Class 1 and

Class 2 STP as defined in Section 4 of this Guidelines. The prefabricated
biological treatment system shall have been given approval by the
Commission prior to the application.
The major components of a package sewage treatment plant are:

I)
a)
b)
c)
d)
Inlet works
Primary screen.
Pump Station (if applicable).
Secondary screen.
Grit and grease chambers.
II)
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Biological treatment system

Balancing Tank.
Aeration/Anoxic Tank.
Clarifier.
Sludge Holding Tank.
Aeration System including blower house.
Sludge Dewatering System.
III)
Outlet works
a)
Disinfection that can be physical, chemical or radiation.
Package sewage treatment plants fall under the category of covered/

buried treatment plants.
8.2

Land Area Requirement

The land area requirements for package sewage treatment plants shall
comply with those recommended for Class 1 and Class 2 Plants in Section
2 of this Guidelines.
The net area does not include the 10 m buffer zone surrounding each
plant, but does include the 5 m set backs and access paths within the
plant.
Volume 4
205
8.3
Design Requirement
a)
b)
All calculations regarding the inlet works, outlet works, biological

processes and hydraulics shall follow the design criteria as stipulated
in the Section 4 and Section 5 of this Guidelines.
All units of package sewage treatment plant and foundation shall

be designed to meet the extreme case scenario as follows:
i)
c)
d)
e)
ii)
When the tanks are fully emptied;
During high groundwater conditions.
The structural design of a tank shall consider all factors that can
affect the strength and integrity of the tank, like soil conditions,
area of installation, etc. All tanks shall be structurally designed
to withstand the maximum earth load and hydrostatic pressure
equivalent to a backfill depth of 1 m.
All civil works of blower house, pump house and control panel room
shall be as recommended in Section 4 and 5 of this Guidelines.
The minimum design life span of the components of the package
sewage treatment plant shall be as Table 8.1 below:
Table 8.1 Minimum Design Life Span of Package Sewage

Treatment Plant Components
Component
Prefabricated tank and other structural

components
Civil
Mechanical & Electrical
Design Life Span
> 50 years
> 50 years
10 years
8.4
Components of Package Sewage Treatment Plant
8.4.1
Layout, Piping and Arrangement of Prefabricated Biological

Treatment System
The prefabricated biological treatment system shall be packaged in terms of
layout, piping, arrangement of the tanks and the biological processes.
The dimension of each tank shall be fixed for each model of the prefabricated
system. All these items shall not be changed once approved.
8.4.2
Prefabricated Tanks
The physical properties of the tanks for package plants shall meet the
material requirements for STP structures as stipulated in Section 4 of this
MSIG. The prefabricated tanks shall come as complete tanks, thus no
206
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines

8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.3
Prefabricated Tanks
welding, jointing, fabrication/moulding of tanks components is allowed
at The
site. physical
The routeproperties
for delivery
of tanks
tanks shall
be planned
so as
of the
for package
plantsproperly,
shall meet
the
notmaterial
to cause
any
damage
to
road
facilities
and
harm
to
road
users.
requirements for STP structures as stipulated in Section 4 of this
MSIG. The prefabricated tanks shall come as complete tanks, thus no
Process
Units/Components
welding,Treatment
jointing, fabrication/moulding
of tanks components is allowed at
site. The route for delivery of tanks shall be planned properly, so as not to
The following table provides the recommended number of tanks for each
cause any damage to road facilities and harm to road users.
unit process against the PE size. The effective volume consideration is
also
incorporated
in the Units/Components
table.
Process
Treatment
The following table provides the recommended number of tanks for each
unit process against the P.E size. The effective volume consideration is also
incorporated in the table.
Table 8.2 Recommended Number of Tanks and Effective Volume
Table 8.2: Consideration
Recommendedfor
Number
ofUnit
Tanks
and Effective Volume
Various
Processes
Consideration for Various Unit Processes
Max Number of
Tanks
PE 1 000
Max Number of
Tanks
Tanks
PE >1 000
Aeration Tank
Anoxic Tank
Clarifier
Sludge
Holding Tank
Name of Tank
Balancing
Tank
Effective Volume
Volume 4
Volume 4
207
191
Note:
Low water level (LWL) is the minimum submergence level of the pumps
to protect it from damage. It is dependent on the type of the pumps, thus
the low water level shall be set according to the pumps manufacturers
requirement Top Water Level (TWL) is the normal operating water level
with adequate freeboard provided.
8.5
Appurtenances
8.5.1
Piping system
8.5.1.1 General
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
The piping used shall be an approved product, supplied and

manufactured by a supplier/manufacturer approved by the Commission
and shall be suitable for the application.
The arrangement of the piping system and interconnection pipes
in the tanks shall not obstruct maintenance work of the equipment
in the tanks.
All the buried piping shall be properly bedded and supported with
the selected compacted fill material.
All the above ground piping shall have a minimum distance of

75 mm from the ground level.
It shall be provided with a proper pipe support and bracket. The
bracket shall be made of hot dipped galvanised steel.
The arrangement/layout of the above ground piping shall minimise

obstruction and maneuverability.
Any installation or assemblies of pipe support that is attached to

the prefabricated tank is not allowed.
8.5.1.2 Inlet and Outlet Pipes

All inlet and outlet pipes of the units of prefabricated biological treatment
system must be pre-fitted at the factory. On-site drilling for holes is
strictly prohibited. All jointing and pipe holes connection shall be factory
fabricated/moulded.
8.5.1.3 Aeration Pipes
a)
208
The air distribution pipe used shall be rigid and can withstand
temperatures up to 150 C and pressures of 25% more than the
design pressure of the blower.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
b)
The air pipe from the blower to the process unit shall be above
ground.
8.5.1.4 Sludge Transfer Pipes

a)
b)
No thread union/coupling is allowed at the sludge transfer pump

piping. The connection shall be double flange with Grade 304
stainless steel bolt and nut.
No bending is allowed for the sewage distribution pipe. A chamber
shall be provided for any changing direction of the flow.
8.5.1.5 Effluent Pipes

The effluent discharge piping system that passes through/bypasses the
disinfection treatment facility shall be designed so as not to cause any
nuisance.
8.5.2
Pumping System
The pumps installed in the package system shall meet the requirements
as stated in Table 8.3 below:
Table 8.3 Technical Requirements of Pumping System
Name of Pump
Transfer Pump
Sludge Transfer
Pump
RAS/WAS Pump
Application Area
Balancing Tank
Sludge Holding
Tank
Clarifier
Minimum Throughlet
50 mm
50 mm
50 mm
Control
Automatic control Manual control

by float switch
by timer
Number of Pump
1 duty, 1 standby
1 duty for each

tank
Type of Pump
Mechanical
Submersible
Pump
Mechanical
Submersible
Pump or Self
Priming Pump
Necessities
Mandatory
Accessories
All pumps shall be completely installed with duct foot, guide

rail and lifting chain made of Grade 304 stainless steel.
Volume 4
Automatic control
by timer and
solenoid valve
1 duty for each tank
PE < 1000 : Air lift
PE 1000 :
Mechanical Pump
209
Note:
1)
Non-submersible pumps shall be provided with parking bay with

shade.
2)
The duct foot shall be installed and assembled at the factory. No

installation/assemblies at site are allowed except for the connection
of the transfer pipe and the guide rail. All fasteners of the duct
foot shall be watertight.
8.5.3
Diffuser
a)
b)
c)
8.5.4
The diffuser shall not be bolted to the bottom of the tank.

The diffuser shall be removable and easy to re-install.
Flow Distribution Chamber

a)
b)
8.5.5
All diffusers must be supported from the tank base. A typical

drawing of the diffuser support is shown in Figure 8.1.
Distribution box shall be provided with adjustable features. A

typical drawing of the distribution box is shown in Figure 8.2.
The design and construction of the distribution chamber shall
prevent any sedimentation.
Manhole Cover/Inspection Chamber Cover

The manhole cover shall follow the requirements as in Table 8.4:
Table 8.4 Technical Requirements of Manhole Cover
Description
FRP
HDPE
Ductile/Cast Iron
Size
600 mm x 600 mm or 600 mm diameter
Installation
At any location on top of the tank except at assembly

joints, rib or reinforced ring location.
Load Bearing Capacity
3.5 kN/m2 (BS EN 12255-1:2002(E))
Maximum Deflection
Limit
10 mm or the span divided by 200, whichever is smaller

(BS EN 12255-1:2002(E))
Class
B 125 in accordance to BS EN 124:1994 or equivalent
Personnel Load
125 kN (fully walk-able) (BS EN 124:1994)
Design Safety Factor
4:1 for allowable stresses shall be met for all load

combinations (ANSI/ASCE 7-98)
210
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Table 8.4 Technical Requirements of Manhole Cover (Continued)

Description
FRP
HDPE
Ductile/Cast Iron
Temperature Range
27C 35C (to incorporate thermal expansion and

contraction)
Standard colour
Black
Coating
Aliphatic acrylic
polyurethane
non-skid coating
Resin
UV Protection
Note:
1.
2.
3.
4.
8.5.6
Black
NA
Black
- Epoxy coating of
200 m
- Hot dip galvanised

of 200 m
Corrosion
resistant
general purpose
polyester
NA
NA
Ultraviolet-light
inhibitors shall
be added to the
laminate
Carbon black
NA
The collar of the manhole shall be raised with a minimum height

of 100 mm above ground level.
The cover shall be equipped with a frame support and hinge, and
attached to the manhole opening.
Each manhole cover must be properly labeled / marked for ease
of identification of the unit process of the system.
NA not applicable
Anchor System Loading

The tank anchor system (straps, cables, turnbuckles, etc.) shall have
strength of at least 1.5 times the maximum uplift force of an empty tank
without backfill in place. All wire straps, cables and turnbuckles must
be made of Grade 304 stainless steel.
8.5.7
Landscaping
The landscaping of the sewage package system shall be in accordance
with those recommended in Section 6 of this Guidelines.
8.5.8
Odour Treatment
The odour treatment shall be incorporated into the package sewage treatment
plant and shall follow the requirements stipulated in Section 7.4.
Volume 4
211
8.5.9

8.6
Ancillary Facilities
The requirement and criteria of other ancillaries such as lifting facilities,
road, water tank, stand pipe, etc shall be in accordance with the design
criteria as stipulated in Section 6 and special requirements in Section
7.4.
Marking and Labelling

Each tank shall at a minimum be marked with the following
information:

Manufactures name or trademark
Manufacturing serial number
Manufacturing date (MM/YY)

Diameter and Capacity
Citation of the standard
The markings shall be printed and adhered to the tank.
212
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Appendix A
Tables
Appendix A - Tables
214
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Appendix A
Appendix A Tables
Table A1
Contaminants of Concern in Sewage Treatment
Table A3
Major Biological Treatment Processes Used for Sewage Treatment
Table A2
Typical Composition of Untreated Domestic Sewage
Table A4
Interim National River Water Quality Standards for Malaysia
Table A6
The Occupational Safety and Health Act 514, 1994 Brief

Summary of Contents
Table A5
Table A7
Table A8
River Clarification

Options for disposal of Sludge and reuse of biosolids
Volume 4
215
Appendix A - Tables
Table A1 Contaminants of Concern in Sewage Treatment
Contaminants
Reason for Concern
Suspended solids
Suspended solids can lead to the development of sludge

deposits and anaerobic conditions when untreated sewage
is discharged in the aquatic environment.
Biodegradable
organics
Composed principally of proteins, carbohydrates and fats,

biodegradable organics are measured most commonly in
terms of BOD (biochemical oxygen demand). If discharged
untreated to the environment, their biological stabilisation
can lead to the depletion of natural oxygen resources and to
the development of septic conditions.
Pathogens
Communicable diseases can be transmitted by the

pathogenic organisms in sewage.
Nutrients
Both nitrogen and phosphorus, along with carbon, are

essential nutrients for growth. When discharged to the
aquatic environment, these nutrients can lead to the growth
of undesirable aquatic life. When discharged in excessive
amounts on land, they can also lead to the pollution of
groundwater.
Refractory organics
These organics tend to resist conventional methods of

sewage treatment. Typical examples include surfactants,
phenols and agricultural pesticides.
Heavy metals
Heavy metals are usually added to sewage from commercial

and industrial activities and may have to be removed if the
sewage is to be reused.
Dissolved inorganic
solids
Inorganic constituents such as calcium, sodium and sulphate

are added to the original domestic water supply as a result
of water use and may have to be removed if the sewage is
to be reused.
216
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Appendix A - Tables
Table A2 Typical Composition of Untreated Domestic Sewage

Concentration (mg/l)
Constituent
Strong
Solids, total
Medium
Weak
1200
720
350
850
500
250
Fixed
525
300
145
Volatile
325
200
105
350
220
100
75
55
20
275
165
80
Settleable solids, ml/l
20*
10*
5*
Biochemical oxygen demand,

5 day, 20C (BOD5, 20C)
400
250
110
Total organic carbon (TOC)
290
160
80
1000
500
250
Nitrogen (total as N)
85
40
20
Organic
35
15
Free ammonia
50
25
12
Nitrites
Nitrates
15
Inorganic
10
Chlorides
100
50
30
Alkalinity (as CaCO3)
200
100
50
Grease
150
100
50
Dissolved, total
Suspended, total
Fixed
Volatile
Chemical oxygen demand (COD)
Phosphorus (total as P)
Organic
* All values except settleable solids are expressed in mg/l.
Volume 4
217
Appendix A - Tables
Table A3
Major Biological Treatment Processes Used for Sewage

Treatment
Type
Common Name
Use
Aerobic processes
Suspended
growth
Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
Activated-sludge process
Conventional (plug flow)
Continuous-flow stirred-tank
Step aeration
Pure oxygen
Modified aeration
Contract stabilisation
Extended aeration
Oxidation ditch
Sequencing batch reactor
Suspended-growth nitrification
Nitrification
Aerated lagoons
Aerobic digestion
Conventional air
Stabilisation, carbonaceous BOD removal
Pure oxygen

Carbonaceous BOD removal
High-rate aerobic algal pond

Attached
growth
Combined
processes
Trickling filters
Low-rate
High-rate
Roughing filters
Rotating biological contactors
Packed-bed reactors
Trickling filter, activated sludge
Activated sludge, trickling filter
Anoxic processes
Suspended
growth
Suspended-growth denitrification
Denitrification
Attached
growth
Fixed-film denitrification
Denitrification
218
continued
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Appendix A - Tables
Table A3
(continued)
Type
Common Name
Use
Anaerobic processes
Suspended
growth
Attached
growth
Anaerobic digestion
Standard-rate, single-stage Stabilisation, carbonaceous BOD removal

High-rate, single-stage
Two-stage
Anaerobic contact process
Anaerobic filter
Carbonaceous BOD removal, stabilisation

(denitrification)
Anaerobic lagoons (ponds)
Carbonaceous BOD removal (stabilisation)
Aerobic/anoxic or anaerobic process

Suspended
growth
Single-stage nitrificationdenitrification
Carbonaceous BOD removal, nitrification,

denitrification
Nitrification-denitrification
Nitrification, denitrification
Attached
growth
Facultative lagoons (ponds)
Combined
processes
Maturation or tertiary ponds
Anaerobic-facultative lagoons
Anaerobic-facultative-aerobic
lagoons
Volume 4
219
Appendix A - Tables
Table A4
Interim National River Water Quality Standards for

Malaysia
Classes*
Parameters (units)
II
IIA
IIB
III
IV
Ammoniacal Nitrogen
(mg/l)
0.1
0.3
0.3
0.9
2.7
>2.7
BOD5 (mg/l)
12
>12
COD (mg/l)
10
25
25
50
100
>100
DO (mg/l)
5-7
5-7
3-5
<3
<1
PH
6.5-8.5
6-9
6-9
5-9
5-9
Colour (TCU)
15
150
150
Elect. Cond.#
(mmhos/cm)
1000
1000
6000
Floatables
Odour
Salinity# (0/00)
0.5
Taste
Total Diss. Solid#

(mg/l)
500
1000
4000
Total SS (mg/l)
25
50
50
150
300
>300
Temperature (0C)
Normal
2
Normal
2
Turbidity (NTU)
50
50
F. Colif. (counts/100
ml)
10
100
400
5000
5000
5000
5000
(20 000)
(20 000)
> 50 000
50 000
50 000
Tot. Colif. (counts/100 100

ml)
N
No visible floatable materials/debris, or no objectionable odour, or no objectionable

taste
Classes are described on the following table
Related parameters, only one recommended for use
Geometric mean
Maximum not to be exceeded
220
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Appendix A - Tables
Table A5
River Clarification
Class
Uses
Conservation of natural environment

Water supply I - practically no treatment necessary (except by
disinfection or boiling only)
Fishery I - very sensitive aquatic species
IIA
Water supply II - conventional treatment required

Fishery II - sensitive aquatic species
IIB
Recreational use with body contact
III
Water supply III - extensive treatment required

Fishery II - common, of economic value, and tolerant species
Livestock drinking
IV
Irrigation
None of the above
Note: This data is adapted from the Water Quality Criteria and Standards for
Malaysia, Final Report July 1986, Department of Environment.
Volume 4
221
Appendix A - Tables
Table A6
The Occupational Safety and Health Act 514, 1994 - Brief

Summary of Contents
Part No.
Content
Preliminary
II
Appointment of Offices
III
National Council for Occupational Safety and Health
IV
General Duties of Employers and Self Employed Persons
General Duties of Designers, Manufacturers and Suppliers
VI
General Duties of Employees
VII
Safety and Health Organisations
VIII
Notification of Accidents, Dangerous Occurrence, Occupational Poisoning and

Occupational Diseases and Inquiry
IX
Prohibition Against use of Plant or Substance
Industry Codes of Practice
XI
Enforcement and Investigation
XII
Liability for Offences
XIII
Appeals
XIV
Regulations
XV
Miscellaneous
The Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) was enacted by the Parliament
in 1994. In general, it is an enabling law in that the duties, responsibilities,
penalties and guidelines are to be followed by each specific industry. The
following table provides an outline of OSHA.
Parts of OSHA have a specific target audience. For example, if the professional
is a designer, then Part V would be applicable with respect to Occupational,
Safety and Health in their design.
222
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Appendix A - Tables
Table A7

Parameters
Limits (mg/kg)
Zinc
900
Copper
250
Nickel
150
Cadmium
12
Lead
1000
Mercury
Chromium
1000
Arsenic
150
Volume 4
223
Appendix A - Tables
Table A8
No
Options for disposal of Sludge and reuse of bio-solids

Type of sludge/
by-product
Liquid primary sludge and

septage
Dewatered primary sludge

and dewatered septage
Pond sludge
Dewatered pond sludge
Digested sludge
Dewatered digested sludge
Lime stabilised sludge
Thermally dried sludge

(pellets/granules)
10
Compost product
Incinerator ash
Source/ Treatment
Process
Option for
Disposal or
Utilization
- Imhoff tanks
- Primary and secondary
clarifiers
- Septic Tanks
- Oxidation ponds
- Aerated lagoons
- Waste stabilization
ponds
D, F, R
- Digesters
- Sludge lagoons
- Anaerobic ponds
D, F, R
- Lime stabilisation
C, D, F, R, S
- Thermal drying
A, C, D, F, L, R,
S, SP
- Drying beds
- Mechanical dewatering
equipment
C, D, I, S
- Drying beds
C, D, F, I, R, S
- Drying beds
C, D, F, I, R, S
- Composting
A, C, D, F, L, R, S
- Incineration
C, D, S, SP
NOTES:
A = Use in agriculture
C = Disposal to controlled dumpsites
D = Disposal to dedicated sludge disposal sites
F = Use in forestry/non-food crops
I = Incinerate
L = Use for landscaping at public amenity areas
S = Disposal to sanitary landfill sites
R = Use in rehabilitation of degraded
SP = Recycled into special product, e.g. building material
224
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Appendix B
References
Appendix B - References
226
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Malaysian Standards

MS 29
Specification for aggregates from natural sources for concrete

MS 144
Specification for cold reduced mild steel wire for reinforcement of concrete

MS 145
Specification for steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete

MS 146
Specification for hot rolled steel bars for reinforcement of concrete

MS 416
Code of practice for the use of structural steel in building

MS 523
Specification for concrete including ready mixed concrete
Part 1
Guide to specifying concrete
Part 2
Methods for specifying concrete mixes
Part 3
Procedures to be used in producing and transporting concrete
Part 4
Procedures to be used in sampling, testing and assessing compliance of
concrete

MS 739
Specification for hot-dip galvanised coatings on threaded fasteners

MS 740
Specification for hot-dip galvanised coatings on iron and steel articles

MS 822
Specification for sawn-timber foundation piles

MS 1037
Specification for sulphate resisting portland cement

MS 1195
Code of practice for structural use of concrete
Part 1
Design and construction
Part 2
Part 3
Special circumstances
Design charts for singly reinforced, doubly reinforced beams and
rectangular columns

MS 1227
Specification for portland pulverised fuel ash cement

MS 1228: 1991
Code of Practice for Design and Installation of Sewerage Systems
Volume 4
227
MS 1241
Specification for fibreglass water tanks - effective capacity of less than 2000
litres

MS 1292
Specification for rubber seals water stops for sealing joints in concrete

MS 1387
Specification for ground granulated blast furnace slag for use with portland
cement

MS 1390
Specification for glass-reinforced polyester panels and panel water tanks

British Standards

BS 476
Fire tests on building materials and structures

BS 1161
Specification for aluminium alloy sections for structural purposes

BS 1615
Specifications for anodic oxidation coatings on aluminium.

BS 3396
Woven glass fibre fabrics for plastics reinforcement

BS 3532
Method of specifying unsaturated polyester resin systems

BS 3749
Specification for E glass fibre woven roving fabrics for the reinforcement of
polyester and epoxy resin systems

BS 4248
Specification for supersulfated cement

BS 4848
Hot rolled structural steel sections
Part 2
Specification for hot finished hollow sections

BS 4921
Specification for sherardized coatings on iron and steel

BS 5493
Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steel structures against
corrosion
228
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
BS 7079
Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products

BS 7123
Specification for metal arc welding of steel and concrete

BS 8118
reinforcement
Structural use of aluminium

Part 1
Part 2
Code of practice for design

Specification for materials, workmanship and protection
European Standard
EN 10088
Stainless Steel
Part 1
Part 3
List of Stainless Steels

Technical delivery conditions for semi-finished products, bars, rods, wire,
sections and bright products of corrosion resisting steels for general
purposes
EN 10029
Specification for tolerances on dimensions, shape and mass for hot rolled steel
plates 3 mm thick or above
EN ISO 9445
Continuously cold-rolled stainless steel narrow strip, wide strip, plate/sheet and cut
lengths. Tolerances on dimensions and form
EN 754
Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Cold drawn rod/bar and tube.

Part
Part
Part
Part
1
2
7
8
Technical conditions for inspection and delivery

Mechanical properties
Seamless tubes, tolerances on dimensions and form
Porthole tubes, tolerances on dimensions and form
EN 755
Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles.

Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Technical conditions for inspection and delivery

Mechanical properties
Round bars, tolerances on dimensions and form
Square bars, tolerances on dimensions and form
Rectangular bars, tolerances on dimensions and form
Hexagonal bars, tolerances on dimensions and form
Seamless tubes, tolerances on dimensions and form
Porthole tubes, tolerances on dimensions and form
Volume 4
229
Part 9

Profile, tolerances on dimensions and form
EN 1676
Specifications for aluminium and aluminium alloy. Alloyed ingots for remelting.

EN 12373
Specification for aluminium and aluminium alloys. Anodizing.

Part 1

Method for specifying decorative and protective anodic oxidation coatings

on aluminium and its alloys.
EN 10162
Specification for cold rolled steel sections. Technical delivery conditions. Dimensional
and cross-sectional tolerances.

EN 13923
Filament-wound FRP pressure vessels. Materials, design, manufacturing and

testing.

EN ISO 8503
Preparation of steel substrates before applications of paints and related products.

Surface roughness characteristics of blast-cleaned steel substrates.
Part 1

Specifications and definitions for ISO surface profile comparators for

the assessment of abrasive blast-cleaned surfaces.
EN 10025
Hot rolled products of structural steels.

Part 1
Part 3
Part 4

General technical delivery conditions.

Technical delivery conditions for normalized/normalized rolled weldable
fine grain structural steels.
Technical delivery conditions for thermomechanical rolled weldable fine
grain structural steels
EN ISO 2063
Thermal spraying. Metallic and other inorganic coatings. Zinc, aluminium and their
alloys.

EN 14020
Reinforcements. Specification for textile glass roving.

Part 1
Designation
Part 3
Specific requirements
Part 2

Methods of test and general requirements

EN 10210
Specification for hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain
steels
230
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Part 2
Tolerances, dimensions and sectional properties.

EN 10296
Welded circular steel tube for mechanical and general engineering purposes. Technical
delivery conditions.
Part 1
Part 2
Non-alloy and alloy steel tubes.

Stainless steel
EN 10297
Seamless circular steel tubes for mechanical and general engineering purposes.
Technical delivery conditions.
Part 1
Non-alloy and alloy steel tubes.
EN 10305
Steel tubes for precision applications. Technical delivery conditions.

Part
Part
Part
Part
1
2
3
4
Part 5
Part 6

Seamless cold drawn tubes

Welded cold drawn tubes
Welded cold sized tubes
Seamless cold drawn tubes for hydraulic and pneumatic power
systems
Welded and cold sized square and rectangular
Welded cold drawn tubes for hydraulic and pneumatic power systems
EN 14118
Reinforcements. Specification for textile glass mats. (chopped strand and continuous
filament mats).
Part 1
Part 2
Part 3

Designation
Methods of tests and general requirements
Specific requirements
EN 10083
Specification for steels for quenching and tempering

Part 3
Technical delivery conditions for alloy steels
ASTM Standard

ASTM D4097
Standard specification for contact-moulded glass-fibre-reinforced thermo set resin

corrosion-resistant tanks.
Volume 4
231
ASTM E84
Standard test method for surface burning characteristics of building materials.

ASTM C582
Standard specification for contact-moulded reinforced thermosetting Plastic (RTP)

laminates for corrosion-resistant equipment.
AS Standard

AS 3750.2
Paints for steel structures Ultra high-build paint

AS/NZS 3750.12
Paints for steel structures Alkyd/micaceous iron oxide

AS/NZS 2312
Guide to the protection of structural steel against atmospheric corrosion by the use
of protective coatings.
Other Reference Materials

232
Buffer Guidelines for the Siting and Zoning of Industries, Department of

Environment
Environmental Quality Act 1974
Environmental Quality (Sewage and Industrial Effluents) Regulations,

1979
Occupational Safety and Health Act, 1994 (OSHA)
Water Quality Criteria and Standards for Malaysia, Final Report, July 1986,
Department of Environment
Environmental Impact Assessment Guidelines for Municipal Solid Waste,

Sewage Treatment and Disposal Projects, Department of Environment.
Factories and Machinery Act 1967 (Revised 1974)
Uniform Building By-Law (UBBL), 1984
Town and Country Planning Act, 1976
Sewerage Services Act 1993
Water Services Industry Act 2006

Electrical Act
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Other Guidelines in This Set

The Malaysian Sewerage Industry Guidelines is comprised of 5 volumes:

Volume 1
Sewerage Policy for New Developments
Volume 3
Sewer Networks and Pump Stations
Volume 2
Volume 5
Sewerage Works Procedures

Septic Tanks
Volume 4
233
Appendix C
Supervisory Control and Data
Acquisition System (SCADA)
Appendix C - Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System (SCADA)
236
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
C-1
Introduction: Overview
SCADA is the acronym for Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition, SCADA
or Human-Machine Interface (HMI). The system allows distributed input to be
continuously monitored without the intervention of an operator and allows supervisor
or operator (depending on security level) to remotely control of equipment operating
status.
Data acquisition begins at the Programming Logic Controller, PLC level and includes
meter readings and equipment statuses that are communicated to the SCADA as
required. Data is then compiled and formatted in such a way that a control room
operator using the HMI can make appropriate supervisory decisions that may be
required to over-ride normal PLC controls. (A SCADA system includes all the
pieces, HMI, controllers, I/O devices, networks, software, etc.).
SCADA systems typically implement a distributed database which contains data
elements called tag points. A tag point represents a single input or output value
monitored or controlled by the system. Tag points can be either hard or soft.
A hard point is representative of an actual input or output connected to the system,
while a soft point represents the result of logic and math operations applied to
other hard and soft points. The point values are normally stored as value-timestamp
combinations; the value and the timestamp when the value was recorded or calculated.
A series of value-timestamp combinations is the history of that point.
The SCADA provides a user-friendly front-end to a control system containing
programmable logic controller (PLC) that provide automated, pre-programmed control
over a process. This enables the SCADA system to gather data automatically and
remotely rather than manually and site in-situ.
A SCADA software can be linked to a database (normally SQL-Structured Query
Language), to provide instant trending, diagnostic data, scheduled maintenance
procedures, logistic information, detailed schematics for a particular sensor or
machine, and expert-system troubleshooting guides. Most major PLC manufacturers
have offered integrated HMI/SCADA systems, many of them using open and nonproprietary communications protocols (such as MODBUS or Profibus).
In short, interfacing on of SCADA with PLC offers efficient monitoring and control
of process in a large installation site and with large number of distributed equipment
at a site. SCADA provide alarm notification, historical and on-line trending plots of
control parameters for effective process monitoring and control. SCADA system can
also be implemented with PPM schedule maintenance notification and reminder.
The SCADA that are installed at the remote sites can be linked to a Master Station
via communication system (Radio frequency or WIFI or other on-line communication
channels). The data from an equipment is collected via on-line data acquisition or,
unless otherwise allowed, on batch mode via data logging devices.
Volume 4
237
The SCADA software can also activate alarm messaging to inform the operator
station for exceptional event (critical alarm) reporting. Remote Access Server (RAS)
features can provide for either via Internet or other dial-up method (fixed line and/
or wireless modem).
All the proposed SCADA software shall be scalable and flexible enough to allow the
integration of any additional SCADA controller in future expansion. It shall provide
with many industrial standard protocols to allow the user to integrate easily.
C-2
Purpose
This document will provide basic technical requirement for implementation of

integrated SCADA/HMI in sewerage system.
C-3
The SCADA system shall be scalable process control solutions designed to meet
the required automation needs in the sewerage industries. The system shall provide
the required level of performance, flexibility, ease of use, and low life-cycle cost
of ownership, making use of the following technology that includes:
The SCADA system shall be Window based client/server system and make use of
the following technologies:

C-4
Dynamic data caching, alarming, human machine interface, history collection,

and reporting functions;
Web viewable, providing secure, advanced user interface HMI capabilities
based on an open industry standard html file format and Web Browser
access;
Extensive list of communication interfaces;
Secure Internet Browser based on-line documentation and support.
Architecture
The SCADA architecture shall be flexible and scalable to allow expansion requirements.
The basic architecture shall incorporate all but not limited to the followings:

238
Standard based workstations;

powerful Windows based server(s);
Windows based clients;
Industry communication standards shall follow IEEE specification;
object-based configuration tools;
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
C-5
controllers/remote terminal units;

with power surge protection;
Modem: digital or analog;
Network switches or routers;
Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS);
data logger & storage devices for continuous monitoring of operation in
the event of cessation of communication;
SCADA Requirement
The SCADA shall utilize all but not limited to the followings available technologies
and features:

HMI Web A web-based architecture that allows HMI and application

data which uses HTML display format to provide casual access of process
graphic displays.
Real-time Database a true Client/Server architecture where a real-time
database on the server provides data to a number of client applications
including:
o Operator stations
o Microsoft office applications (such as Microsoft Excel or Microsoft
Access)
o Internet explorer
Open Systems incorporates open technologies and standards including
SQL, ODBC, DDE, Visual Basic, and other OLE for process control.
Infrastructure in cooperate alarm/event management system; configure
reports, history collection and a variety of standard system trends.
On-line documentation provides users access to system information and
documentation.
Interfaces Data acquisition ability from a wide variety of remote terminal
units and controllers.
Other powerful supervisory control features include:

Integrated detail displays, custom graphics, alarms, history, and reports

Standard control functions
Operator security
Redundant Windows XP/server operation
A common interface for SCADA and other control types such as Hybrid
Control
Database and diagnostic integration with process and discrete controllers
Graphical building tools
Standard and user-definable application templates
International system and local language support
Volume 4
239
Optional applications such as Alarm Pager interface, Downtime Analysis,

and statistical Process Quality Control
Standard facilities shall include but not limited to the followings:

Windows based HMI
Multiple local and remote operator stations

Interface: TCP/IP, fieldbus, Modbus, Hart

Support for redundant controller/RTU communications
Integration of multiple systems

Real-time data access for a wide variety of process connected devices
Supervisory data acquisition and control of controllers and remote terminal
units
alarm management
Extensive historian and trending
Flexible standard or customized reports
Optional Live Video Capture integration
Industry standard local and wide area network integration
Secure data integration with third party applications
ActiveX Document and Scripting support
C-6
Operator Interface
The operator interface station shall allow object based graphics to provide the
HMI for the user with object concern. The system shall employ industry de-factor
standards, such as Microsoft Windows, HTML and the Internet so as to minimize
operator training due to familiarity of operating environment.
Critical information is conveyed using dedicated enunciators for alarms, controller
communication failures, operator/controller messages and equipment downtime
conditions. A dedicated alarm line shows the most recent (or oldest) highest priority,
unacknowledged alarm at all times.
Software system displays shall include but not limited to the followings: Menu/navigation displays
Alarm summary
Event summary
Trends
Operating groups
System status displays
Configuration displays
Loop Tuning displays
Diagnostic and maintenance displays
Summary displays
240
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Optional Live Video integration shall provide remote viewing and viewing control
features.
Security software feature shall provide restricted access, no access and full access
(plant management).
Network access shall permit authorized operator stations on a network to share a
preconfigured number of connections to the system. This allows a number of users
on a network to access production data on off-line basis.
C-7
Database
The SCADA software shall but not limited to the following real-time database:
Analog configuration parameters
Digital configuration parameters
Accumulator configuration parameters
User defined configuration parameters
Each point in the database has a number of associated configurable parameters, all
of which can be referenced relative to a single tag name.
SCADA shall maintain the real time database that requires frequent high-speed
access as memory resident information and other less frequently accessed data as
disk resident data. Memory resident data is logged to data storage device every
specified time frame defined by the administrator to minimize the loss of data in
the event of loss of power.
C-8
Alarm/Event Management
The SCADA software System shall provide comprehensive alarm and event detection,
management, and reporting facilities. Alarm presentation of alarm / event management
shall include but not limited to the followings:

Multiple alarm priorities

Dedicated alarm zone
Configurable alarm priority colors
Associated display
Audible alarms
Alarm cutout
Area assignment
Operator log
Volume 4
241
Hierarchical alarming
Alarm/event reporting
Alarm/communication/ message/downtime annunciator
Alarm priority escalation
The standard Alarm Summary display shall allow operators to focus on the problem
at hand by supporting filters. Alarms may be filtered by:

Area or location or unit processes

Acknowledge Status
Priority
Colors for the various priority levels of alarms can be configured by the user for
display purposes in the Alarm Summary and on custom graphics. The recommended
color codes are provided in Appendix 1. The software shall support configuration
of alarm priority colors and display on all process graphic displays to enables
operators immediately determine critically of the alarm.
The alarm shall annunciate in the status zone blinks with the color of the highest
priority for unacknowledged alarm. The alarms configuration shall consist but not
limited to the followings:

SPV Hi
SPV Lo
Transmitter Hi
Transmitter Lo
Trip
Time out
With each of the configured alarms assigns a priority ranging from "Attention" acknowledge of non-critical alarm that required maintenance attention, "Responsive"
- action required with predefined period, "Urgent" - action required immediately.
The Alarm/Event summary shall list but not limited to the followings:
Alarms
Alarm Acknowledgments
Return to normal
Operator Control Actions
Operator Login & Security Level Changes

On-line Database Modifications
Communications Alarms
System Restart Messages

242
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
C-9
Historian
Historical trend shall provide wide range of sampling frequencies in both datapoint and average formats. The history trend intervals are shall be able to but not
limited to the following displays:
second data-point of pre-defined scale
minute data-point of pre-defined scale
hour data-point of pre-defined scale
minute-average of pre-defined scale
hour-average of pre-defined scale
day-average of pre-defined scale
Month-average of pre-defined scale
The historical data is to be display in various formats describe herewith:
Graphical trend plot displays (average, max, min, and other statically
format)
Tabulation displays (average, max, min, and other statically format)
Query databases of selected parameters.
C-10 Graphical Trending

Graphical trending configuration shall be able to configure by selecting the parameters
to be plot and its time-scales. Minimum trend types shall include but not limited
to the followings:
Single and Multi bar graphs (selectable scales)
Single and Multi-line trends plot (selectable scales)
Multi-range trends plot (selectable scales)
X-Y line and scatter trend plots (selectable scales)

Mathematical plots (logarithm scale, moving average, etc)
Functions provided for analyzing and manipulating data include:

Combination real-time/historical plots
zooming, panning, and scrolling
Configurable trend density
Saving of trend plot and expert to various format (*.xls, HTML, XLM,
etc)
clipboard copy/paste enable
Volume 4
243
C-11 Report Format

The software shall provide but not limited to the following report formats:

Alarm/Event Log reports - selectable time frame, filterable events and

alarms to enable traceability of alarm.
Exportable Excel / Access format - able to save selected data/report format
to Microsoft Excel/Access format.
Statistical data analysis format - generates reports of selectable statistical
functions such as Max/Min and standard deviation.
Point Attribute Log - displaying specific attributes selectable from a
list.
Reports should be generated as required time frame (interval), event-driven, or ondemand basis. Report may be directed to screen, printer, file, or directly to another
computer for analysis or viewing electronically.
C-12 Security
The SCADA software shall provide configurable security levels, control levels
and area assignments. These may be configured for each individual operator or
alternatively for each operator station. The security levels shall be able to configure
the following security levels:
Level
Level
Level
Level
1:
2:
3:
4:
Sign-on for View mode only

View only mode with alarm acknowledge
Level 2 plus control of field parameters
Level 3 plus field parameters of level 4, configure standard system
infrastructure such as reports
Level 5: Level 4 plus user configured field parameters
Level 6: Unlimited access
Operator sign-on/sign-off shall be logged. Any actions initiated by an operator are
logged in the Event database with the operator identifier. In addition any control
actions to a given point is only allowed if the control level configured in the
operator profile exceeds the level assigned to the point.
Logon password shall not be less than 6 alphanumeric characters and shall be
encrypted. Operators may change own passwords; however, new password shall
not be the same as the last 10 passwords used in the previous 3 months. Three
unsuccessful attempts of logon shall lock the operator out for a lock-out period.
Once logged on, an operator can log off at any time or will be automatically signed
off after a defined period of inactivity.
244
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Area assignments limit operator access to graphics, alarms and point data to assigned
areas, providing effective plant partitioning. Individual operator profiles, including
security levels, control levels and area assignments, are activated when operators
sign on to the system. In addition, area profiles can be created enabling plant areas
to be enabled or disabled for control, between certain time and date criteria.
C-13 Scripting
The software shall have the VB or VBA scripting language enable to allow user to
create script that will run when a display is active or scripts can also be attached
to server objects like point parameters, alarm events, report completion and other
events.
C-14 Interfaces
SCADA software provides Data Acquisition and Control facilities to communicate
with a wide range of controllers and Remote Terminal Units (RTUs). The controllers
connection type shall comply with the following communication protocol:
Serial / TCP/IP / ControlNet / Modbus+ / ASCII / TCP/IP / Ethernet
Data Acquisition supports acquisition of data using either:
Periodic Scanning
C-15 Distributed Server Architecture

Distributed Server Architecture is integrated processes when there are multiple control
stations, or for segmenting control across units, providing the ultimate flexibility
for both operations and control. Distributed Server Architecture also provides the
maximum flexibility for geographically distributed sites.
C-16 Web Server

SCADA software shall provide Web Server capability to provide integration
mechanism for plant-centric operational information. Based on the SCADA software
Distributed Server Architecture, a web server bridges the Process Control and
Enterprise domains, dynamically tracking the pulse of the enterprise. Web server
brings many benefits to the end user:

Isolation of non-critical enterprise functions from the process control

system
Consolidated business system integration to/from many SCADA software
systems
Volume 4
245
Consolidation of casual users accounts and licenses in one location

Cross-system reporting
Minimal engineering requirements
C-17 Digital Video Monitoring

The software may have optional Digital Video Monitoring that integrates digital
video controls and storage with the software to assist in process monitoring. Some
of the features are:

Remote monitoring of unmanned sites

Integration with SCADA software, providing event-based capture and
storage of video images
Event-activated, user-activated, and scheduled recording
Ability to search stored video, based on SCADA software events
Scalability from 4 cameras to more than 1,000 cameras.
The DVM shall base on open system hardware that digitizes video from standard
video cameras and transports the video to SCADA software clients anywhere on
the network for real-time viewing.
C-18 Integrated Maintenance Management

Integrated Maintenance Management (IMM) delivers computerized maintenance management
system (CMMS) completely integrated with SCADA software. IMM shall deliver but
not limited to the following key benefits:

More efficient preventive and predictive maintenance

Reduced downtime of critical plant equipment
Effective work scheduling
Automated creation of work orders from SCADA software events and data
values
IMM enables the automated creation, assignment, tracking and closing of maintenance
work orders. If required, work orders can also be manually raised. This is all
managed from either your IMM SQL server database with full access available
through the open Web-based interface of IMM.
246
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
C-19 Application Report

The SCADA software shall have the capability to produce but not limited to the
following reports:

Batch Report
Downtime analysis
Schedule maintenance
Statistical Process & Quality Control (SPQC)
Event archiving
Alarm messaging (SMS or pager)
Batch Reporting integrated reporting of batches process data, to be compiled

and archived by the SCADA software. The batch reports either as a CSV file or
Microsoft Excel, if available.
Downtime Analysis to detect, record and code any equipment breakdowns or process
delays to provide plant downtime analysis. A list of all current downtime events is
maintained as well as the history of previous downtime events, with each assigned
a category and a reason code. Downtime reports may be printed periodically or
on-demand, showing downtime duration sorted by categories and reasons.
Schedule Maintenance allows supervisory control to schedule at a specified time.
The maintenance report of the equipment is to be reported.
Statistical Process & Quality Control (SPQC) - generates statistical report of average
(of specified time period) of the real-time data collected by the system.
Event Archiving archiving events logged data by the system that based on sampling
frequency and storage capacity.
Alarm Messaging reports the alarm messages sent designated supervisors. The report
shall incorporate summary of alarm messages by alarm type and supervisors.
C-20 Application Programming Interface

Application programming interface (API) shall be provided for interfacing with
SCADA software server and the client network based.
The API (programmed in C/C++(visual) or programmed in VB (Visual Basic)) on
the server includes the following functions:

read and write to control module parameters in the database

access to historical data
Volume 4
247
initiate supervisory control actions

access to the alarm/event subsystem
access to user-defined database
provide a prompt for operator input
create alarms/events
C-21 User Documentation

SCADA software documentation shall be made available in three basic forms:

Electronic On-line Documentation using HTML Internet Browser
On-line Help (F1 function key from within applications)

Printed documentation
C-22 Specifications and Sizing

SCADA software Client/Server Specifications
Basic Server Workstation Specifications

Processor
Memory
Hard Disk Size
Display Resolution
Operating System (Minimum)
Network Protocols
Pentium Processor (Latest version)

1 GB
200 GB
1024 x 768, 65K colors
Microsoft Windows (Latest edition)
TCP/IP
Basic Client Workstation

Specifications
Processor
Memory
Hard Disk Size
Display Resolution
Operating System (Minimum)
Network Protocols
248
Pentium Processor (Latest version)

1 GB
200 GB
1024 x 768, 65K colors
Microsoft Windows NT (Latest
edition)
TCP/IP, NFS
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
SCADA software Server Performance
Operational Display Update

Maximum Continuous Display Update Rate
1 sec
Typical Field Change to Display Update Time with

100 Parameters Per Display on a Single Station/
Server
< 2 sec
Typical Display Call Up Time with 100 Parameters

on a Single Station/Server (call up time is dependent
on display complexity; this excludes the first initial
call up)
< 2 sec
SCADA Storage Sizing
Standard
Sampling
Rate
Default
Duration
1 minutes
24 hours
1441
69 days
100 000
6 minute
average
7 days
1682
416 days
100 000
1 hour
average
7 days
170
11.4 years
100 000
8 hour
average
3 months
281
91.2 years
100 000
24 hour
average
1 year
368
273.8 years
100 000
Default
Samples
Volume 4
Maximum
Duration
Storage Capacity
(maximum no. of
samples)
249
Attachment C - 1:
Status/Alarm
Event State
250
Color Coding for Equipment Status
Color & Blinking

Status
Notes of Event
Running
Green (Non-Blinking)
Equipment is in operating
status
Standby
Red (Non-Blinking)
Equipment is in standby
operating status
Off
Red (Blinking)
Equipment is Off or Manual

mode.
Trip
Amber (Blinking):
Equipment Tripped due to the

followings reasons:
1) ELR detection;
2) PSR detection;
3) Over-current;
4) Over-heated motor;
5) MCB Trip;
SP High Level
Yellow (Non-Blinking)
Alarm event of high level than

set point
SP Low Level
Light Blue (NonBlinking)
Alarm event of lower level than

set point
Transmitter Hi
Yellow (Blinking)
Alarm event due to transmitter

high (<=4mA) value.
Transmitter Lo
Light Blue (Blinking)
Alarm event due to transmitter

low (<=4mA) value.
Time Out
Amber (Blinking)
Alarm due to time out by PLC

timer or other timer.
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Instrumentation Panel - Local
Instrumentation Panel - Remote

Instrumentation Panel - Battery
Low
TNB Power (kWh meter)
PLC System
PLC (battery Low)
DO
DI
AO
Indicator
Data Record
Indicator
Measure
Battery Charger
Penstock
SCADA Control /
Monitoring
Indicator
Indicator
Analog (A)/
Digital (D)
AI
Description
of Control
Point
(For Each
Equipment)
Description of Monitoring
Point
(For Each Equipment)
Instrumentation
Panel
SCADA Control and Monitoring Function

Requirement
Qty
Item
Attachment C - 2:
Alarm Low (Fault Report)
Alarm (Fault Report)
Penstock Panel: Manual Switch
Indicator
Penstock Position Actuator (%)
IP open close
control
RTU via RS-485 Serial Link

Alarm - High torque
Penstock - Fully Open
Indicator
Penstock Panel: Auto Switch
Penstock - Fully Close
Penstock - To Open / To Close
Penstock - UPS Low
UPS (battery Low)

Penstock
Primary Coarse Screen
Indicator
Inlet
Indicator
Remote
Control
Indicator
Measure
Screen - Trip
Indicator
Screen - Manual Mode
Screen - To Start / Stop
Screen - Run-hour record
Indicator
Remote
Control
Reset of HourRun meter
Software counter running hours
Differential Level : Upstream
Differential
Downstream
Control Start / Stop operation by

diff. level
Screen - Run
Indicator
Screen - Auto Mode
Level
RSP Pumps
Pump - Run
Pump - Trip
Pump - Off (MCCB)
Pump - To Start / Stop
Pump - Run-hour record
Pump - Ampere
Pump - Voltage
Indicator
Indicator
:
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Remote Start/
Stop
Reset of HourRun meter
Reading
Reading
Counter - Number of start / stop
Ref level for upstream.
1
1
1
1
1
1
Record number of Start / stop

Record non-operation hours
Software control / PLC
1
1
1
1
Record when operation

Volume 4
251
AO
DI
DO
RJ45 / RS485
Cut-off operation
Control Start / Stop operation
by diff. level
by diff. level
by diff. level
by diff. level
For fault identification (Alarm

Fault report)
Fault report)
Fault report)
Fault report)
Fault report)
Pump - Soft Starter Amp/Volt

Comm.
Parameters Setting
/ Review
Float level
US Level
Float Level - L0 On/Off

Level
measurement
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Float Level - L0 Fault
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Sump Pump / Dewatering

Pump
Pump - Run
Indicator
Pump - Off (MCCB)

Pump - Trip
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Ampere / Volmeters
Indicator
Remote Start /
Stop
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Pump - Ampere
Reading
Float level
Pump - Voltage
Indicator
Screen - Run
Indicator
252
Screen - Trip
Screen - Auto Mode
Screen - Manual Mode
Screen - To Start / Stop
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Remote Control
1
1
Volume 4
1
1
1
Indicator
Float Level - L1: ON / OFF
Indicator
Secondary Fine Screen
Indicator
Cut-off operation
by diff. level
For fault identification
Float Level - L0: ON / OFF
Reading
SCADA Control /
Monitoring
AI
Description of
Control Point
(For Each
Equipment)
Point
Analog (A)/
Digital (D)
Qty
Item
For fault identification
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Screen c/v - Trip
Screen c/v - Run
Screen c/v - Auto Mode
Screen c/v - Manual Mode
Screen c/v - To Start / Stop
DO
DI
Mechanical Differential Level :

Upstream
Mechanical Differential Level :
Downstream
Screenings Conveyor
AO
Screen - Run-hour record
AI
Description of
Control Point
(For Each
Equipment)
Point
Analog (A)/
Digital (D)
Qty
Item
SCADA Control /
Monitoring
Indicator
Indicator
Ref level for upstream.
Indicator
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Remote Control
1
1
1
1
1

by diff. level
Screen c/v - Run-hour record
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Screenings Wash Water Pumps
Software counter / Interlock

with screen operation with delay
off.
Wash-water Pump - Trip
Indicator
Wash-water Pump - Run
Wash-water Pump - Auto Mode

Wash-water Pump - Manual
Mode
Wash-water Pump - To Start /
Stop
Indicator
Indicator
1
1
Indicator
Remote Control
Wash-water Pump - Run-hour

record
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Grit Blower - Run
Indicator
Indicator

off.
Grit / Grease System

Grit Blower - Trip
Grit Blower - Auto Mode
Grit Blower - Manual Mode
Grit Blower - To Start / Stop
Indicator
Indicator
Remote Control
1
1
1
1
1
Grit Blower - Run-hour record
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Grit Pump : On
Indicator
Grit Pump - To Start / Stop
Remote Control
Grit Pump : Trip
Indicator
Software counter / software

Timer control operation by
rotation.
Grit Pump - Run-hour record
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Grit Classifier : On
Indicator

rotation.
Grit Classifier - To Start / Stop
Remote Control
Grit Classifier : Trip
Indicator
Grit Classifier - Run-hour record
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Grit Auger : On
Indicator
Grit Auger : Trip
Indicator
Volume 4

rotation.

253
Description of
Control Point
(For Each
Equipment)
AO
DI
DO
SCADA Control /
Monitoring
AI
Point
Analog (A)/
Digital (D)
Qty
Item
Grit Auger - To Start / Stop
Remote Control
Grit Auger - Run-hour record
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Grit Drum Screen : On
Indicator

rotation.
Remote Control
Grit Drum Screen : Trip

Grit Drum Screen - To Start /
Stop
Grit Drum Screen - Run-hour

record
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Auxiliary

rotation.
Indicator
Status
Indicator
Indicator
Reading
Record
Reading
Record
Reading
Indicator
Reading
Record
LV System
Main LV Board Main Breaker
: ON
Main LV Board Main Breaker :
TRIP (Earth Fault)
TRIP (Over Current)
Ampere
Voltage
Room Temperature Monitoring
/ Alarm
Bus Couple : ON
kWHr Meter:
HT System
Bus Couple : OFF
HT Income Panel VCB : ON

HT Income Panel VCB: TRIP
(Earth Fault)
HT Income Panel VCB: TRIP
(Over Current)
HT Income Panel VCB: Ampere
Battery Charger
HT Income Panel VCB: Voltage

Battery Low
Room Temperature Monitoring

/ Alarm
254
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Status
Indicator
Indicator
Reading
Record
Indicator
Record (Alarm fault)
Reading
Indicator
1
1
1
1
Record
Record (Alarm Low)
Reading
Record / Alarm (High)
kWHr Meter
Transformer System
Reading
Record
Transformer Pressure Alarm
CO2 System
TNB Room: CO2 Panel
Activated
Switch Gear: CO2 Panel
Activated
Transformer Room: CO2 Panel
Activated
Indicator
Transformer Temperature Alarm
Indicator
Indicator
Record / Alarm (activated)
Indicator
Indicator
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
CO2 Panel DC supply Battery

Low
Gen Set System
Gen Set - Trip
Gen Set - Run
Gen Set - To Start / Stop

(Remote)
Gen Set - To Stop (Remote)
Gen Set - Run-hour record
Gen Set -Battery Charge
Gen Set -DC Battery Low
Gen Set -Diesel Fuel oil low
Surge Vessel Compressors

System
Air Compressor - Run
Air Compressor - Auto Mode
Air Compressor - Trip
Air Compressor - Manual Mode
Air Compressor - To Start / Stop

Air Compressor - Run-hour
record
Surge Vessel Level Indicator
Fan : Manual
Surge Vessel Pressure Indicator
Force Ventilation: Grit System

Fan : Auto
Fan : ON / OFF
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Remote Start /
Stop
Remote Start /
Stop
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Indicator
Indicator
Record / Alarm (Fault)
Record / Alarm (Low)
Record / Alarm (Low)
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Remote Control
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Level Measure
Pressure Measure
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Scrubber Fan : Auto

Scrubber Fan : ON / OFF
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Scrubber Fan : Trip

Scrubber Fan : To Start / Stop
Aeration Blower
Indicator
Remote Start /
Stop
Blower - Trip
Indicator
Blower - Off (MCCB)
Gas Scrubber System
Blower - Run
Indicator
Remote Start /
Stop
Indicator
Fan : Trip
Fan : To Start / Stop
Scrubber Fan : Manual
Indicator
DO
Indicator
DI
Main Switch Room: CO2 Panel

Activated
MCC Room: CO2 Panel
Activated
Gen Set- CO2 Panel Activated
SCADA Control /
Monitoring
AO
Point
Analog (A)/
Digital (D)
AI
Description of
Control Point
(For Each
Equipment)
Qty
Item
Indicator
Indicator
1
1
1
1
Status & Software counter

running hours
1
1
1
1
Volume 4
Status & Software counter

running hours
255
Blower - Ampere
Blower - Voltage
Temperature Sensor
Blower - Temperature
Air Flow Meter
Air Flow Meter
Force Ventilation: Blower

Room
Fan : Manual
Fan : Trip
Fan : Run-Hour record
Fan : Auto
Fan : ON / OFF
D.O. Meter
D.O. Meter
Anoxic Mixer
Anoxic Mixer - Run

Anoxic Mixer - Trip
Anoxic Mixer - Off (MCCB)
Anoxic Mixer - To Start / Stop
Anoxic Mixer - Run-hour record
Anoxic Mixer - Ampere
Anoxic Mixer - Voltage
Primary or Secondary Clarifier

Clarifier - Run
Clarifier - Trip
Clarifier - Off (MCCB)
Clarifier - To Start / Stop
Clarifier - Run-hour record
Clarifier - Ampere
256
Clarifier - Voltage
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Measure
Measure
RTU via RS-485 Serial Link

rotation.
Measure
Measure
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Remote Start /
Stop
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Indicator
Indicator
Remote Start /
Stop
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Measure
Measure
Indicator
Remote Start /
Stop
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Measure
Record & Alarm (High Temp)
Record & Alarm (low level)
Status & counter no. of start /

stop

stop
Software counter
Indicator
Indicator
Measure
Indicator
Measure
Indicator
DO
Blower - Run-hour record
DI
Blower - VSD Parameters
AO
Remote Start /
Stop
Speed Control
SCADA Control /
Monitoring
AI
Blower - To Start / Stop
Analog (A)/
Digital (D)
Qty
Item
Description of
Control Point
(For Each
Equipment)
Point
Record / Control Speed &

Alarm (Low)
Software counter
Volume 4

rotation.

stop
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Description of
Control Point
(For Each
Equipment)
Analog (A)/
Digital (D)
AI
AO
DI
DO
SCADA Control /
Monitoring
Qty
Item
Point
Pump - Run
Indicator
Pump - Trip
Indicator
Software counter
Pump - Ampere
Indicator
Remote Start /
Stop
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Measure

stop
RAS/WAS Flow Rate Meter
Pump - Off (MCCB)
Pump - Volt
Sludge Flow Meter
RAS/WAS Flow Rate Totalizer
Flow Meter System
Flow Meter
(Data record of flow rate)
Measure
Measure
Measure
1
1
Record
Record
Measure
Record
Flow Meter (Totalizer)
Gravity Thickener
Measure / Reset
G. Thickener - Run
Indicator
G. Thickener - Trip
Indicator
SCADA Software Accumulator

stop
G. Thickener - To Start / Stop
G. Thickener - Run-hour record
G. Thickener - Ampere
G. Thickener - Off (MCCB)
G. Thickener - Voltage
Thickened Sludge Digester Feed

Pump: Primary & Secondary
Indicator
Remote Start /
Stop
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Measure
Measure
Feed Pump - Run
Indicator
Feed Pump - Trip
Indicator
Feed Pump - To Start / Stop
Feed Pump - Run-hour record
Feed Pump - Ampere
Indicator
Remote Start /
Stop
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Measure
Feed Pump - VSD Parameters
Speed Control
Sludge Feed Flow Rate Meter
Measure
Feed Pump - Off (MCCB)
Feed Pump - Voltage
Sludge Flow Meter
Sludge Feed Flow Rate Totalizer
Gas Blower
Measure
Measure
Gas Blower - Trip
Indicator
Volume 4

Software record of running
hours
Record
1
1

stop
Indicator
Indicator
Gas Blower - Run

Gas Blower - Off (MCCB)

hours

Speed control : RTU via RS-485
Serial Link
Record

stop
257
Gas Blower - Run-hour record
Gas Blower - Ampere
Gas Blower - Temperature
Measure
Gas Blower - Voltage
Temperature Sensor
Gas Flow Meter
Gas Flow Meter
Digester Gas Detector Meters
Measure
Measure
DO
Remote Start /
Stop
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Measure
DI
Gas Blower - VSD Parameters
SCADA Control /
Monitoring
AO
Analog (A)/
Digital (D)
AI
Description of
Control Point
(For Each
Equipment)
Point
Qty
Item

Serial Link
hours
Record & Alarm (High)
Record
Record & Alarm (Detection &

Fault)
Record & Alarm (Detection &
Fault)
Record & Alarm (High-Low &
Fault)
Record & Report

Fault)
Alarm (High)
H2S Meter at Dewatering House
Measure
Methane Gas Meter
Measure
PVRV Sensor Meter
Measure
Internal Digester Gas Analyzer
Floating Roof Gas Holder
Measure
Floating Roof Level
Measure
High Lever Alarm
Indicator
PVRV Sensor Meter
Measure
Alarm (Low)
Fault)
Indicator
Record & Timer
Indicator
Record & Timer
Indicator
Indicator
Program Control operation
Indicator

stop
Indicator
Low Lever Alarm
Gas Flare System

Gas Control Actuator
Open
Close
Manual
Auto
Indicator
Valve: Full
Valve: Full
Valve:
Valve:
Gas Control Actuator Valve: ON
Gas Control Actuator Valve:

TRIP
Gas Control Actuator Valve: To
Turn Clockwise
Gas Control Actuator Valve: To
Turn Counter-Clockwise
Flare Igniter : Manual
Indicator
Flare Igniter : ON
Indicator
Pilot Light Igniter
Flare Igniter : Auto
Remote Start /
Stop
Remote Start /
Stop
Indicator
Indicator
Record & Alarm (flame

distinguished)
Flare Indicator
Indicator
Pressure Indicator: Inlet
Measure

Record & Alarm (flame
distinguished)
Record & Report Fault
Belt Press Feed Pump - Manual
Indicator
258
Pressure Indicator: Discharge
Sludge Feed Pump to Belt Press
Measure
Volume 4
Record & Report Fault
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Description of
Control Point
(For Each
Equipment)
AO
DI
DO
SCADA Control /
Monitoring
AI
Point
Analog (A)/
Digital (D)
Qty
Item
Belt Press Feed Pump - Auto
Indicator
Belt Press Feed Pump - Run
Indicator
Belt Press Feed Pump - Trip

Belt Press Feed Pump - Off
(MCCB)
Belt Press Feed Pump - To Start/
Stop
Belt Press Feed Pump - Run-hour
record
Belt Press Feed Pump - Ampere
Indicator

stop
Indicator
Speed Control
Indicator
Belt Press Feed Pump - Voltage

Belt Press Feed Pump - VSD
Parameters
Belt Press Compressors System
Air Compressor - Trip
Air Compressor - Run
Air Compressor - Auto Mode
Air Compressor - Manual Mode
Air Compressor - To Start/Stop/

Stop
Air Compressor - Run-hour
record
Sludge Cake Conveyor
Screen c/v - Trip
Screen c/v - Run
Screen c/v - Auto Mode
Screen c/v - Manual Mode
Screen c/v - To Start / Stop / Stop
Screen c/v - Run-hour record
Belt Backwash Washwater

Pumps
Washwater Pump - Run
Washwater Pump - Auto Mode
Washwater Pump - Trip
Washwater Pump - Manual Mode
Washwater Pump - To Start /

Stop / Stop
Remote Start /
Stop
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Measure
Measure
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Remote Control
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Remote Control
1
1
1

Serial Link

1
1
Indicator

hours
1
1
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
1
1
Reset of Hour-Run
meter

off.
Indicator
Remote Control
Washwater Pump - Run-hour

record
Reset of Hour-Run
meter
Polymer Preparation Unit

off.
Polymer Mixing - Trip
Indicator
Polymer Mixing - Run
Polymer Mixing - Auto Mode
Polymer Mixing - Manual Mode
Polymer Mixing - To Start / Stop
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Remote Control
1
1
Volume 4
1
1
1

259
Description of
Control Point
(For Each
Equipment)
AI
AO
DI
DO
SCADA Control /
Monitoring
Qty
Item
Point
Analog (A)/
Digital (D)
Polymer Mixing - Run-hour

record
Reset of Hour-Run
meter

with screen operation with
delay off
Polymer Dilution Skid - Trip
Indicator
Polymer Dilution Skid - Run
Polymer Dilution Skid - Auto

Mode
Polymer Dilution Skid - Manual
Mode
Polymer Dilution Skid - To Start/
Stop
Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Remote Control
Polymer Dilution Skid - Runhour record
Reset of Hour-Run
meter

off.
Fan : Manual
Indicator
Fan : Run
Indicator
Fan : Off
Fan : Run-Hour record
Indicator
Remote Start /
Stop
Reset of Hour-Run
meter

stop

hours
Force Ventilation: Sludge Feed

& Dewatering Room
Fan : Auto
Notes:
AI = Analog Input
Qty = Quantity
260
Indicator
AO = Analog Output DI = Digital Input
Volume 4
DO = Digital Output
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Attachment C - 3: Representation of SCADA Control Symbols

Attachment C - 3: Representation of SCADA Control Symbols
PUMPS & AERATION DEVICES
PUMPS & AERATION DEVICES
OFF MODE
EQUIPMENT
PUMPS
(Centrifugal)
PUMPS
(Progressive Cavity)
BLOWER
SURFACE AREATOR
234

ON MODE

Volume 4
Volume 4
261
Malaysian Sewerage
Treatment Plant
ACCESSORIES & FITTINGS

ACCESSORIES & FITTINGS
EQUIPMENT
OFF MODE
ON MODE
Valves
(General)
BUTTERFLY VALVE
AGITATOR
CONVEYORS
CONVEYORS SCREW
262
Volume 4
Third Edition
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Page 235
OTHERS
OTHERS
SYMBOLS
EQUIPMENT
PLC CONTROLLER
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
SCADA WORKSTATION
POWER TRANSMISSION
METER
COMPRESSOR
TANK
236
Volume 4
Volume 4
263
Malaysian Sewerage
Treatment Plant
Appendix D
Duty and Standby Requirements
Appendix D - Duty and Standby Requirements
266
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Appendix D
Table D1
Table D2
Table D3
Table D4
Duty and Standby Requirements
Duty and Standby Requirements for Activated Sludge Systems

(Utilising Diffused Aeration)
Duty and Standby Requirements for Activated Sludge Systems

(Utilising Mechanical Surface Aerator)
Duty and Standby Requirements for Rotating Biological Contactor

Systems
Duty and Standby Requirements for Trickling Filter Systems
Volume 4
267
268
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Volume 4
269
270
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Volume 4
271
Appendix E
Appendix E - Glossary of Abbreviations
274
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
ABF
Activated Biofilter
AL
Aerated Lagoon
AS
Activated Sludge
ATU
Allyl Thio Urea
BOD
Biochemical Oxygen Demand
BOD5
Total Five Day Biochemical Oxygen Demand
CAS
Conventional Activated Sludge
CF
Certificate of Fitness
CMAL
Complete Mixed Aerated Lagoon
CMAS
Conventional Mode Activated Sludge
COD
Chemical Oxygen Demand
CPR
Cardio Pulmonary Resuscitation
DMF
Dual Media Filtration
DO
Dissolved Oxygen
DOE
Department of Environment
DOSH
Department of Occupational Safety and Health
DS
Deep Shaft
EA
Extended Aeration
EAMAS
Extended Aeration Mode Activated Sludge
F/M
Food to Microorganism ratio
FAL
Facultative Aeration Lagoon
FWSP
Facultative Waste Stabilisation Ponds
GRP
Glass Reinforced Plastic
HAZOP
Hazard and Operability Review
HRT
Hydraulic Retention Time
HRTF
High Rate Trickling Filter
MCRT
Mean Cell Residence Time
MLSS
Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids
MLVSS
Mixed Liquor Volatile Suspended Solids
Volume 4
275
276
MOD
Modified Oxidation Ditch
MP
Maturation Pond
MS 1228
Malaysian Standard 1228: Code of Practice for Design

and Installation of Sewerage Systems
OD
Oxidation Ditch
OP
Oxidation Pond
OASH
Occupational Safety and Health Act
PE
Qavg
Average Flow
Qpeak
Peak Flow
QRAS
Return Activated Sludge Flow
RAS
Return Activated Sludge
RBC
Rotating Biological Contactor
SBC
Submerged Biological Contactor
SBR
Sequential batch Reactor
SIRIM
Standards and Industrial Research Institute of Malaysia
SS
Suspended Solids
SPAN
Suruhanjaya Perkhidmatan Air Negara (National Water

Services Commission)
SST
Secondary Settlement Tank
STP
TDH
Total Dynamic Head
TF
Trickling Filter
TOL
Total Organic Load
VSS
Volatile Suspended Solids
WAS
Waste Activated Sludge
Volume 4
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
PRINTED BY
PERCETAKAN NASIONAL MALAYSIA BERHAD
KUALA LUMPUR, 2009
www.printnasional.com.my
email: cservice@printnasional.com.my
Tel: 03-92366895 Fax: 03-92224773

MSIG Volume IV - Sewage Treatment Plant

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MSIG Volume IV - Sewage Treatment Plant

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Table of Contents

Introduction and General Planning Requirements

Purpose of This Volume

Recommended Population Equivalent

Figure 1.2 Typical Process and Installation Diagram

Figure 1.4 Typical Mass Balance Diagram

Figure 1.1 Typical Hydraulic Profile

Figure 1.3 Typical Process Flow Diagram

Figure 1.5 Typical Electrical Single Line Diagram

Treatment Plant Classification

2.1.2 Classification by Treatment Plant Capacity

2.2.1 General Selection Considerations

Treatment System Selection / Design

2.2.3 Detailed Design Criteria

2.3.2 Structural Safety

2.3.3 Equipment and Electrical Safety

Classification by Treatment Plant Capacity

Sewage Characteristics and Effluent Discharge Requirements

3.2.1 Purpose of Effluent Standards

EQA Effluent Standards

3.2.2 Interpretation of EQA Effluent Standards

Design Requirements to Achieve EQA Effluent Standards

3.3.2 Design Values

3.3.1 Purpose of Design Requirements

3.4.3 Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD)

3.4.2 Total Suspended Solid (TSS)

3.4.4 Oil and Grease (O&G)

3.4.5 Nitrogenous Compound

Sludge Characteristics and Treatment Requirements

Design Influent Values

Requirements for Physical Design

3.4.1 Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD5)

Design Effluent Values

4.2.1 Buffer Zones

Treatment Plant Siting

4.2.3 Environmental Impact Assessment

4.3.3 Back-up Capacity

Land Area Requirements

4.4.1 Class 1 and 2 Plants

4.4.2 Mechanised Class 3 to 4 Plants

4.4.3 Aerated Lagoons and Stabilisation Ponds

4.4.5 Reduced Land Areas for STPs

Mechanical and Electrical Requirements

4.5.1 Mechanical Installation

4.5.4 Safety Around Equipment

4.5.5 Motors, Controllers and Motor Starters

4.5.8 Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies

4.5.10 Control Requirements

4.5.11 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition

4.5.12 Early Warning System (EWS)

4.5.14 Cables and Cabling Installation

4.5.15 Earthing and Lightning Protection

4.5.17 Manuals, Drawings and Labelling

Material Requirements for STP Structures and Installations

4.6.3 Fibre Reinforced Plastic (FRP)

4.6.5 HDPE (High Density Polyethylene)

Land Area Requirements for Class 1

Land Area Requirements for

Required Land Area for Stabilisation Pond and Aerated

STP Land Area Requirements for Planning Layout Approval 49

Guidelines For Buffer Zone

STP Land Area Requirements for Structure Plans

Plan View of Buffer Zone Requirements

Clear Working Space